Skip to main content

Full text of "[Publications] Extra series"

See other formats


%\t  (fadicst   ^ritbmctics 
in  dznglisb 


(Extra  Scats,  Jto.  cxviii. 
1922  (for  1916). 

Price  15s. 


•4r**"W 


EDITED    WITH    INTRODUCTION 


BY 


ROBERT   STEELE 


LONDON: 
PUBLISHED    FOE    THE    EARLY    ENGLISH    TEXT    SOCIETY 

BY    HUMPHREY    MILFORD,   OXFORD   UNIVERSITY   PRESS, 

AMEN    CORNER,    E.C.  4. 
1922. 


\\v 


(gjlra  Strits,  cxvin. 

in  Cheat  Britain  bv  Richard  Clav  &  Sons,  Limitkd, 
bung  \y,  suffolk. 


INTRODUCTION 

The  number  of  English  arithmetics  before  the  sixteenth  century 
is  very  small.  This  is  hardly  to  be  wondered  at,  as  no  one  requiring 
to  use  even  the  simplest  operations  of  the  art  up  to  the  middle  of  the 
fifteenth  century  was  likely  to  be  ignorant  of  Latin,  in  which  language 
there  were  several  treatises  in  a  considerable  number  of  manuscripts, 
as  shown  by  the  quantity  of  them  still  in  existence.  Until  modern 
commerce  was  fairly  well  established,  few  persons  required  more 
arithmetic  than  addition  and  subtraction,  and  even  in  the  thirteenth 
century,  scientific  treatises  addressed  to  advanced  students  contem- 
plated the  likelihood  of  their  not  being  able  to  do  simple  division. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  study  of  astronomy  necessitated,  from  its 
earliest  days  as  a  science,  considerable  skill  and  accuracy  in  compu- 
tation, not  only  in  the  calculation  of  astronomical  tables  but  in  their 
use,  a  knowledge  of  which  latter  was  fairly  common  from  the  thirteenth 
to  the  sixteenth  centuries. 

The  arithmetics  in  English  known  to  me  are  : — 

(1)  Bodl.  790  G.  VII.  (2053)  f.  146-154  (15th  c.)  inc.  "Of 
augrym  ther  be  IX  figures  in  numbray  ..."  A  mere  un- 
finished fragment,  only  getting  as  far  as  Duplation. 

(2)  Can.b.  Univ.  LI.  IV.  14  (III.)  f.  121-142  (15th  c.)  inc.  "Al 
maner  of  thyngis  that  prosedeth  ffro  the  f rist  begynnyng  .  .  ." 

(3)  Fragmentary  passages  or  diagrams  in  Sloane  213  f.  120-3  (a 
fourteenth-century  counting  board),  Egerton  2852  f.  5-13, 
Karl.  218  f.  117  and 

(4)  Th.-  two  MSS.  here  printed;  Eg.  2622  f.  130  and  Ashmole 
396  f.  48.  All  of  these,  as  the  language  shows,  are  of  the 
fifteenth  century. 

The  Ckafte  of  Nombrynge  is  one  of  a  large  number  of  scientific 
treatises,  mostly  in  Latin,  bound  up  together  as  Egerton  MS.  2G22  in 
the  British  Museum  Library.  It  measures  7"  X  5",  29-30 lines  to  the 
page,  in  a  rough  hand.  The  English  is  X.K.  Midland  in  dialect.  It 
is  a  translation  and  amplification  of  one  of  the  numerous  glosses  on 
the  de  algorismo  of  Alexander  de  Villa  Lei  (c.  1220),  such  as  that  of 


vi  Introduction 

Thomas  of  Newmarket  contained  in  the  British  Museum  MS.  Reg. 
12,  E.  1.  A  fragment  of  another  translation  of  the  same  gloss  was 
printed  by  Ilalliwell  in  his  Ram  Mathematica  (1835)  p.  29.*  It 
corresponds,  as  far  as  p.  71,  1.  2,  roughly  to  p.  3  of  our  version,  and 
from  thence  to  the  end  p.  2,  11.  10-40. 

The  Art  of  Nombbyng  is  cue  of  the  treatises  bound  up  in  the 
Bodleian  MS.  Ashinole  396.  It  measures  1H-"  x  17f"  and  is  written 
with  thirty-three  lines  to  the  page  in  a  fifteenth  century  hand.  It  is 
a  translation,  rather  literal,  with  amplifications  of  the  de  arte  nu- 
n)<  ranch  attributed  to  John  of  I  [olywood  (Sacrobosco)  and  the  translator 
had  obviously  a  poor  MS.  before  him.  The  de  arte  numerandi  was 
printed  in  1488,  1490  («.«'.),  1501,  1503,  1510,  1517,  1521,  1522, 
1523,  1582,  and  by  Ilalliwell  separately  and  in  his  two  editions  of 
Rara  Mathematica,  1839  and  1841,  and  reprinted  by  Curze  in  1897. 
Both  these  tracts  are  here  printed  for  the  first  time,  but  the  first 
having  been  circulated  in  proof  a  number  of  years  ago,  in  an  endeavour 
to  discover  other  manuscripts  or  parts  of  manuscripts  of  it,  Dr. 
David  Eugene  Smith,  misunderstanding  the  position,  printed  some 
pages  in  a  curious  transcript  with  four  facsimiles  in  the  Archiv  fiir 
die  Geschichte  der  Naturwissensch often  und  der  Technilc,  1909,  and 
invited  the  scientific  world  to  take  up  the  "not  unpleasant  task"  of 
editing  it. 

AcCOMPTYNGE  r.v  COUNTERS  is  reprinted  from  the  1543  edition  of 
Robert  Record's  Arithmetic,  printed  by  R.  Wolfe.  It  has  been 
reprinted  within'the  last  few  years  by  Mr.  F.  P.  Barnard,  in  his 
work  on  Casting  Counters.  It  is  the  earliesl  English  treatise  we 
have  on  this  variety  of  the  Abacus  (there  are  Latin  ones  of  the  end 
of  the  fifteenth  century),  but  there  is  little  doubl  in  my  mind  that 
this  method  of  performing  the  simple  operations  of  arithmetic  is  much 
older  than  ;m\  of  the  pen  methods.  At  the  end  of  the  treatise  there 
follows  a  note  on  merchants'  and  auditors'  ways  of  setting  down  sums, 
and  lastly,  a  system  of  digital  numeration  which  seems  of  great 
antiquity  ami  almost   world-wide  extension. 

Alter  the  fragmenl  already  referred  to,  I  print  as  an  appendix  the 
'Carmen  de  Algorismo'  of  Alexander  de  Villa  Dei  in  an  enlarged 
and  corrected  form.  It  was  printed  for  the  first  time  by  Ilalliwell 
in  Rara   Mathematica,  but    I   have  added  a  number  of  stanzas  from 

•  II  dliwell  printed  the  two  sides  of  his  leaf  in  the  wrong  order.  This  ami 
seme  obvious  errors  of  transcription  'ferye'  for  'fertile,'  '  1>  st  '  for  'left.'  etc., 
Ii  i\  e  not  been  correi  ted  in  the  reprint  on  pp.  70  71. 


Introduction  vii 

various  manuscripts,  selecting  various  readings  on  the  principle  that 
the  verses  were  made  to  scan,  aided  by  the  advice  of  my  friend  Mr. 
Vernon  Kendall,  who  is  not  responsible  for  the  few  doubtful  lines 
I  have  conserved.  This  poem  is  at  the  base  of  all  other  treatises  on 
the  subject  in  medieval  times,  but  I  am  unable  to  indicate  its  sources. 

The  Subject  Matter. 
Ancient  and  medieval  writers  observed  a  distinction  between  the 
Science  and  the  Art  of  Arithmetic.  The  classical  treatises  on  the 
subject,  those  of  Euclid  among  the  Greeks  and  Loethius  among 
the  Latins,  are  devoted  to  the  Science  of  Arithmetic,  but  it  is 
obvious  that  coeval  with  practical  Astronomy  the  Art  of  Calculation 
must  have  existed  and  have  made  considerable  progress.  If  early 
treatises  on  this  art  existed  at  all  they  must,  almost  of  necessity, 
have  been  in  Greek,  which  was  the  language  of  science  for  the 
Koinans  as  long  as  Latin  civilisation  existed.  But  in  their  absence 
it  is  safe  to  say  that  no  involved  operations  were  or  could  have  been 
carried  out  by  means  of  the  alphabetic  notation  of  the  Greeks  and 
Romans.  Specimen  sums  have  indeed  been  constructed  by  moderns 
which  show  its  possibility,  but  it  is  absurd  to  think  that  men  of 
science^  acquainted  with  Egyptian  methods  and  in  possession  of  the 
abacus,*  were  unable  to  devise  methods  for  its  use. 

The  Phe  Medieval  Instruments  Used  in  Calculation. 
The  following  are  known  : — 

(1)  A  Hat  polished  surface  or  tablets,  strewn  with  sand,  on  which 
figures  were  inscribed  with  a  stylus. 

(2)  A  polished  tablet  divided  longitudinally  into  nine  columns  (or 
more)  grouped  in  threes,  with  which  counters  were  used,  either  plain 
or  marked  with  signs  denoting  the  nine  numerals,  etc. 

(3)  Tablets  or  boxes  containing  nine  grooves  or  wires,  in  or  on 
which  ran  beads. 

(4)  Tablets  on  which  nine  (or  more)  horizontal  lines  were  marked, 
each  third  being  marked  oif. 

The  only  Greek  counting  board  we  have  is  of  the  fourth  class 
and  was  discovered  at  Salamis.  It  was  engraved  on  a  block  of 
marble,  and  measures  5  feet  by  2},.  Its  chief  part  consists  of  eleven 
parallel  lines,  the  3rd,  Gth,  and  9th  being  marked  with  a  cross. 
Another  section  consists  of  live   parallel  lines,   and    there    are   three 

Fur  Egyptian  use  see  Herodotus,  ii.  3*5 ,  Plate,  '/-  Legibus,  VII. 


\iii  Introduction 

rows  of  arithmetical  symbols.  This  hoard  could  only  have  been 
used  with  counters  {calculi),  preferably  unmarked,  as  in  our  treatise 
of  Accomptynge  by  Counters. 

Classical  Roman  Methods  of  Calculation. 

"We  have  proof  of  two  methods  of  calculation  in  ancient  Rome, 
one  by  the  first  method,  in  which  the  surface  of  sand  was  divided 
into  columns  by  a  stylus  or  tin'  hand.  Counters  {calculi,  ovlapilli), 
which  were  kept  in  boxes  {loctdi),  were  used  in  calculation,  as  we 
Lain  from  Horace's  schoolboys  (Sat.  1.  vi.  74).  For  the  sand 
see  Persius  I.  131,  "Nee  qui  abaco  numeros  et  secto  in  pulvero 
metas  scit  risisse,"  Apul.  Apolog.  10  (pulvisculo),  Mart.  Capella,  lib. 
vii.  3,  4,  etc.  Cicero  says  of  an  expert  calculator  "  eruditum 
attigisse  pulverem,"  (de  nat.  Deorum,  ii.  18).  Tertullian  calls  a  teacher 
of  arithmetic  "primus  numerorum  arenarius"  (de  Pallio,  in  fun). 
The  counters  were  madf  of  various  materials,  ivory  principally, 
"  Adeo  nulla  uncia  nobis  est  eboris,  etc."  (Juv.  XL  131),  sometimes 
of  precious  metals,  "  Pro  calculis  albis  et  nigris  aureos  argenteosque 
habebat  denarios"  (Pet.  Arb.  Satyricon,  3.1). 

There  are,  however,  still  in  existence  four  Roman  counting  boards 
of  a  kind  which  does  not  appear  to  come  into  literature.  A  typical 
one  is  of  the  third  class.  Ifc  consists  of  a  number  of  transverse  wires, 
broken  at  (he  middle.  On  the  left  hand  portion  four  heads  are 
strung,  on  the  right  one  (or  two).  The  left  hand  heads  signify 
units,  the  light  h;ind  one  five  units.  Thus  any  number  up  to  nine 
can  be  represented'.  This  instrument  is  in  all  essentials  the  same 
as  tin'  Swanpan  or  Abacus  in  use  Ihroughoul  the  Far  East.  The 
Russian  stchota  in  use  throughout  Eastern  Europe  is  simpler  still. 
The  method  of  using  this  system  is  exactly  the  same  as  that  of 
Accomptynge  by  Counters,  the  right-hand  live  bead  replacing  the 
counter  between  the  lines. 

The  Boethian  Abacus. 
Between  classical  times   and    the   tenth    century    we  have  little 
or  no  guidance  as  to  the  art  of  calculation.     Boethius  (liftli  century), 
at   tl nd  of  lib.   II.  of  his  Geometria  gives  us  a   figure   of  an   abacus 

.if  the  second  class  with  a  set  of  counters  arranged  within  it.  It  has, 
however,  been  contended  with  greal  pi  bability  that  the  whole 
pa  age  is  a  tenth  century  interpolation.  As  no  rules  are  given  for 
its  use,  the  chief  value  of  the  figure  is  that  it  gives  the  signs  of  the 


Introduction  ix 

nine  numbers,  known  as  the  Boethian  "apices"  or  "notae"  (from 
whence  our  word  "notation").     To  these  we  shall  return  later  on. 

The  Abacists. 

It  would  seem  probable  that  writers  on  the  calendar  like  Bede 
(a.d.  721)  and  Ilelpericus  (a.d.  903)  were  able  to  perform  simple 
calculations ;  though  we  are  unable  to  guess  their  methods,  and  for 
the  most  part  they  were  dependent  on  tables  taken  from  Greek 
sources.  "We  have  no  early  medieval  treatises  on  arithmetic,  till 
towards  the  end  of  the  tenth  century  we  find  a  revival  of  the  study 
of  science,  centring  for  us  round  the  name  of  Gerbert,  who  became 
Pope  as  Sylvester  II.  in  999.  His  treatise  on  the  use  of  the  Abacus 
was  written  (c.  980)  to  a  friend  Constantine,  and  was  first  printed 
among  the  works  of  Bede  in  the  Basle  (15G3)  edition  of  his  works, 
I.  159,  in  a  somewhat  enlarged  form.  Another  tenth  century  treatise 
is  that  of  Abbo  of  Fleury  (c.  98K),  preserved  in  several  manuscripts. 
Very  few  treatises  on  the  use  of  the  Abacus  can  be  certainly  ascribed 
to  the  eleventh  century,  but  from  the  beginning  of  the  twelfth 
century  their  numbers  increase  rapidly,  to  judge  by  those  that  have 
been  preserved. 

The  Abacists  used  a  permanent  board  usually  divided  into  twelve 
columns;  the  columns  were  grouped  in  threes,  each  column  being 
called  an  "arcus,"  and  the  value  of  a  figure  in  it  represented  a  tenth 
of  what  it  would  have  in  the  column  to  the  left,  as  in  our  arithmetic 
of  position.  With  this  board  counters  or  jetons  were  used,  either 
plain  or,  more  probably,  marked  with  numerical  signs,  which  with 
the  early  Abacists  were  the  "apices,"  though  counters  from  classical 
times  were  sometimes  marked  on  one  side  with  the  digital  signs,  on 
the  other  with  Roman  numerals.  Two  ivory  discs  of  this  kind  from 
the  Hamilton  collection  may  be  seen  at  the  British  Museum.  Gerbert 
is  said  by  Richer  to  have  made  for  the  purpose  of  computation  a 
thousand  counters  of  horn  ;  the  usual  number  of  a  set  of  counters 
in  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries  was  a  hundred. 

Treatises  on  the  Abacus  usually  consist  of  chapters  on  Numeration 
explaining  the  notation,  and  on  the  rules  for  Multiplication  and 
Division.  Addition,  as  far  as  it  required  any  rules,  came  naturally 
under  Multiplication,  while  Subtraction  was  involved  in  the  process 
of  Division.  These  rides  were  all  that  were  needed  in  Western 
Europe  in  centuries  when  commerce  hardly  existed,  and  astronomy 
was  unpractised,  and  even  they  were  only  required  in  the  preparation 


x  Introduction 

of  the  calendar  and  the  assignments  of  the  royal  exchequer.  In 
England,  for  example,  when  tin-  hide  developed  from  the  normal 
holding  of  a  household  into  the  unit  of  taxation,  the  calculation  of 
the  geldage  in  each  shire  required  a  sum  in  division  ;  as  we  know 
from  the  fact  that  one  of  the  Abacists  proposes  the  sum:  "  If  200 
marks  are  levied  on  the  county  of  Essex,  which  contains  according 
to  Hugh  of  Bocland  2500  hides,  how  much  does  each  hide  pay]"* 
Exchequer  methods  up  to  the  sixteenth  century  were  founded  on  the 
abacus,  though  when  we  have  details  later  on,  a  different  and  simpler 
form  was  n^vi\. 

The  great  difficulty  of  the  early  Abacists,  owing  to  the  absence  of 
a  figure  representing  zero,  was  to  place  their  results  and  operations  in 
the  proper  columns  of  the  abacus,  especially  when  doing  a  division 
sum.  The  chief  differences  noticeable  in  their  works  arc  in  the 
methods  for  this  rule.  Division  was  either  done  directly  or  by 
means  of  differences  between  the  divisor  and  the  next  higher  multiple 
of  ten  to  the  divisor.  Later  Abacists  made  a  distinction  between 
"iron"  and  "golden"  methods  of  division.  The  following  are 
examples  taken  from  a  twelfth  century  treatise.  In  following  the 
operations  it  must  he  remembered  that  a  figure  asterisked  represents 
a  counter  taken  from  the  board.  A  zero  is  obviously  not  needed,  and 
the  result  may  he  written  down  in  words. 


[a)  Multiplication.     4600  x  23. 


Thousands 

- 

'          s 

c 

tr. 

a 

V 

a 

3 

pq 

£ 

1 

4 

•  i 

Multiplicand. 

1 

8 

600      .:. 

1 

4000        '.. 

1 

2 

600       20. 

8 

I 

1 

5 

8 

Total  product 

•J 

a 

Multiplier. 

'  S«m  .,n  tin..  Dr.  Poole,  Tfa  ExcJieqver  in  tht  Twelfth  Century,  Chap.  111., 
and  Haskins,  Eng.  Hist,  Review,  27,  101.  The  hidage  of  Essex  in  1130  way 
2364  hi  les 


Introduction 


XI 


(b)  Division:  direct.     100,000 -r  20,023.     Here  each  counter  in  turn  is  a 
separate  divisor. 


Thousands 

a. 

T. 

u. 

II. 

1 

u. 

2 

2 

3 

Divisors. 

2 

Place  greatest  divisor  to  right  o 

'  dividend 

1 

2 

1 
9 

Dividend. 
Remainder. 

1 

9 

Another  form  of  same. 

8 

Product  of  1st  Quotient  and  20. 

1 

9 

9 

■1 

Remainder. 

1      2 

Product  of  1st  Quotient  and  3. 

1 

9 

9 

S 

Final  remainder. 

4 

Quotient. 

(c)  Division  i;v  Differences.     900  —  8.     Here  we  divide  by  (10-2). 


Difference. 
Divisor. 
Dividend. 

Product  of  difference  by  1st  Quotient  (it). 
Produci  of  different  by  2nd  Quotient  (1). 
Sum  of  8  and  2. 

Product  of  difference  by  3rd  Quotient  (1). 
Produci  of  difference  by  1th  Quot.  (2).     Remainder. 
1th  Quotient. 
3rd  Quotient. 
2nd  Quotient. 
1st  Quotient, 

Quotient.     Total  of  all  four.) 
•    I  Ue  i  figures    ir<  i  emo\  ed  al  tlie  next  stuje 


II. 

T. 

U. 

•_' 

*1 

8 
■1 

8 

*1 

2 

1 

1 
1 
9 

•J 

1 

1 

■■ 

Xll 


Introduction 


Division.     7800 -f- 166. 


Thousands 

II 

T. 

r. 

ii. 

T. 

U. 

3 

•1 

i 

(i 

G 

*r 

8 

1 

1 
9 

2 

*■> 

8 

3 

2 

1 

*i 

1 
1 

6 
2 

5 

*3 
1 

3 
3 

4 

1 

6 

1 
3 

1 

I 
5 

1 

6 

Differences  (making  200  trial  divisor). 

Divisors. 

Dividends. 

Remainder  ofgreatesl  dividend. 

Product  of  1st  difference  (4)  by  1st  Quotient  (3). 

Product  of  2nd  difference  (3)  by  1st  Quotient  (3). 

New  dividends. 

Product  of  1  t  and  2nd  difference  by  2nd  Quotient  (1). 

New  di\  idends. 

Product  oflsl  difference  l>\  3rd  Quotieni  (5). 

Product  of  2nd  difference  by  3rd  Quotient    5), 

New  dividends. 

Remainder  of  greatest  dividend. 

Producf  of  1st  and  2nd  difference  by  1th  Quotient  (1). 

Remainder  (less  than  divisor). 

4th  Quotient. 

3rd  Quotient. 

2nd  Quotient. 

1st  Quotient. 

Quotient. 


•    1 1,  removed  at  the  m  \t  step. 


Introdtiction 


Xlll 


Division.     S000  H-  606. 


Thousands    i 

!: 

T. 

U. 

*8 

1 

*1 
*1 

H. 

6 

9 
9 
3 

3 
3 

7 
»■• 
1 

T. 
9 

4 
4 

9 

3 

9 
2 

2 

1 
1 

0". 

1 
6 

4 
4 

4 
8 
6 
2 
1 
1 
1 

3 

Difference  (making  700  trial  divisor). 

Difference. 

Divisors. 

Dividend. 

Remainder  of  dividend. 

Product  of  difference  1  and  2  with  1st  Quotient  (1). 

New  dividends. 

Remainder  of  greatest  dividend. 

Product  of  difference  1  and  2  with  2nd  Quotient  (1). 

New  dividends. 

Remainder  of  greatest  dividend. 

Product  of  difference  1  and  2  with  3rd  Quotient  (1). 

New  dividends. 

Product  of  divisors  by  4th  Quotient  (1). 

Remainder. 

Hli  Quotient. 

3rd  Quotient. 

2nd  Quotient. 

1st  Quotient. 

Quotient. 

These  figures  are  removed  (it  the  next  step. 


The  chief  Abacists  arc  Gerbert  (tenth  century),  Abbo,  and  Eer- 
mannus  Contractus  (1051),  who  arc  credited  with  the  revival  of  the 
art,  ISernelinus,  Gerland,  and  Badulphus  of  Laon  (twelfth  century). 
We  know  as  English  Abacists,  Hubert,  bishop  of  Hereford,  1095, 
"  abacum  et  lunarem  compotum  et  celestium  cursum  astrorum  rimatus," 
Turchillus  Compotista  (Thurkil),  and  through  him  of  Guilielmus 
B.  .  .  .  "the  best  of  living  computers,"  Gislebert,  and  Simonus  de 
Rotellis  (Simon  of  the  Rolls).     They  flourished  most  probably  in  the 


xiv  IntrodiLction 

first  quarter  of  the  twelfth  century,as  Thurkil's  treatise  deals  also  with 
fractions.  Walcher  of  Durham,  Thomas  of  York,  and  Samson  of 
Worcester  are  also  known  as  Ahacists. 

Finally,  the  term  Ahacists  came  to  he  applied  to  computers  by 
manual  arithmetic.  A  MS.  Algorithm  of  the  thirteenth  century 
(SI.  3281,  f.  6,  h),  contains  the  following  passage:  "Est  et  alius 
modus  secundum  operatores  sive  practicos,  quorum  unus  appellator 
Abacus;  et  modus  ejus  est  in  computando  per  digitos  et  junctura 
manuum,  et  isle  utitur  ultra  Alpes." 

In  a  composite  treatise  containing  tracts  written  a.d.  1157  and 
1208,  on  the  calendar,  the  abacus,  the  manual  calendar  and  the 
manual  abacus,  we  have  a  number  of  the  methods  preserved.  As 
an  example  we  give  the  rule  for  multiplication  (Claud.  A.  1  V .,  f.  5  1  vo). 
"Si  numcrus  multiplicat  alium  numerum  auferatur  differentia  majoris 
a  minore,  et  per  residuum  multiplicetur  articulus,  et  una  differentia 
per  aliam,  et  summa  proveniet."  Example,  8  x  7.  The  difference 
of  8  is  2,  of  7  is  3,  the  next  article  being  10;  7-2  is  5.  5  x  10  = 
50;  2  X  3  =  6.  50  +  G  =  5G  answer.  The  rule  will  hold  in  such 
cases  as  17  X  15  where  the  article  next  higher  is  the  same  for  both, 
i.e.,  20  ;  but  in  such  a  case  as  17  x  9  the  difference  for  each  number 
must  be  taken  from  the  higher  article,  i.e.,  the  difference  of  0  will 
be  11. 

The  Alqoeists. 

Algorism  (augrim,  augrym,  algram,  agram,  algorithm),  owes  its  name 
to  the  accident  that  the  first  arithmetical  treatise  translated  from  the 
Arabic  happened  to  be  one  written  by  A I  Khowarazmi  in  the  early 
ninth  century,  "  de  numeris  Endorum,"  beginning  in  its  Latin  form 
'•  l>i\it  Algorismi.  .  .  ."  The  translation,  of  which  only  one  ISIS,  is 
known,  was  made  about  1120  by  Adelard  of  Bath,  who  also  wrote  on 
the  Abacus  and  translated  with  a  commentary  Euclid  from  the  Arabic. 
It  is  probable  that  another  version  was  made  by  Gerard  of  Cremona 
(1111-1187);  the  number  of  importanl  works  that  were  not  translated 
more  than  once  from  the  Arabic  decreases  every  year  with  our  know- 
ledge of  medieval  texts.  A  few  lines  of  this  translation,  as  copied  by 
Ealliwell,  are  given  on  p.  72.  note  2.  Another  translation  still  seems 
to  have  been  made  by  Johannes  Hispalensis. 

Algorism  is  distinguished  from  Abacist  compulation  by  recognis- 
ing seven  rules,  Addition,  Subtraction,  Duplation,  Mediation,  Multi- 
plication, Division,  and  Extraction  of  Roots,  to  which  were  afterwards 


Introduction  xv 

added  Numeration  and  Progression.  It  is  farther  distinguished  by 
the  use  of  the  zero,  which  enabled  the  computer  to  dispense  with  the 
columns  of  tbe  Abacus.  It  obviously  employs  a  board  with  fine  sand 
or  wax,  and  later,  as  a  substitute,  paper  or  parchment ;  slate  and  pencil 
were  also  used  in  the  fourteenth  century,  how  much  earlier  is  un- 
known.* Algorism  quickly  ousted  the  Abacus  methods  for  all 
intricate  calculations,  being  simpler  and  more  easily  checked  :  in 
fact,  the  astronomical  revival  of  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries 
would  have  been  impossible  without  its  aid. 

The  number  of  Latin  Algorisms  still  in  manuscript  is  compara- 
tively large,  but  we  are  here  only  concerned  with  tAvo — ah  Algorism 
in  prose  attributed  to  Sacrobosco  (John  of  Holy  wood)  in  the  colophon 
of  a  Paris  manuscript,  though  this  attribution  is  no  longer  regarded 
as  conclusive,  and  another  in  verse,  most  probably  by  Alexander  de 
Villedieu  (Villa  Dei).  Alexander,  who  died  in  1240,  was  teaching 
in  Paris  in  1209.  His  verse  treatise  on  the  Calendar  is  dated  1200, 
and  it  is  to  that  period  that  his  Algorism  may  be  attributed ;  Sacro- 
bosco died  in  1256  and  quotes  the  verse  Algorism.  Several  com- 
mentaries on  Alexander's  verse  treatise  were  composed,  from  one 
of  which  our  first  tractate  was  translated,  and  the  text  itself  was 
from  time  to  time  enlarged,  sections  on  proofs  and  on  mental 
arithmetic  being  added.  We  have  no  indication  of  the  source  on 
which  Alexander  drew ;  it  was  most  likely  one  of  the  translations 
of  Al-Khowarasmi,  but  he  has  also  the  Abacists  in  mind,  as  shewn  by 
preserving  the  use  of  differences  in  multiplication.  His  treatise,  first 
printed  by  Halliwell-Phillipps  in  his  Kara  Mathematica,  is  adapted 
for  use  on  a  board  covered  with  sand,  a  method  almost  universal  in 
the  thirteenth  century,  as  some  passages  in  the  algorism  of  that 
period  already  quoted  show  :  "  Est  et  alius  modus  qui  utitur  apud 
Indos,  et  doctor  hujusmodi  ipsos  "erat  quidem  nomine  Algus.  Et 
modus  suus  erat  in  computando  per  quasdam  figuras  scribendo  in 
pulvere.  .  .  ."  "  Si  voluerimus  depingere  in  pulvere  predictos  digitos 
secundum  consuetiulinem  algorismi  .  .  ."  "et  sciendum  est  quod  in 
nullo  loco  minutorum  sive  secundorum  ...  in  pulvere  debent  scribi 
plusquam  sexaginta." 

Modern  Arithmetic 

Modern    Arithmetic   begins    with   Leonardi    Fibonacci's    treatise 

"de  Abaco,"  written  in  1202  and  re-written  in  1228.     It  is  modern 

ft  Slates  are  mentioned  by  Chancer,  and  soon  after  (1410)  Prosdocimo  do 
Beldamandi  speaks  of  the  use  of  a  "  lapis  "  for  making  notes  on  by  calculators. 


xvi  Introduction 

rather  in  the  range  of  its  problems  and  the  methods  of  attack  than 

in  mere  methods  of  calculation,  which  arc  of  its  period.  Its  sole 
interest  as  regards  the  presenl  work  is  that  Leonard]  makes  use  of 
the  digital  signs  described  in  Record's  treatise  on  The  arte  of 
nombryngi  by  the  Imnd  in  mental  arithmetic,  calling  it  "modus 
Indorum."  Leonardo  also  introduces  the  method  of  proof  by  "casting 
out  the  nines." 

Digital  Arithmetic. 

The  method  of  indicating  numbers  by  means  of  the  fingers  is  of 
considerable  age.  The  British  Museum  possesses  two  ivory  counters 
marked  on  one  side  by  carelessly  scratched  Roman  numerals  1 1 1  V 
and  Villi,  and  on  the  other  by  carefully  engraved  digital  signs 
for  8  and  9.  Sixteen  seems  to  have  been  the  number  of  a  complete 
set.  These  counters  were  either  used  in  games  or  for  the  counting 
board,  and  the  Museum  ones,  coming  from  the  Hamilton  collection, 
are  undoubtedly  not  later  than  the  first  century.  Frohner  has 
published  in  the  Zeitschrift  des  Miinchener  Alterthumsvereins  a 
set,  almost  complete,  of  them  with  a  Byzantine  treatise  ;  a  Latin 
treatise  is  printed  among  Bede's  works.  The  use  of  this  method  is 
universal  through  the  Last,  and  a  variety  of  it  is  found  among  many 
of  the  native  races  in  Africa.  In  medieval  Europe  it  was  almost 
restricted  to  Italy  and  the  Mediterranean  basin,  and  in  the  treat 
already  quoted  (Sloane  32S1)  it  is  even  called  the  Abacus,  perhaps  a 
memory  of  Fibonacci's  work. 

Methods  ofcalculation  by  means  of  these  signs  undoubtedly  have 
existed,  but  they  were  too  involved  and  liable  to  error  to  be  much  used. 

The  Use  of  "Arabic"  Figures; 

l!  may  now  be  regarded  as  proved  by  Bubnoy  that  our  present 
numerals  are  derived  from  Greek  sources  through  the  so-called 
Boethian  "apices,"  which  arc  first  found  in  late  tenth  century 
manuscripts.  Thai  they  were  not  derived  directly  from  the  Arabic 
seems  certain  Prom  the  different  shapes  of  some  of  the  numerals, 
especially  the  0,  which  stands  for  5  in  Arabic.  Another  Greek 
form  existed,  which  was  introduced  into  Europe  by  John  of  Basing- 
stoke in  the  thirteenth  century,  and  is  figured  by  Matthew  Paris 
(V.  285);  but  this  form  had  no  success.  The  date'  of  t lie  intro- 
duction of  the  zero  has  been  hotly  debated,  but  it  seems  otmous 
that    the   twelfth    century    Latin    translators    from  the   Arabic  were 


Introduction  xvii 

perfectly  •well  acquainted  with  the  system  they  met  in  their  Arahic 
text,  while  the  earliest  astronomical  tables  of  the  thirteenth  century 
I  have  seen  use  numbers  of  European  and  not  Arabic  origin.  The 
fact  that  Latin  writers  had  a  convenient  way  of  writing  hundreds 
and  thousands  without  any  cyphers  probably  delayed  the  general 
use  of  the  Arabic  notation.  Dr.  Hill  has  published  a  very  complete 
survey  of  the  various  forms  of  numerals  in  Europe.  They  began 
to  be  common  at  the  middle  of  the  thirteenth  century  and  a  very 
interesting  set  of  family  notes  concerning  births  in  a  British  Museum 
manuscript,  Harl.  4350   shows  their  extension.     The    first    is  dated 

c  c  c 

Mij.  lviii.,  the  second  Mij.  lxi.,  the  third  Mij.  63,  the  fourth  1264, 
and  the  fifth  126G.  Another  example  is  given  in  a  set  of  astronomical 
tables  for  1269  in  a  manuscript  of  Eoger  Bacon's  works,  where  the 
scribe  began  to  write  MCC6.  and  crossed  out  the  figures,  substituting 
the  "  Arabic  "  form. 

The  Counting  Board. 

The  treatise  on  pp.  52-65  is  the  only  one  in  English  known  on 
the  subject.  It  describes  a  method  of  calculation  which,  with  slight 
modifications,  is  current  in  Russia,  China,  and  Japan,  to-day,  though 
it  went  out  of  use  in  Western  Europe  by  the  seventeenth  century. 
In  Germany  the  method  is  called  "  Algorithmic  Linealis,"  and  there 
are  several  editions  of  a  tract  under  this  name  (with  a  diagram  of  the 
counting  board),  printed  at  Leipsic  at  the  end  of  the  fifteenth  century 
and  the  beginning  of  the  sixteenth.  They  give  the  nine  rules,  but 
"  Capitulum  de  radicum  extractiono  ad  algoritmum  integrorum  reser- 
vato,  cujus  species  per  ciffralea  figuras  ostenduntur  ubi  ad  plenum  de 
hac  tractabitur."  The  invention  of  the  art  is  there  attributed  to 
Api>ulegius  the  philosopher. 

The  advantage  of  the  counting  board,  whether  permanent  or 
constructed  by  chalking  parallel  lines  on  a  table,  as  shown  in  some 
sixteenth-century  woodcuts,  is  that  only  five  counters  are  needed 
to  indicate  the  number  nine,  counters  on  the  lines  representing  units, 
and  those  in  the  spaces  above  representing  five  times  those  on  the 
line  below.  The  Russian  abacus,  the  "  tchatui "  or  "  stchota  "  has 
ten  beads  on  the  line  ;  the  Chinese  and  Japanese  "Swanpan"  econo- 
mises by  dividing  the  line  into  two  parts,  the  beads  on  one  side 
representing  five  times  the  value  of  those  on  the  other.  The  "Swan- 
pan"  has  usually  many  more  lines  than  the  "stchota,"  allowing  for 
more  extended  calculations,  see  Tylor,  Anthropology  (1892),  p.  314. 


xviii  Introduction 

Record's  treatise  also  mentions  another  method  of  counter  notation 
(p.  64)  "merchants'  casting"  and  "auditors'  casting."  These  were 
adapted  for  the  usual  English  method  of  reckoning  numbers  up  to 
200  by  scores.  This  method  seems  to  have-  been  used  in  the  Ex- 
chequer. A  counting  board  for  merchants'  use  is  printed  by  Ilalliwell 
in  Rara  Mathematica  (p.  72)  from  Sloane  MS.  213,  and  two  others 
are  figured  in  Egerton  2622  f.  82  and  f.  83.  The  latter  is  said  to  be 
"  novus  modus  computandi  secundum  inventionem  Magistri  Thome 
Thorleby,"  and  is  in  principle,  the  same  as  the  "  Swanpan." 

The  Exchequer  table  is  described  in  the  Dialogus  de  Scaccario 
(Oxford,  1902),  p.  38. 


CIjc  Earliest  Hritljmctics 
in  ^nglisij. 


NOMBRTNGE. 


£{k   Oirnftc   of  ilombrnngc. 


H 


Egerton  2622. 

Ec  algorism//-  ars  presens  elicit///-;  in  qua  •  ieafi36a. 

Talib//-  inclor///;/  fruimwr  bis  qui//q//'  figuris. 
This  boke  is  called  be  boke  of  algorym,  or  Augryra  after  lewder  a  derivation 

.  .  .  *1  of  Algorism. 

4  vse.  Ana  bis  boke  tretys  be  Craft  oi  Nombryng,  be  quych  crafte 
is  called  also  Algorym.  Ther  was  a  kyng  of  Inde,  be  quich  heyth 
Algor,  &  lie  made  bis  craft.  And  aft/'/'  his  name  he  called  hit 
algorym  ;  or  els  anober  cause  is  quy  it  is  called  Algorym,  for  be 

8  latyn  word  of  hit  s.  Algorismws  comes  of  AlgoSj  .^rece,  quid  est  Another 

..  c  .  ..  i-i  -7  i-  t    derivation  of 

ars,  latme,  cratt  on)  euglis,  ami  rides,  quid  est  Humerus,  latino,  Atheword. 
nombwr  on  englys,  inde  dicitux  Algorisniws  per  addicaonew  hnius 
sillabe  xa.us  &  subtracc&'oneni  d  A'  e,  qwasi  ars  numerandi.    IT  fforther- 

12  more  y  most  vndi'rstonde  b'/t  in  bis  craft  ben  vsid  teen  figurys, 
as  here  bene  writen  for  ensampul,  098765432  1.  IF  Expone 
be  too  versus  afore:  this  present  craft  ys  called  Algorismws,  in  be 
quych  we  vse  teen  signys  of  Inde.      Questio.     H  Why  ten)  fyguris 

16  of  Inde]  Solucio.  for  as  I  haue  sayd  afore  bai  were  fonde  fyrsl 
in  Inde  of  a  kynge  of  bat  Cuntre,  b//t  was  called  Algor. 

H  Prima  sigm/Zcat  xmum  ;  duo  vero  sc////da:  venusim 

H  Tercia  sigtiijicat  tria;  sic  procede  sinistre. 

20  IT  Doiv  c  ad  extremal  venias,  que  cifra  voca////-. 


H  Cap/7/////m  primum  de  significac/o//e  figurar ////'.  exPo»«;o 

x        .  .  .  .      .  verius. 

In  bis  verse  is  notinde  be  signincacton  of  bese  Bguris.     And  bus 
expone  the  vers*'.     J;e  firsl  signifiyth  one,  be   secuwde  signi2fiyth   *ieafi366. 
21  tweyne,  be  thryd  signifiyth  thre,  &  the  fourte  signifiyth  I.     *   And  ^f^cTof81 
so  forthe  towarde  be  Iyfl    syde  of  be  tabid  or  of  be  boke  bat  be  the  fi§uies- 
figures  bene  writene  in,  til  bat  bou  come  to  the  last  figure,  bat  is 


4  Notation  and  Numeration. 

called  a  cifre.     1    Questio.     In  quych  syde  sittes  be  first  figure? 
Sohiczo,  forsothe  loke  quich  figure  is  first  in  be  ry$t  side  of  be  bok 
or  of  be  tabul,  &  pat  .same  is  be  first  figure,  for  bou  sclial  write 
Which  flBuro  bakeward,  as  here,  3.  2.  6.  1.  1.  2.  5.     The  figure  of  5.  was  first    4 

is  read  first.  . 

write,  &  he  is  be  first,  for  he  sittes  on)  be  rijt  syde.  And  the 
figure  of  3  is  last.  11  Neuer-be-les  wen  he  say-  1  IV/ma  sigu^/icat 
vnu///  Are.,  bat  is  to  say,  pa  first  betokenes  one,  pa  secuwde.  2.  & 
fore-J>er-niore,  lie  vndirstondes  no^t  of  be  first  figure  of  euery  rew.  8 
II  But  he  vndi'rstondes  be  first  figure  b"t  i.s  in  be  nonibur  of  pe 
forsayd  teen  figuris,  pa  quych  is  one  of  bese.  1.  And  pa  secunde  2. 
&  so  forth. 
venutVn  1F  Quelib/ 7  illar/////  si  pr////o  limite  ponas,  12 

11  Simpliciter  se  significat:  si  vero  see////do, 

Se  decies  :  sursu///  y//ocedas  m/dtiplicando. 
IT  Na///q//c  figura  seque//s  q/?'n//uis  signat  decies  plus. 
IT  Ipsa  locata  loco  quam  sign///Vat  p'/////ente.  16 

Expositio  [in        IT  Expone  bis  verse  bus.     Euery  of  bese  figuris  bitokens  hym 
selfe  &  no  more,  yf  he  stoude  in  be  first  place  of  pa  rewele     this 
Anexpiana-    wordc  Simpliciter    in  bat  verse  it    is  no  more  to  say  hut   bat,  & 

linn  ot  the  '  i 

principles  of  no  more.     IT  If  it  stonde  in  the  secmide   place  of  be  rewle,  he  20 

nutation.  _  ' 

betokens  ten/.'   tymes  hym  selfe,  as    bis  figure   2  here    20    tokens 

i  leaf is7 a.  ten  tyme  hym  selfe,   lbat  is  twenty,  for  he  hym  selfe  betokenes 

tweywe,  &  ten  tymes  twene  is  twenty.     And   for  he  stondis  on) 

be  lyft  side  &  in  be   secuwde  place,  he  betokens  ten  tyme   hywi  21 

selfe.     And  so  ge  forth.     •    ffor  euery  figwe,  &  he  stonde  aft///' 

a-nob'/-  toward  the  lyft  side,  he  schal  betokene  ten  tymes  as  mich 

more  as  he  schul   betoken  &  he    stode  in   be   place  pert    bat    be 

An  example :  figure   a-f< ire   hym   stondes.     loo   an   ensampulle.  9.   6.   3.    I.     J3e  28 

units,  figure  of    1.  pat  hase  bis  schape   \.  betokens  bol   liymselfe,  for  he 

stondes  in   be   first  place.     The  figure  of  •">.   bal   hase  bis  schape 

ten?,  }.  betokens  ten  tymes  mor<    ben  he  schuld  &  he  stode   pen    pat 

pa  figure  <>f   I.  stondes,  bat  is  thretty.     The  figur<   of  6,  b"t  hase  32 
bis  schape  6,  betokens  ten  tymes  nior<    ban  he  schuld  &  he  stode 
pere  as  be  figure  of  }.  stondes,   for   pert    he   schuld   tokynt    bol 
hundreds,      sexty,  &  now  he  betokens  ten  tymes  more,  bat  is  sex  hundryth. 

The  figurt   of  9.  bal   hase  bis  schape  9.  betokens  ten  tymes  more  36 
bane  he  schuld  &  he  stode  in  be  place  peri  be  fig?<r<  of  sex  stondes, 
for  ben  he  schuld  betoken  to  9.  hundryth,  and  in  be  place  peri   he 
thousands,     stondes  now  he  betokens  9.  bousande.     Al  be  hole  nombur  is  !> 

thousande  sex  hundryth  &  fourt  &  thretty.     H  fforthermore,  when  40 


The  Tin'"    Kinds  of  Numbers.  5 

bou  schalt  rede  a  nombzir  of  figure,  bou  sclialt  begyne  at  Be  last  How  to  read 

'  '  r  .  OJ  r  the  number. 

figure  in  the  lyft  side,  &  rede  so  forth  to  be  ri^t  side  as  here  9.  G. 
3.  4.     Thou  schal  begyn  to  rede  at  be  figure  of  9.  &  rede  forth 
i  bus.  9.  Hhousand  sex  hun'dryth  thritty  &  fuiire.     But  when  bou   Uearm&. 
schalle  write,  pun  schalt  be-gynne  to  write  at  be  ry^t  side. 
1f  Nil  cifra  significat  &ed  dat  signage  sequenti. 
Expone  bis  v<  rse.     A  cifre  tokens  1103 1,  hot  he  makes  be  figure  The  meaning 
8  to  betoken  bat  comes  aftwr  hym  more    ban  he  schuld  A:  he  were  the  cipher. 
away,  as  pus  \cf>.  here  pe  figure  of  one  tokens  ten,  &  yf  pe  cifre 
were  away'2  &  no  figure  by-fore  hym  he  schuld  token  hot  one,  for 
ban  he  schwZd  stonde  in   be  first  place.     If  And  pe  cifre  tokens 
12  nothyng  hym  selfe.     for  al  pe  nombur  of  pe  ylke  too  'figures  is  bot 
ten.    IF  Questio.    Why  says  he  fat  a  cifre  makys  a  figure  to  signifye 
(tyf)  more  &e.     H  I  speke  for  Jns  worde  significatyf,  ffor  sothe  it 
may  happe  aft?//' a  cifre  schuld  come  a-nobwr  cifre,  as  bus  2<p(p.    And 
16  }et  pe  secunde  cifre  shuld  token  neuer  pe  more  excep  he  schuld  kepe 
pe  order  of  pe  place,     and  a  cifre  is  no  figure  significatyf. 
IF  Quam  precedentes  plus  ultima  significabit  / 
Expone  bis  verse  bus.     be  last  figure  schal  token  more  ban  alle  peiast 

1  '  '  °  '  figure  means 

20  be  ober  afore,  thoust  bere  were  a  hundrvth  thousant  figures  afore,  [pore  than  ail 

i  I  '  >      >  -  °  '  the  others, 

as  bus,- 16798.    be  last  Rgure  bat  is  1.  betokens  ten  thousant.    And  *h';^,;;/ 
alle   be   ober  figures   ben    bot    betokene   bot  sex  thousant  seuyne value- 
hzmdryth  nynty  &  8.      H  And   ten  thousant  is  more   ben  alle  bat 
24  noinli///',  ergo  be  last  figure  tokens  more  ban  all  be  nombwr  afore. 

31I  Post  p/>  dicta  scias  breuit'r  q^oo"  tres  num<  >roium  3  ieafi38«. 

Distincte  species  sunt ;  nam  quidam  digiti  sunt ; 
Articuli  quidam ;  quidam  quoque  compositi  sunt. 
28  IF  Capit/////m  2m  tie  t/Vplice  divisione  nnmerorum. 

IF  The  auctor  of  bis  tretis  departys  bis  worde  a  nombur  into  3 
partes.     Some  nombur  is  called  digitus  latine,  a  digit  in  englys.  Digits. 
SoTTime  nombur  is  called  articulus  latine.     An  Articul  in  englys.  Articles. 
32  Some  nombur  is  called  a  composyl  in  englys.     1F  Expone  bis  verse.  Composites, 
know  Jjou  aftur  be  forsayd  rewles  pnt  I  sayd  afore,  fat  bere  ben  thre 
spices  of  nombur.    Oone  is  a  digit,  Anober  is  an  Articul,  &  be  tober 
a  Composyt.  versus. 
36  IF  Sunt  digiti  num<  /  i  qui  citra  denariu///  s//nt. 

IF  Here  he  telles  qwat  is  a  digit,  Expone  versus  sir.     Nomburs  what  are 
digitus  bene  alle  nomburs  bat  hen  wit/j-inne  ten,  as  nyne,  8.  7.  6.  5. 
4.  3.  2.  1. 

-   In  MS    '  awiy." 


6  Digits,  Articles,  and  Composites. 

If  Articupli  clecupli  degito//////  ;  compositi  zicaX 
Illi  qui  constant  ex  articulis  degitisque. 
11  Heir  he  telles  what  is  a  composyl   and  what  is  ane  articul. 
What  aw       Expone  sic  versus.     H  Articulis  ben1  all-    bat  may  be  deuidyt  in-    4 
to  nombwrs  of  ten  &  nothynge  leue  oner,  as  twenty,  thretty,  fourtj , 
a  hundryth,  a  thousand,  &  such  oper,  ffior  twenty  may  be  departyt 
in-to  2  nombzws  of  ten,  fforty  in  to  foure  nombwrs  of  ten,  &  so  forth. 
!  ieafi386,         2Compositys  beiO  nomlw//'s  jjat  bene  coniponyt  of  a  digyt  &  of  an    8 
niunbers        articulle  as  fouretene,  fyftene,  sextene,  &  such  o]>er.     (fortene  is 
posites?;        cowponyd  of   foure  bat  is  a    digit   &  of   ten  J>at    is  an   articulle. 
ffiftene  is  componyd  of  5  &  ten,  &  so  of  all  o\>er,  whal  J>at  }>ai  ben. 
Short-lycb  euery  nomhwr  pat  be-gynnes  witli  a  digit  &  endyth  in  a  12 
articulle  is  a<  com  posy  t,  as  fortene  bygennynge  by  four<    J>at  is  a 
digit,  &  endes  in  ten. 

II  Ergo,  pyoposito  nume7'0  tibi  scribere,  p/7mo 

Respicias  quid  sit  Humerus;  si  digitus  sit  1G 

P/v'mo  scribe  loco  digitus,  si  compositus  sit 
Py/mo  scribe  loco  digitus  post  articulii/// ;  sic. 
How  to  write        IF  here  he  telles  how  Jjou  schalt  wyrch  whan  pmi  schalt  write  a 

a  number,  ,  . ,  „      „        .       ,  ,.  . 

nombwr.      Expone  vei'swm  sic,  &   rac  mxta  expone?ins  sentenciam ;  20 
whan  Jv'ii  hast  a  nombzir  to  write,  loke  fyrsl  what   nianer  nombi»' 
it  ys  put  pou  schalt  write,  whether  it  be  a  digit  or  a  composit  or  an 
e  n  is  a         Articul.     H  If  he  be  a  digit,  write  a  digit,  as  vf  it  be  seuen,  write 

digit;  .  '  ' 

seuen  &  write  pal  digit  in  pe  first  place  toward  be  ryghl  side.     H  it  24 
if  it  is  a        be  a  composyt,  write  be  digit  of  be  composit   in  be  first  place  & 

composite.  .  ..  , 

write  be  articul  of  bat  digit  in  be  secunde  plan'  next  toward  be  1  v ft 
side.  As  yf  bnii  schal  write  sex  &  twenty,  write  }v  digit  of  be 
nombwr  in  be  first  place  bat  is  sex,  and  write  be  articul  next  after  28 
but  is  twenty,  as  bus  26.  But  whan  b<<u  schalt  sowno  or  speke 
s  leaf  139 a.  :i<>r  rede  an  Composyt  bou  schalt  lirst  sowne  be  articul  &  aft///-  be 
How  to  read   <jigit,  as  j,,m  Seyst-  by  be  comyne  speche,  Sex  &   twenty  &  uoujt 

t  wenty  &  sex.     versus.  32 

II  ArticuL/s  si  sit,  in  p/7mo  limite  cifram, 
Articulu///  /■-  ro  reliq///s  insc/  /be  figures. 

How  to  write  H  Here   he   tells   how  JJOU  schal  write  when    Jie    nonibre   p<d    b.<u 

hase  to  write  is  an  Articul.     Expone  versus  sic  &  fac  secundum.  36 
sentenciam.      [fe  be  nombw?'  pa\  bou  hast  write  be  an  Articul.  write 
ien»,  first  a  cit'i'e  &  after  be  cifer  write  an  Articulle  bus.  --/..     fforther 

more  bou  schalt   vndzVstonde  yf  bou   haue  an   Articul.   loke   how 
1   •  ben  '  repeated  in  MS. 


The  Seven   Rules  of  Arithmetic.  7 

mych  he  is,  yf  he  be  w/t//-ynno  an  hundryth,  bou  schalt  write  bol 
one  cif re,  afore,  as  liere  .9^.     It'  be  articulle  be  by  hym-silfe  &  be  hundreds, 
an  hundrid  euene,  ben  schal  bou  write.  1.  &  2  cifers  afore,  bat  he 
4  may  stonde  in  be  fchryd  place,  for  euery  figure  in  be  tliryd  place 
schal  token  a  hundrid  tymes  hvm  selfe.     If  be  articul  be  a  thousant  thensands, 

'  O.C. 

or  thousandes1  and  he  stonde  by  lay???  selfe,  write  afore  3  cifers  &     > 
for])  of  al  ober. 
8  IT  Quolib< -/  in  numcro,  si  par  sit  pr/ma  figura, 

Par  erit  &  to/"m,  quicquid  sibi  coni&miatur ; 
Impar  si  fu-  /it,  totu///  tu//c  fiet  e£  impar. 
f[  Here  lie  teches  a  gcneralle  rewle  bat  vf  be  first  fi^wre  in  be  To  ten "» 

°  .  even  "umber 

12  rewle  of  figwres  token  a  noinbwr  bat  is  euene  al   \>a\    nonibMr  of 
tigurys  in  bat  rewle  schal  be  euene,  as  here  bou  may  see  6.  7.  3.  5.  4. 
Coniputa  ov  pn/ba.    *    If  be  iirst  -lii:><ve  token  an  nombwr  bat  is  ode,   *ieafi396. 
alle  bat  nonibw  in  bat  rewle  schalle  be   ode,  as  her<  5  6  7  8  6  7.  "l;1,1°ai1- 
16  Computa  &  proba.     versus. 

H  Septet  su//t  partes,  no//  plwres,  istius  artis ; 
11  Adders,  subtroheiv,  duplare,  dimidiare, 
Sextaq^'  diuidere,  sed  qui//ta  mtdtiplicare ; 
20  Radices  extrahere  pws  septi///a  dicitur  esse. 

IF  Here  telles  bat  ber  ben)  .7.  spices  or  partes  of  bis  craft.  The  Theseven 
first  is  called  addicion,  be  secunde  is  called  subtraccion.  The  tliryd 
is  called  duplacion.  The  4.  is  called  dimydicion.  The  5.  is  called 
24  uwdtiplicacioii.  The  G  is  called  diuision.  The  7.  is  called  extraccion 
of  be  Rote.  What  all  bese  spices  bene  hit  schalle  be  tolde  singilla- 
tim  in  here  caput'ule. 

II  Subt/^his  aut  addis  a  dext/7s  vel  mediabis: 
28         Thou  schal  be-gynne  in  be  rv-ht  side  of  be  boke  or  of  n  tabul.  Add,  sub- 

.  Hact,  or 

loke  were  \»>n  wnl  be-gynne  to  write  latyn  or  englys  in  a  boke,  &  halve,  from 

r  OJ  Jo.  .         rjght  t0  |e,t 

jwt  schalle  1).'  called  be  lyft  side  of  the  boke,  bat  bou  writes!  toward 

bat  side  schal  be  called  be  ryght  side  of  be  boke.     Versus. 
32  A  leua  dupla,  diuide,  m/dtiplica. 

Here  he  tidies  be  in  quych  side  of  be  boke  or  of  be  t  ibid  bou 

schalle  be-gyn*    to  wyrch   duplacion,  diuision,  and   rnwltiplicacioii. 

Thou  schal  begyne  to  worch   in  be  lyft  side  of  be  boke  or  of  be  Multiply  or 
36  tabul,  but  yn  what  wyse  bou  schal  wyrch  in  hym  dicetur  singil- urt  to  right. 

latim  in  seque/>tib//v  c&jiitulis  et  de  vtilitate  cmuslibet  bxUs  & 

sic  Completur  3prohemiw?H  &  sequit?«r  tractates  &  p/7mo  de  arte  3  leaf  ho 

addictonis  que  prmia  ars  est  in  ordine. 

1     III    MS.     '  ili:;, 1-  in   ll     .' 


The  Craft  of  Addition. 


Four  tilings 
must  be 
known : 


what  il  is; 


how  many 
rows  of 

figures ; 

how  many 
cases ; 


what  is  its 
result. 


How  to  set 
down  the 
sum. 


Add  the  first 
figures ; 


mil  out  the 
top  figure ; 

write  the 
result  in  its 
phi  18 


Alddeiv  si  xixxmerQ  nuimru///  vis,  ordine  tali 
J  Incipe;  scribe  duas  p?'*mo  series  Rumeroium 
P/  /ma///  sub  p/7ma  recte  pone//do  figuraw, 
Et  sic  de  reliq///s  facias,  si  sint  tibi  plures.  4 

U  Here  by-gynnes  be  craft  of  Addicion.     In  bis  craft  bmi  most 
knowe  foure  thynges.     fl  Fyrst  pint  most  know  what  is  addicion. 
Next  b/m  most  know  how  mony  rewles  of  figurys  boii  most  haue. 
1i  Xcxt  b<m  most  know  how  mony  diuers  casys  happes  in  bis  craft     8 
of  addicion.      n1  And  next  qwat  is  be  profet  of  bis  craft.     II  A-  for 
he  first  bou  most  know  bat  addicion  is  a  castyng  to-gedw  of  twob 
nomburys  in-to  om?  nombre.     As  yf  I  aske  qwat  is  twene  &  thre. 
Jjou  wyl  cast  bese  twene  nombres  to-gedw  &  say  b<>t  it  is  fyne.  12 
*  As  for  be  secunde  bou  most  know  jwt  boii  schalle  haue  tweyne 
rewes  of  figures,  one  vndur  a-notKr,  as  her/-  b/<u  mayst  se.  1034 
11  As  for  be  thryd  bou  most  know  pot  there  beu  foure  diuerse  -1,;s- 
cases.     As  for  be  forthe  bou  must  know  \>at  be  profet  of  bis  craft  is  16 
to  telle  what  is  be  hole  nombwr  bat  comes  of  diuerse  nomburis. 
Now  as  to  be  texts  of  oure  verse,  he  teches  there  how  bou  schal 
worch  in  bis  craft,     H  He  says  yf  b<<u   wilt  cast    one  nombwr   to 
anober  nombur,  bou  most  by-gynne  on  bis  wyse.     H  ffyrst  write  20 
Hwo  rewes  of  figuris  &  nombris  so  bat  b<m  write  be  first  figure  of  be 
liver  nombur  euene  vnd/V  the  first  figure  of  be  nether  nonibwr,  And 
be  secunde  of  be  nether  nombur  euene  vnd/V  be  secunde  of  be  hyer, 
,V  s.i  forthe  of  euery  figure  of  both  be  rewesas  bou  mayst  se  i-:'«         24 
f  Inde  duas  adde  p/  /mas  hac  condic/one  : 

Si  digitus  crescat  ex  addL    ne  prior/;/// ; 

P/  /mo  scribe  loco  digitus,  quicu//q//'  sit  ille. 
•li  Here   he  teches  what  bou   schalt    lo  when  b'"i   hast  write  too  28 
rewes  of  figuris  on  ruder  an-ober,  as  I  sayd  be-fore.     If  He  says  b<<u 
schalt  take  be  first  figure  of  be  heyer  nombr<  &  be  fyrst  figur<  of  be 
ueber  nombre,  &  cast   hem  to-geder  ■        1   bis   condicion).     Thou 
schal  hike  qweber  be  noniber  bat  comys  bere-of  be  a  digit  or  no.  32 
f  If  he  be  a  digit   bou  schalt  do  away  be  first  figure  of  be  hyei 
nombre,  and  write  berein  his  stede  bal  he    kode  [nne  be  digit,  bat 
e.iUMs  of  be  ylke  2  figs/res,  A:  so  wrich  forth  on)  ober  figures  yf 
ber<   be  ony  moo,  til  bou  come  to  be  ende  toward  be  lyft  side.     And  36 
lede  be  aether  Bgwe  stonde  still  euer-more  til  bou  haue  ydo.     ffor 
berc-by  bou  schal  wyte  wheber  bou  hast  don<  v*e\  or  no,  as  I  schal 
tell  be  afterward  in  be  ende  of  bis  Chapter.     U  And  loke  allgate 
J  at  bnii  be  gynne  to  worch  in  bis  Craft  of  Addi'2cioh)  in  be  ryjt  side,  40 


The  Cases  of  the  Craft  of  Addition.  9 

here  is  an  ensampul  of  bis  case  1234     Caste  2  to  foure  &  bat  wel  be  Here  is  an 

*  2142  example. 

sex,  do  away  4.  A'  write  in  be  ~     "  same   place  be   figwre  of  sex. 

U  And  lete  be  figure  of  2  in  be  nether  rewe  stonde  stil.     When 

■1  bou  hast  do  so,  cast  3  &  i  to-gedw?1  and  bat  wel  he   seuen  bat  is 

a  digit.     l>n  away  be  3,  &  set  bere  seuen),  and  lete  be  neber  figure 

stonde  stille,  &  so  worch  forth  bakward  til  bou  hast  ydo  all  to-geder. 

Et  si  composite,  in  limite  scribe  seque?*te 

8  Articulum,  p//mo  digitum;  quia  sic  iubet  ordo. 

IT  Here  is  be  secunde  case  put  may  happe  in  bis  craft.     And  be 
case  is  bis,  yf  of  be  easting  of  2  nomburis  to-ged<  /■,  as  of  be  figure  of  suppose  it  is 

r     >  J  r  o  o  >  f        o  a  Composite, 

be  hyer  rewe  &  of  be  figure  of  be  neber  rewe  come  a  Composyt,  how  set  down 
12  schalt  bou  worch.     bus  bou  sclialt  worch.     Thou  shalt  do  away  be  jnd  carry 

i  '  i  •>    i      the  tens. 

figwre  of  be  hyer  noinber  bat  was  east  to  be  figure  of  be  neb'/' 
nomber.  11  And  write  bere  be  'igit  of  be  Composyt.  And  set  be 
articul  of  be  coniposit  next  aft'//1  be  digit  in  be  same  rewe,  yf  here 

16  be  no  mo  figures  aft'/'.  But  yf  bere  lie  mo  figuris  after  bat  digit. 
And  bere  be  schall  be  rekend  for  hym  selfe.  And  when  bou  schalt 
adde  b'd  ylke  figure  b/d  berys  be  articulle  ouer  his  bed  to  be  figure 
vnder  bym,  bou  schalt  cast  bat  articul  to  be  figure  bot  hase  hym  ouer 

20  his  bed.  &  here  bat  Articul  schal  token)  hym  selfe.     lo  an  Ensam-  Here  is  an 
pull  xof-  all  326.      Cast  G  to  G,  &  bere-of  wil  arise  twelue.     do  away    ,  lt..lful  6 
be   hyer  G  &  write  bere  2,  bat  is  be  digit  of  bis  coniposit. 

And  be//  write  be  articulle  bat  is  ten  oue?'  be  figuris  bed  of  twene 

2  \  as  b«s  *  Now  cast  be  articulle  bat  standus  vpon  be  figwis  of 
twene  216.  bed  to  be  same  fgwre,  &  reken  bat  articul  bot  for  one, 
and  ban  bere  wil  arise  thre.  pan  cast  bat  thre  to  be  neb/-/'  figure, 
bat  is  one,  &  bat  wul  be  foure.     do  away  be  figure  of  3,  and  write 

28  bere  a  figure  of  foure.  and  lete  be  neber  figwre  stonde  stil.  &  ban 
worch  forth,     vnde  versus. 

IF  Articulus  si  sit,  in  p/7mo  limite  cifram, 
If  Ai'ticuhi//'  verq      'iquis  inscribe  figuris, 

32  Vel  p< ■/•  se  scribao  si  nulla  figura  sequat///'. 

11  Here  he  puttes  be  thryde  case  of  be  craft  of  Addicion).  &  be 
case  is  bis.     yf  of  Ad^'cioun)  of  2  figuris  a-ryse  an  Articulle,  bow  suppose  u  is 

an  Article, 

schal  bou  do.     thou  most  do  away  be  beer  figure  b"t  was  addid  to  setdowna 

'  -    '  °  '  cipher  and 

30  be  neb//'    &  write  bere  a  cifre,  and  sett  be  articuls  on  be  figuris  •»«■* th« 

'  '  '  r  o  tens. 

hede,  yf  bot  b/  re  come  ony  after.     And  wyrch  ban  as  I  haue  tolde 

be  in  be  secunde  case.     An  ensampull  25.     Cast  5  to  5,  bat  wylle 

be  ten.     now  do  away  be  hyer  5,  &     ''  write  bere  a  cifer.     And 

40  sette  ten  vpon  be  figuris  hed  of  2.  And  reken  it  but  for  on  bus.  lo 


10  Tht    Craft  of  Subtraction. 


Here  is 
exmnpU 


an  Ensampnlle  IT  ■  -^"'1  lJ,an  worch  forth.  But  vf  K/v  come  no 
figure  after  be  '  7-,  |  cifre,  write  be  articulnext  hym  in  be  same  rewe 
as  here  j  5  .  cast  5  to  5,  and  it  we]  be  ten.  do  away  5.  |>at  is  j?e 

hier  5.    _    and  write  ben    a  cifre,  &  write  afte?'  hym  be  articul  as    i 

bus    i,',  j.     And  Jjan  b/m  hast  done. 
5 

IT  Si  tibi  cifra  sup//  ueniens  occurrerit,  ilia/// 

Dele  sup /posita/// ;  fac  illic  scribe  figura///,  8 

Postea  procedas  reliquas  addendo  figuras. 
wuattodo  U  Here  he  puttes  be  fourt  case,  &  it  is  bis.  bat  yf  here  come  a 

when  you  '  Y  i     i       i 

have  a  cipher  cifer    ill    be    hier    lvwc,  how  h/ii    M'lial    (In.       hi      b0U    SChalt    do.       do 

in  the  top  '  '  . 

row.  away  be  cifer,  &  sett  b<??\s  be  digit  bat  comes  of  be  addicioun  as  bus  12 

Ln  example      1  </.</>  M.        Ill    bis  ciisail  1 1  till  In-n    alb    be    foure    Cases.       Cast    3   to    foill'e, 
ofall  the  17743  Y 

difficulties.  p(,t  wol  be  seiien).  do  away   1.  &  write  be?-e  seueri);  ban  cast 

I  to  be  figure  of  8.  \a\  wel  be  12.  do  away  8,  &  .-''it  bere  2.  bat  is 
a  digit,  and  sette  be  articul  of  be  composit,  bat  is  ten,  vpon  be  cifers  16 
lied,  &  reken  it,  for  hym  selfe  bat  is  on.  ban  cast  one  to  a  cifer,  & 
hit  wulb  be  but  on,  for  1103)  &  on  makes  but  one.  ban  east  7.  bat 
stond es  vml'7'  bat  on  to  hym,  &  bat  wel  be  8.  do  away  be  cifer  & 
bat  1.  &  sette  bere  8.  ban  go  forthermore.  cast  Jv  ober  7  to  be  cifer  20 
bat  stondes  ouer  hym.  bat  wul  be  bot  seuen,  for  be  cifer  betokens 

»ieafi42o.   uojt.     do  away  be  cifer  &  sette  |'  ■/•■    ;euen),  2&  ben  go  forberrnore 
&  c.i  t   I  to  1,  &  bat  wel  be  2.     do  away  be  hier  1,  &  sette  bere  2. 
ban  hast  bou  do.     And  yf  bmi  haue  wel  ydo  bis  nomber  bat  is  sett  24 
her*  alt-/-  wel  be  be  nomber  bat  schalle  aryse  of  all    be  addicioh)  as 
her*  27827.     IT  Sequifrtr  alia  spec/es. 

Viiu///'/0  wamernm  si  sit  tibi  denier-  cura 
Scribe  figurarw»i  series,  vt  in  addicione.  28 

Fourthi  II  Tins  is  be  Chapter  of  subtraccion),  in  the  quych   bou  most 

to  know  '  '  . 

tsub-      know   foure  uessessarv  thyncres.     the  first   what  is  subtraccion).  be 

traction  ...  i 

secunde  is  how  mony  uombers  bou  must   haue  to  subtraccion),  the 

thryd  is  how  niony  maner;  of  1  b<  ■■    may  happe  in  bis  craft  of  32 

Libtraccion).    Tie-  fourte  is  qwat  is  be  p?*ofel  of  |i-  craft.     If  As  for 
i;       be    first,    bou    most   know    bat    subtraccion     is    drawyngi    of    one 
thcBecondj     nowmber  oute  of  anobej   nomber.     A.s   for  be   secunde,  bou  most 

known  bat  bou  mo  t   hauo  two  rewes  of  figuris  on<  vnder  anober,       36 
the  third]       bou  addyst    in   addioion).     As   for  be   thryd,  bou   nioyst  know  bat 

fourc  maner  of  diuerse  casis  mai  happe  in  bis  craft.     If  A.s  for  be 
thefourth.      fourt,  bou  most  know  bat  be  prof  el  of  bis  craft  is  whenne  bou  ha 

taken  be  1 1     ■  nomber  out  ot   be  mor<    to  telle  what  bere  leues  ouer  I" 


The  Cases  of  th   Croft  oj  Subtraction.  11 

b'/t.     &  J5ou  mosl  be-gynne  to  wyrch  in  pis  craft  in  be  ryght  side 
of  be  boke,  as  bou  diddyst  in  addiciou).     Versus. 

IT  Maiori  numero  nmaei-uju  suppone  minorem, 
1  H  Siue  pari  nuwero  supponat"/-  mini'  /  us  par. 

XU  Here  he  telles  bat  be  hier  nomber  most  be  more  ben  be  neber,  ■  leaf  143  a. 
or  els  eueri)  as  mych.  but  be  may  noi   be  lasse.     And   be  case   is  greater 
bis,  bou  schalt  drawe  be  neber  nomber  out  of  be  byer,  &  bou  mayst  above  the 
8  not  do  b'/t  yf  be  hier  nomber  were  lasso  ban  bat.  ffor  bou  mayst  not  es 
draw  sex  out  of  2.      But   bou  mast  draw  2  out  of  sex.     And  bou 
maiste  draw  twene  out  of  twene,  for  bou  schal  leue  no}t  of  be  hier 
twene  vnde  versus. 
12  H  Postea  si  possis  a  prima  subtrr/he  pim&m 

Scribens  quod  remanet. 
Here  is  be  first  case  put  of  subtraccion),  &  be  says  bou  schalt  The  first  ease 
"  begynne  in  be  ryght  side,  &  draw  be  first  figwe  of  be  nebe?1  rewe  Hon. 
16  out  of  be  first  figure  of  be  hier  rewe.  qwether  be  bier  Bgwre  be  more 
ben  be  nebe/',  or  eueu)  as  mych.    And  bat  is  notified  in  be  vers  when 
lie  says  "  Si   possis."     Whan  bou  has   bus   ydo,  do  away  be  hiest 
figwre  &  sett   bere  tat  leues  of  be  subtraccion),  lo  an   Ensampulle  Here  is  an 
20    23F"-     draw  2  out  of  4.  ban  leues  2.  do  away  1  &  write  bere  2,  & 
I  l22     latte  be  nebe?'  figur<    sfo  rcde  stille,  &  so  go  for-by  ober  figuris 
till  b'/u  come  to  be  ende,  ban  Last  bou  do. 

11  Cifram  si  nil  remanebit. 
24        IT  Here  he  putt's  be  secuude  case,  &  hit  is  bis.     yf  it  happe  bat  Put  a  cipher 

i  i  i  •  „         ,   .  if  nothing 

qwen  pou  hast  draw  on  neber  tigim    out  oi  n  hier,  &  bere  leue  no2t  remains, 
after  be  subfa'accion),  bus  2bou  schalt  do.     bou  scballe  do  away  be  hier  -  leaf  i48  6, 
figwre  &  write  pere  a  cifer,  as  lo  an  Ensampull    V,y.     Take  foure  Here  i«  an 
28  out  of  foure  ban  Lais  iM,>i.     berefor<    do  away  ;  24  ;  be    hier   1   & 
set  pere  a  cifer,  ban  take  2  out  of  2.  ban  leues  nojt.     do  away  b 
hier  2.  &  set  ber<  a  cifer,  and  so  worch  whare  so  euer  bis  happe. 
Sed  si  wan  possis  a  p/  /ma  denize  p/  /ma//' 
32  P/- cedens  vnu///  de  limite  deme  seque//te, 

Quod  demptu//'  pro  denario  reputabis  ah  illo 
Subt/v<he  to/(dem  numemw  qiiam  proposnisti 
Quo  facto  sc/7be  super  quicquid  remanebit. 
36        Here  he  puttes  be  thryd  ca  e,  be  quych  is  bis.     yf  it  happe  bat  suppose  you 

1  r  .  ,  '  r       cannol  take 

be  neber  ngttre  be  mor<   ben  be  hierfigwe  bat  he  scballe  be  draw  out  the  lower 
,    ,  ?  >       r  or  figure  from 

of.  how  schalle  bou  do.     bus  bou  schalle  do.     bou  scballe  borro  .1.  the  top  one, 

iii  >  borrow  ten  ; 

oute  of  be  next  figwre  bal  conn     after  in  be  same  rewe,  for  bis  case 
In  may  neuer  happ  but  yf  pere  come  figures  after,     ban  bou  schall    <  it 


12  The  Cases  of  the  Craft  of  Subtraction. 

bat  on  ouer  be  hier  figures  lied,  of  the  quych  b<«u  woldist  y-draw 
onto  be  neyber  figure  yf  bmi  haddyst  y-mv^t.     Whane  bou  hase 

take  the         bus.  ydo  bon  scliull'-  rekene  bat  .1.  for  ten.     H.  And  out  of  bat  ten 

lower  number 

fromtenj       b<m  sclial  draw  be  neybermost  figure,  And  alle  b«t  leues  bou  schalle    d 
add  the         adde  to  be  figure  on  vvhos  bed  bat  .  1.  stode.     And  ben  bf/ii  schalle 

niiswer  to  '  '  '         r 

thetop  d<>  away  alle  bat,  &  sett  bere  alle  that  arisys  of  tin-  addicion)  of  be 

number.  . 

iieafuia.  ylke  -  figuris.     And  yf  yt  'liappe  bat  be  figure  of  be  quych  J>ou 

schalt  bonxi  on  be  hym  self  but  1.  If  bou  schalt  bat  one  &  sett  it    8 
vppon)  be  ober  figuris  hed,  and  sett  in  bat  1.  place  a  cifer,  yf  ber< 

Kxampie.  come  mony  figures  after,  lo  an  Ensampul.  |~ 2122- j-  take  1  out  of  2. 
it  wyl  not  be,  berfore  borro  one  of  Jv  next  L__J  figure,  bat  is  2.  and 
sett  bat  one/'  be  hed  of  pe  fyrst  2.  &  rekene  it  for  ten.  and  bere  be  12 
seeunde  stondes  write  1.  for  bou  tokest  on  out  of  1  iy /// .  ban  take 
be  nej>er  figure,  bat  is  4,  out  of  ten.  And  ben  leues  6.  cast  to  G  be 
figure  of  bat  2  bat  stode  vnder  be  hedde  of  1.  bat  was  borwed  & 
rekened  for  ten,  and  bat  wylle  be  8.  do  away  brtt  0  &  bat  2,  &  16 
sette  bere  8,  &  lette  be  neber  figure  stonde  stille.     Whanne  bou  hast 

how  to         do  bus,  go  to  be  next  figwe  b<d  is  now  but  1.  but  first  yt  was  2.  & 

'Pay  luck'  Y      '  °  r  '  J 

the  borrowed  bere-of  was  borred  1.     ban  take  out  of  bat  be  figure  vnder  hym,  b</t 

is  3.  hit  wel  not  be.  ber-fore  borowe  of  the  next  figttre,  be  quych  is  20 
bot  1.     Also  take  &  sett  hym  ouer  be  hede  of  be  figu?'e  bat  bou 
woldest  bane  y-draw  oute  of  be  nether  figure,  be  quych  was  3.  & 
bou  myjt  not,  &  rekene  bat  borwed  1  for  ten  &  sett  in  be  same 
place,  of  be  quych  place  bop  tokest  hym  of,  a  cifer,  for  he  was  boi  1.  24 
Whanne  bou  hast  Jras  ydo,  take  oul  of  bat  1.  bai  is  rekent  for  ten, 

»ieaii446.   }v  neb<  /•  figure  of  •">.  And  bei'i  leiies  7.     2cast  be  ylke  7  to  }v  figwre 
bat  bad  be  ylke  ten  vpon  his  bed,  be  quych  figure  was  1,  &  bat  wol 
lie  8.     ban  do  away  bat  1  and  bat  7.  &  write  ben  8.  &  ban  wyrch  28 
forth  in  obe/*  figuris  til  bou  come  to  be  ende,  &  ban  bou  hast  be  do. 

Versus. 

11  Facque  nonenarios  de  cifris,  c\\m  remeabis 

■  Occ///-rant  si  forte  cifre;  dum  demps-  /is  vnum  32 

U  Postea  p/vcedas  reliquas  deme//do  figuras. 

A.  very  l»ard  "    "'r'    '"'  puttes  J>e  foiirte  ease,   be  quych   LS  bis,  yf   it    liappe  bat 

cuseisput.     |)(,  llt.j1r/.  figWj.e,  be  quych  bou  schalt   draw  out  of  be  hier  figure  be 

mon    ban  be  hier  figur  ouer  hym,  &  }v  next  figure  of  two  or  of  3(i 
thre  or  of  foure,  or  how  monj  ber<  be  by  cifers,  how  wold  b<>\\  do. 
)?ou  wost.  wel  bou  must  mile  borow,  &  bou  mays!  nol  borow  of  be 
cifers,  for  bai  haue   003!   bat   bai  may  lene  or  spar-.     Ergo3  bo\* 

Pel  baps  "  So." 


How  to  'prove  the  Sttbtraction.  13 

woldest  jj'Hi  do.  Certayn)  pus  most  pou  do,  bou  most  borow  on  of 
pe  next  figure  significatyf  in  pat  rewe,  for  pis  case  may  not  happe, 
but  yf  pere  come  figures  significatyf  niter  the  cifers.  "Whan  pou 
4  hast  borowede  pat  1  of  the  next  figure  significatyf,  sett  pot  on  oner 
pe  hede  of  pot  figwe  of  pe  quych  pou  wold  haue  draw  pe  nep'  r 
figure  out  yf  Jjou  hadest  niy^t,  &  reken  it  for  ten  as  pou  diddest 
in  J>e  oper  case  here-a-fore.  Whan)  pou  hast  pus  y-do  loke  how 
8  niony  cifers  pere  were  bye-twene  pat  figure  significatyf,  &  pe  figwe 
of  pe  quych  pou  woldest  haue  y-draw  the  *  neper  figure,  and  of  euery  i  leaf  145  a. 
of  pe  ylke  cifers  make  a  figure  of  9.  lo  an  Ensampulle  after,  f 40002  |  Here  is  an 
Take  4  out  of  2.  it  wel  not  be.   borow  1  out  of  pe  next  figure  i_10004j 

12  significatyf,  pe  quych  is  4,  &  pen  leues  3.  do  away  pat  figure  of  4 
&  write  pere  3.  &  sett  pot  1  vppon  pe  figure  of  2  hede,  &  pan  take 
4  out  of  ten,  &  pan  pere  leues  G.  Cast  G  to  the  figure  of  2,  pot  avoI 
be  8.     do  away  pat  6  &  write  pere  8.     Whan  poll  hast  pus  y-do 

16  make  of  euery  0  betweyn  3  &  8  a  figure  of  9,  &  pan  worch  forth  in 
goddes  name.     &  yf  pou  hast  wel  y-do  bou2  schalt  haue  pis  nomber 

H  Si  subtracc/o  sit  bene  facta  p/ "bare  valebis  j~39998l  Sic. 

Quas  s«btraxisti  p/v'mas  addendo  figuras.  [_10004 J 

20         U  Here  he  teches  be  Craft  how  pou  schalt  know,  whan  pou  hast  How  to  prove 

.         .      :i  subtraction 

subtrayd,  wheper  pou  hast  wel  ydo  or  no.     And  pe  Craft  is  pis,  sum. 
ryglit  as  pou  subtrayd  pe  neper  figures  fro  pe  hier  figures,  ry^t  so 
adde  pe.  same  neper  figures  to  pe  hier  figures.     And  yf  pou  haue 

24  well  y-wroth  a-fore  pou  schalt  haue  pe  hier  nombre  pe  same  pou 
haddest  or  puu  be-gan  to  worch.     as  for  pis  I  bade  pou  schulde 
kepe  pe  neper  figures  stylle.     lo  an  3Ensampulle  of  alle  pe  4  cases  Meafi45&. 
togedre.    worche  welle  bis  case  ^0003468^.     And  yf  bou  worch  welle  Here  is  an 

28  whan  pou  hast  alle  subtrayd  !  20004664  I  pe  pat  bier  nomine  here, 
pis   schalle   be   pe  nombre  here  foloyng  whan   pou  hast    subtrayd 
f39998804~j.     And  pou  schalt  know  pus.    adde  pe  neper  rewe  of  pe  Our  author 
I  20004664  I  same  noml)re  to  pe  hier  rewe  as  pus,  cast  4  to  4.   pat  wol  >>««  3f<>r  1  • 

32  be  8.  do  away  pe  4  &  write  pere  8.  by  pe  first  case  of  addicion). 
pan  cast  G  to  0  pat  wol  be  G.  do  away  pe  0,  &  write  pere  G.  pan 
cast  6  to  8,  pot  wel  be  11.  do  away  8  ec  write  pere  a  figure  of  4, 
pat  is  pe  digit,  and  write  a  figwre  of  1.    pat  schall  be-token  ten.    pat 

3g  is  pe  artieul  vpon  be  hed  of  <s  Dext  afte7',  pan  reken  pat  1.  for  1.  & 

cast  it  to  8.    pat  schal  be  9.    cast  to  pat  9  pe  neber  figure  vnder  pat 

pe  quych  is  1,  &  pat  schall'  be  13.     do  away  bat  9  &  sett  f>  re  3,  & 

sett  a  figure  of  1.  pot  schall  be   10  vpon  pe  next  figur/.s  hede  pe 

2  'hali '  marked  for  erasure  in  MS. 


14  The  Graft  of  Duplatu  n. 

quych  is  9.   by  be  secu^de  case  b«t  bou  hades!  in  addicion).  bun  cast 

I  in  9.  &  }?at  wo]  be  1".  '1"  awaj  be  9.  &  J1. it  1.     And  write  ber<  a 

cifer.  and  write  be  articulL  bat  is  I .  betokenyngi   LO.  vpon  pehedeof 

i  leal  it'-'    be  next  figure  toward  be  1  \  It  side,  be  quych  4s  9,  iV  so  do  forth  hi     1 

Reworks       bou  come  to  bf  last  9.     lake  be  \\<<uv>  of  bat  1.  be  qnych  bou  schalt 

his  i t  '  r  T  ,      , 

through,        fynde  oue»'  be  hed  of  9.  &  sett  ii   ouer  be  nexl   figures  hede  bat 
schal  be  .'3.     •:  Also  do  away  be  9.  &  set  be;*<   a  cifer,  &  ben  cast 
bat  1  bat  stondes  vpon  be  hede  of  3  to  be  same  ■"»,  &  pal  schalle  make    8 
I,  ben  caste  to  be  ylke  1  the  figure  in  be  ueybe?"  rewe,  be  quych  is 

andbringa  2,  and  bat  sch, ill-  be  6.  And  pen  schal  bou  haue  an  Ensanipulle 
ajeyn),  loke  &  se,  &  but  bou  haue  bis  same  bou  hase  my-v  wrojt. 
I  60003168  i  Sequit^/'  de  duplac/one  12 

I  2000-l(3t34  ! 

Hi  vis  duplaiv  numru/e,  sic  i//cipe  primo 
y^  Scribe  figurarum  series  quamcunque  velis  tu. 
Four  tilings  11  Tliis  is  the  Chapture  of  duplacion),  in  be  quych  crafi  bou  mosl 

knowiiin       haue  &  know  I  thinges.     *,'  jje  first  bat  bou  most  know  is  what  is  1G 

Dnplalion.  .  i       •      1  • 

duplacion).     pe  secuwde  is   bow  mony  rewes  o|    ngwes    b"U   mosl 
haue  to  bis  craft.     U  be  thryde  is  how  many  cases  may2  happe  in 

Here  they      bis  craft.     *,\  be  fourte  is  what  is  be  prof  el  of  be  craft.     •   As  for  be 

first,  duplacion)  is  a  doublyng   of  a  uombre.     *   As  for  be  secuwde  20 

si«afi466.  bou  most  'haue  on  nombre  or  on  rewe  of  figures,  the  quych  called 
ivivwus  duplandws.  As  for  pe  thrid  b"ti  most  know  bat  •">  diuerse 
ease.-  may  hap  in  bis  craft.  As  for  be  fourte.  qwat  is  be  profet  of 
bis  craft,  &  bal  is  to  know  what  u-risy;l  of  a  nombre  [-doublyde.  24 

Mind  where    '   fforber-inore,  bou  mosl  know  »V  take  gode  hede  in  qnych  side  b<m 
schalh  be-gyn-in  bis  craft,  or  ellis  bou  maysl  spyl  all*  bj'laber  pere 
aboute.     certcyn  bou  schalt  begyh)  in  the  1\  ft  side  in   bis  Craft, 
thenke  wel  ouer  bis  verse.     IT  lA  leua  dupla,  diuide,  niwltiplica.4  28 
The  sentens  of  pes  verses  afore,  as  bou  may  see  if  pou  take  hede. 

,!""1  ,1,1      As   be  texl  of  bis   verse,  bal  is  to  say,  1   Si  vis  duplare.    bis  is  be 

your  n  '  »  '  •  err 

sentence.     8    If  bou  wel  double  a  nombre  bus  bou  mosl   be-gynn). 

Write  a  rewe  of  figures  of  what  nombr<  pou  well,     versus.  32 

Postea  p/  -cedas  pn'maw  duplando  figura//' 
Inde  qwod  excrescit  scribas  vbi  iusserit  ordo 
Iuxta  pr<  cepta  tibi  que  dant"/-  in  addic/one. 
Ho    towork         '    Her-   he  telles  how  pon  schall  worcli  in  bis  Craft,     he  says,  36 

f\  rat,  whan  pou  hast  writen  be  nombre  bou  schall  be-gyn  al  be  first 

-  'moy '  iu  MS. 
4     Subtrakaa  ai  t  addis  a  dextns  ve\  mediabis'  added  on  margin  of  MS. 


.i  sum. 


Tht    Cases  oj  th    Graft  of  Ditplation.  15 

Bgur<  in  tin-  lyft  sidi-,  iV"  doubulli   bal  figwre,  &  be  nombre  bat  comes 
bere-of  b"U  schalt  write  as  bou  diddyst  in  addicion),  as  1   I  schal  telle 
be  in  be  case.     v<  rsus. 
4  *H  Nam  si  sit  digitus  in  prinio  limite  scribas.  '  ieai  U7<*. 

H  Here  is  be  first  case  of  bis  craft,  be  quych  is  bis.     yf  of  dupla-  ifthj 

'  >  '  *        x    "  >  -j  isa  digit, 

cioii)  of  a  figure  arise  a  digit,  what    schal  bou  do.      bus  pou  schal 

do.     do  away  be  figure  bat  was  doublede,  &  sett  here  be  diget  bat  write  it  in 

'     '        °  r  !ii     Hie  place  of 

8  comes  of  be  duplacion),  as  bus.  23.  double  2,  &  bat  wel  be  4.     do  tiietop 

'  l  '  '  _        figure. 

away  be  figure  of  2  &  sett  bere  a  figure  of  -4,  &  so  worch  forth  tille 
Jvm  come  to  be  ende.     versus. 

H  Articub/-'  si  sit,  in  pn'mo  limite  cifram, 
12  *I  Articulu;//  vero  reliquis  inscribe  figuris  ; 

II  Vel  p<r  se  scribas,  si  nulla  figura  sequat*// . 
U  Here  is  be  secunde  case,  ba   quych  is  b's    yf  ber<    come  an  if  it  is  an 

r  „  iii  article, 

articulle  of  b'-  duplacion)  of  a  figure  bou  schalt  do  ryjt  as  bou 
16  diddyst  in  addicion),   bat  is  to   wete    bat   b"ii  schalt   do   away   be 

figure  bat  is  doublet  &  sett  bere  a  cifer,  &  write  be  articulle  ouer  b-e  pui  acipher 
next  figuris  hede,  vf  ber<>  be  any  after-warde  toward  be  lyft  side  as  and 'carry* 

°  '  '  the  tens. 

bus.  25.  begyn  at  the  lyft  side,  and  doubulle  2.  bat  wel  be  4.  do 
20  away  bat  2  iV'  sett  bere  4.  ban  doubul  5.  bat  wel  be  10.    do  away  5, 

&  sett  bere  a  0,  &  sett  1  vpon  be  next  figum  hede  be  quych  is  4. 

&  ben  draw  downe  1  to  4  &  bat  wolle  be  5,  &  ben  do  away  bat  4 

&  bit  1,  &  sett  bere  5.  for  bat  1  schal  be  rekened  in  be  drawynge  to- 
24  gedre  for  1.     wen  2bou  hast  ydon  bou  schalt  baue  bis  nombre  50.   2ieafU76. 

yf  bere  come  no  figure  after  be  figwre  bat  is  addit,  of   be  quych  if  there  is 

.    .  .  no  figure  i  o 

addicion)  comes  an  articulle,  bou  schalt  do  away  be  figure  bat  is  'carry'  them 
dowblet  &  sett  pen  a  0.  &  write  be  articul  next  by  in  be  same  "'em  down. 
28  rewe  toward  be  lyft  syde  as  bu<.  523.  double  5  bat  woll  be  ten.  do 
away  be  figure  5  &  set  be?*e  a  cifer,  &  sett  be  articul  next  after  in 
be  same  rewe  toward  be  lyft  side,  &  bou  schall  haue  bis  nombre 
1023.  ben  go  forth  &  double  be  ober  nombers  be-quych  is  ly^t  y- 
32  nowjt  to  do.     versus. 

11  Compositus  si  sit,  in  limite  scr/be  seq/'cute 
Articulu//',  p/v'mo  digitus ;  quia  sic  iubet  ordo : 
Et  sic  de  reliquis  facie/>s,  si  suit  tibi  plures. 
30        H  Here  he  puttes  be  Thryd  ease,  be  quych  is  bis,  yf  of  dupla-  mtisa 

\     c       n  r*  ••        i  i     t,     i  ,.  Composite, 

cion)  ot  a  figure  come  a  <  omposit.     pou  schalt  do  away  be  ngwre  b"t 
is  doublet  &  set  bere  a  digit  of  be  Composit,  &  sett  be  articulle  ouer  writ. 
be  next  figures  hede,  &  after  draw  hyra  downe.  with  be  figure  ouer  and  'carry  ■ 
40  whus  hede  lie  stondes,  &  make  pere-of  an  nombre  as  bou  hast  done 


Here  is  an 
example. 


lft  The  Craft  oj  Mediation. 

afore,  &  yf  \>ert  conic  no  figwre  after  pat  digit  pat  pow  hasl  y-write, 

paw  set  pe  articulle  next,  after  hym  in  pe  same  rewe  as  pus,  t "» T  :  double 

'  ieafU8a.   o'  pat  wel  be  12,  do  away  6  &  write  pei'e  pe  digit  !of  12,  pe  quyi  h 

is  2,  and  set  jje  articulle  nexl  after  toward  pe  lyft  .side  in  pe  same  4 
rewe,  for  pere  comes  no  figure  after.  pan  dowble  pat  oper  figure,  pe 
quych  is  7,  fat  wel  be  14.  the  quych  is  a  Composit.  fen  do  away  7 
pat  pou  doublet  &  sett  pe  pe  diget  of  hym,  the  quych  is  I,  sett  pe 
articulle  ouer  pe  next  figures  bod,  pe  quych  is  2,  &  pen  draw  to  hym  8 
pat  on,  &  make  on  nombre  pe  quych  schalle  be  3.  And  pen  yf  p<m  haue 
wel  y-do  pou  schalle  haue  pis  nombre  of  pe  duplacion),  134.  versus. 
U  Si  super  ext/<ma//>  nota  sit  monade//'  dat  eid- >m 

Quod  tibi  '"^tingat  si  p/v'mo  dimidiabis.  12 

Howto  fl  Here  be  says,  yf  ouer  pa  fyrst  figitre  in  pe  ryjt  side  be  such  a 

mark  t..i-        merke  as  is  li«'i '    made,  ",  pou  schalle  fyrst  doubul]"  pe  figure,  the 


one-half. 


quych  stondes  vnder  p<d  merke,  &  pen  pou  schalt  doubul  pat  merke 
f"'  quych  stondes  for  haluendel  on.  for  too  haluedels  makes  on,  &  16 
so  pat  wol  be  on.  east  p"t  on  to  pat  duplacion)  of  pe  figure  ouer 
whos  hed  stode  Jjat  merke,  &  write  it  in  pe  same  place  J>ere  fiat  pe 
figure  pe  quych  was  doublet  stode,  as  Jms  23w.  double  •">,  pat  wol  be 
6 ;  doubul  pat  halue  on,  &  pat  wol  be  on.  cast  on  to  6,  pat  wel  be  20 
7.  do  away  6  &  pat  1,  &  set!  pert  7.  pan  base  poll  do.  as  for  pal 
»ieafi*86.  figure,  pan  go  -to  pe  oper  figure  &  worch  forth.  &  pou  schall  ueuer 
Tins  can  only  j)aue  sllt.],  ;l  merk  but  oil'/'  be  hed  of  be  furst  figure  in  be  ryght 

stand  over  '  '  °  '  •  ° 

neure?'        s^e-     And  Je*  ''  acna'  11"t  happe  but  yf  it  were  y-halued  a-fore,  pus  24 
pou  schalt  vnde7'stonde  pe  verse.     11  Si  super  extrernaw  &c.     Et 
nota,  talis  figwra  "  significans  medietate?H,  unitatrs  veniat,  i.e.  con- 
tingal  uel  fiat  super  extreinam,  i.e.  super  prtmaw  figuraw?  in  extrenio 
sic  versus dextram  ars  da!  :  i.e.  reddil  monade///.  i.e.  vnitatew  eidem.  28 
i.e.  eidem  note  &  declinatfwr  hec  monos,  d-is,  di,  dem,&c.     ■    Quod 
ergo  to//////  hoc  dabis  monad  em  note  conting*  t.  i.e.  eveniet  tibi  si  dimi- 
diasti,  i.e.  accipisti  uel  subtulisti  medietatem  alicuius  unius,  in  cuius 
principio  sint  figura  num<  rum  denotaus  imparew  primo  i.e.  principiis,  32 
11  Sequit'o-  de  mediacione. 

ncipe  sic.  si  vis  alique//  nuwerum  mediar<  : 
Sc/-/be  figurar/////  seriem  sola///,  velut  an/  . 
Thefour  "'  In  pis  Chapter  is  ta^l   pe  Crafl  of  mediacioun),  in  pe  quych  36 

crafl    bou   mosl   know    1   thynges.     Hurst  what  is  mediacion).     the 

mediation!  ;  '  ,  ,   ,  .      ,  , 

secunde  how  inony  rewes  oi   figures  pou  most  haue  m  po  wyrcnyng< 
of  bis  craft.     p>-  thryde  how  mony  diuerse  cases  may  happ  in  pis 
theSni        craft.1     1   Ai  for  pe  furst,  pou  schall  vndurstonde  pat  mediacion)  isa  4'j 
;  After  '  crafl  '  insert  '  the  .4.  what  is  pe  profet  of  |»is  craft.' 


J 


The  Mediation  of  an  Odd  Number.  17 

takyng  out  of  halfe  a  nonibcr  out  of  a  holle  nomber,  1as  yf  b"U   Ueafuoa. 
wolde  bake  3  out  of  6.     51  As  for  be  secunde,  Jjou  schalt  know  b«t  the  econd; 
Jvu  most  haue  one  rewe  of  figures,  &  no  moo,  as  bou  hayst  in  be 
4  craft  of  duplaciou).     r  As  for  the  thryd,  bou  most  vnderstonde  J?at  the  third; 
5  cases  may  happe  in  bis  craft.     U  As  for  be  fourte,  Jjou  schalle  the  fourth, 
know  pat  the  profet  of  pis  craft  is  when  Jjou  hast  take  away  be 
haluendel  of  a  nombre  to  telle  qwat  bere  schalle  leue.     ^  Incipe 
8  sic,  &c.     The  sentence  of  bis  verse  is  bis.     yf  Jjou  wold  medye,  bat 
is  to  say,  take  lialfe  out  of  be-  holle,  or  halfe  out  of  halfe,  Jjou  most 
begynne  bws.     "Write  one  rewe  of  figures  of  what  nombre  jjou  wolte,  Begin  thus. 
as  bou  dyddyst  be-fore  in  b1'  Craft  of  duplacion).     versus. 
1-  II  Postea  p/ncedas  medians,  si  p/v'ma  figura 

Si  par  aut  i//'par  videas. 
If  Here  he  says,  when  }vm  hast  write  a  rewe  of   figures,  bou 
schalt  take  hede  wheber  be  first  figure  be  euen)  or  odde  in  nombre,  see  if  the 

-..  .  number  is 

lb  &  vnderstonde  bot  he  spekes  of  be  first  figure  in  be  ry3t  side.     And  evenorodd. 
in  the  ryght  side  bou  schalle  begynne  in  bis  Craft. 

IT  Quia  si  fucrit  par, 
Dimidiab/s  earn,  scribes  quicq>'/d  remanebit: 
20         1i  Here  is  the  first  case  of  bis  craft,  be  quych  is  bis,  yf  be  first  [fit  is  even, 

■    *  l'li-ci      halve  it,  and 

figure  he  eiien.  bou  schal  take  away  fro  be  figure  euen  halfe,  oc  dowritethe 


answer  m 


away  bat  figure  and  set  bere  bat  leues  ouer,  as  bus,  4.     take  2  halfe  its  place. 
out  of  4,  A;  ban  bere  leues  2.  do  away  4  ec  sett  bere  2.  bis  is  lyght 
2 1  y-nowjt.     versus. 

H  Impar  si  fuerit  vnu//<  demas  mediaiv 

Quod  no//  prestunas,  Bed  quod  sup'  rest  mediabis 
Inde  sup-  r  tractu//*  fac  demptii///  quod  no/ot  vntttn. 
28         Here  is  be  secunde  case  of  bis  craft,  the  quych  is  bis.     yf  be  u  it  is  odd, 

first  figure  betokene  a  nombre  bat  is  odde,  the  quych  odde  schal  not  even  number 

ii     less  tlia" ll- 
be  mediete,  ben  bou  schalt  medye  bat  nombre  bat  leues,  when  the 

odde  of  be  same  nombre  is  take  away,  &  write  bat  bat  leues  as  bou 

32  diddest  in  be  first  case  of  bis  craft.     Whan)  b"ii  hayst  write  bat.  for 

b'd  bat  leues,  write  such  a  mcrke  as  is  here  "  vpon  his  hede,  be  quych  Then  write 

merke  schal  betoken)  halfe  of  be  odde  bat  was  take  away,     lo  an  one-half  over 

Ensampull.  245.     the  first  figure  her<  is  betokenynge  odde  nombre, 

36  be  quych  is  5,  for  5  is  odde  ;  b<  re  fore  do  away  bat  bot  is  odde,  be  Herein  an 

C  X  111  1 1 1 1 1 1 • . 

quych  is  1,  ben  leues  4.  ben  medye  1  &  ben  leues  '_'.     do  away  I.  & 

settc  bere  2,  &  make  such  a  merke  "  upon  his  hede,  bat  is  to  say 

ouer  his  hede  of  2  as  bus.  212."'     And  ben  worch  forth  in  be  ober 

40  figures  tyll  b<m  come  to  be  ende.     by  be  furst  case  as  bou  schalt 

KOMBRYNGE.  C 


18  The  Cast     of  the  Croft  of  Mediation. 

iieafisoa.  vnderstonde  bat  bou  schall  J.neue/"  make  such  a  merk  but  ouer  be 
markboniy  ^rs^  figure  hed  in  pe  ri$l  side.  Wheber  J»e  other  figures  bat  comyii) 
figure."    r8<  after  hym  be  run,'  or  odde.     ve?-sus. 

H  Si  monos,  dele  ;  sit  UU  cifra  post  no/V<  supra.  4 

if  the  first  ^[  Here  is  be  thryde  case,  be  quych  vf  the  first  fieiire  be  a  figure 

figure  is  one  '  '        '    '  J  °  D 

put  a  cipher.  0f  ]_    j,,m  schalt  do  away  J>at  1  &  set  bere  a  cifer,  &  a  merke  on*0/- be 
cifer  as  bus,  241.     do  away  1,  &  sett  bere  a  cifer  with  a  merke  oner 
his  hede,  &  ben  hast  b<m  ydo  for  bat  0.  as  bus  0W  ben  worch  forth    8 
iu  pe  ober  figwys  till  b"U  come  to  pe  ende,  for  it  is  lyght  as  dyche 
water,     vn.de  vc?*sus. 

IT  Postea  p/<<cedas  hac  condic/one  secu//da: 

Imp-//  si  fu<  /it  hinc  vnu///  deme  p/v'ori,  12 

Inscribens  quinque,  nam  denos  significant 
Monos  p/ ■'  d/'7am. 
Whattodo  H  Here  he  puttes  be  fourte  case,  pr  quych  is  bis.     yf  it  happen) 

figure  is  odd.  the  secunde  figure  betoken  odde  nombre,  bou  schal  do  away  on  of  16 
bat  odde  nombre,  pe  quych  is  significatiue  by  bat  figure  1.  be  quych 
1  schall  be  rekende  for  1".     Whan  bou  hast  take  away  pat  1  out  of 
be  nombre  p«t  is  signifiede  by  bat  figure,  bou  schalt  medie  bat  bat 
leues  ouer,  &  do  away  pal  figure  bat  is  medied,  &  sette  in  his  styde  20 
halfe  of  bat  nombre.     '   Whan  bou  hase  so  dime,  bou  schall  write 
*  leaf  u,n6.   -a  figure  of  5  one/1  be  next  figures  hede  by-fore  toward  be  ryjt  side, 
figure  of  five   f"r  Pa^  1,  be  quych  made  odd  nombre,  schall  stonde  for  ten,  &  5  is 
iowermnn-    halfe  of  10;   so  J>ou  inosl  write  5  for  his  halucndelle.     1"  an  Kn-  24 

sampulle,  1678.  begyn)  in  be  ryjl  side  as  bou  most  nedes.  medie  S. 
Example.  ben  bou  schall  leue  1.  do  away  bat  8  >V  sette  bere  1.  ben  out  of  7. 
take  away  1.  pe  quych  makes  odde,  &  sett  5.  vpon  be  next  figures 
hede  afore  toward  be  rj  ;i  ide,  J1*1  quycji  is  now  1.  but  afore  it  was  28 
8.  for  pat  1  schal  be  rekenel  Eor  10,  of  be  quych  10,  5  is  halfe,  as 
bou  knowest  wel.  Whan  bou  hast  bus  ydo,  medye  bat  be  quych 
leues  after  pe  takyinge  away  of  pat  pit  is  odde,  be  quych  leuynge 
schalle  be  •">  ;  '1"  away  6  A  sette  be?'e  .">,  &  bou  schalt  haue  such  a  32 
nombre  4634.  after  go  forth  to  p<i  next  figwre,  &  medy  bat,  & 
worch  forth,  for  it  is  lyjl  vimv;t  to  be  certayn). 

•  Si  V'  o  S'  cwwda  dat  vnu>/>. 
Ilia  deleta,  sc//bat///- cifra;  pr/ori  36 

IT  Tradendo  quinque  pro  denario  mediato  ; 

Nee  cifra  sc//batur.  nisi  dei//de  fig>//a  seq>/at>//- : 

Postea  pr "cedas  reliqt^s  mediando  figuras 

Vt  sup/v  docui,  si  sint  tibi  mille  figure.  -JO 


How  to  prove  the  Mediation.  19 

IF  Here  he  puttes  pe  5  case,  pe  quyeh  is  ^is  :  yf  pe  secunde  Ucafisia. 
figure  be  of  1,  as  pis  is  here  12,  pou  schalt  do  away  fiat  1  &  sett  figm-euCon^ 
\>ere  a  cifer.  &  sett  5  ouer  J?e  next  figure  hede  afore  toward  pe  rijt  andwritefive 

4  side,  as  pou  diddyst  afore j  &  pat  5  schal  ho  haldel  of  pat  1,  pe  figi,rC.'e 
quych  1  is  rekent  fur  10.     lo  an  Ensampulle,  211.     medye  4.  pat 
schalle  he  2.  do  away  -1  &  sett  pere  2.     pe>j  go  forth  to  pe  next 
figure,  pe  quych  is  hot  1.  do  away  pat  1.  &  sett  pere  a  cifer.     &  set 

8  5  vpon  pe  figures  hed  afore,  pe  quych  is  nowe  2,  &  pen  pou  schalt 

haue  pis  no/nhre  202,  pen  worch  forth  to  pe  nex  figure.    And  also  it 
is  no  maystery  yf  pere  come  no  figure  after  pat  on  is  medyet,  pou 
schalt  write  no  0.  no  now^t  elUs,  but  set  5  oner  pe  next  figure  afore 
12  toward  pe  ryst,  as  pus  14.     ruedie  4  then  leues  2,  do  away  4  &  sett  How  to  halve 

..  •!•  in  l-iii  fourteen. 

yere  2.  pen  medie  1.  pe  qtticn  is  rekende  for  ten,  pe  halueftdel  pere- 
<>f  wel  he  5.  sett  pot  5  vpon  pe  hede  of  p«t  figure,  pe  quych  is 
now  2,  &  do  away  pat  1,  &  pou  schalt  haue  pis  nombre  yf  pou 

1 6  worch  wel,  2  .     xn.de  versus. 

11  Si  mediacio  sit  bene  f^-ta  probare  valeb/x 
IF  Duplando  numerum  que///  p/7mo  di///ediasti 
1F  Here  he  telles  pe  how  pou  schalt  know  whoper  pou  base  wel  How  to  prove 

iiio  i  i  t  in  your  media- 

20  ydo  or  no.     doubul  -pe  nombre  pe  quych  pou  base  mediet,  and  yf  tion. 

pou     haue  wel    y-medyt  after   pe  dupleacion),   pou  schalt  haue   pe   neafl°16- 
same  nombre  pat  pou  haddyst  in  pe  tahulle  or  pou  began  to  medye, 
as  pus.     II  The  furst  ensampulle  was  pis.  4.  pe  quych  I-mediet  was  First 

24  laft  2,  pe  whych  2  was  write  in  pe  place  pat  4  was  write  afore. 
Now  douhulle  pat  2,  &  pou  schal  banc  4,  as  pou  hadyst  afore,      pe 
secunde  Ensampulle  was  pis,  245.      When  pou  haddyst  mediet  alle  The  second, 
pis  nombre,  yf  pou  haue  wel  ydo  pou  schalt  haue  of  p«t  mediacion) 

28  pis  nombre,  1 22".  Now  douhulle  pis  nombre,  &  begyn  in  pe  lyft 
side;  douhulle  1,  pat  schal  be  2.  do  away  pat  1  &  sett  pere  2.  pen 
doubulle  pat  ope)'  2  &  s  stt  J"  r<  4,  pen  douhulle  pal  ober  2,  &  pat  wel 
be  4.  yen  doubul  pat  merke  pat  stondes  for  liable  on.  &  pat  schalle 

32  be  1.  Cast  pat  on  to  4,  &  it  schalle  be  5.  do  away  pat  2  &  pat 
merke,  &  sette  pere  5,  &  pen  pou  schal  haue  pis  nombre  245.  & 
pis  wos  pe  same  nombur  pat  pou  haddyst  or  pou  began  to  medye,  as 
pou  mayst  se  yf  pou  take  hede.     Tie'  nombre  pe  quych  pou  haddist 

3G  for  an  Ensampul  in  pe  3  ease  of  mediacion)  to  be  mediet  was  pis  'f lie  third 
241.     whan  pou  haddist  medied  alle  pig  nombur  truly  3by  eue?y  »ieafi52«. 
figure,  pou  'schall  bane  be  pot  mediacion)  pis  nombur  120w.      Now 
dowbul  pis  nomh///\,  A'  begyn  in  pe  lyft,  .side,  as  I  tolde  pe  in   |>e 

40  Craft  of  duplacion).     pus  doubulle  pe  figwre  of  1,  pat  wel  be  2.  do 


20  Tin    Craft  of  Multiplication. 

away  bat  1  &  sett  bere  2,  ben  doubul  be  next  figur<  afore,  the  quych 
is  2,  &  bat  wel  be  4  ;  do  away  2  &  set  ber<  I.  ben  doubul  be  cifer, 
&  bat  wel  be  11031,  for  a  0  is  imjt.  .And  twyes  no^t  is  but  no$t. 
berefore  doubul  the  merke  aboue  be  cifers  hede,  be  quych  be-  -1 
tokenes  be  haluewdel  of  1,  &  bat  schal  be  1.  do  away  be  cifei  & 
|>e  merke,  &  sett  Ipere  1,  &  ben  bou  schalt  haue  bis  nombur  241. 

And  bis  same  nombur  Jvai  haddyst  afore  or  bou  began  to  1 ly,  & 

The  fourth     yf  b-/u  take  sode  liede.     H  Tbe  next  ensampul  bat  bad  in  be  4  ease    8 

example.  '  ' 

of  mediacion)  was  bis  4G78.     AVlian  bou  bast  truly  ymedit  alle  bis 
nombur  fro  be  begynnynge  to  be  endynge,  bou  schalt  haue  of  be 

mediacion)  bis  nombur  2334.     Now  doubul  this  nombur  &  begyn 
in  belyft  side,  &  doubulle  2  bat  schal  be  1.  do  away  2  and  sette  bere  12 
4  ;   ben  doubule  3,  b^t  wol  be  6  ;   do  away  3  &  sett  \>pre  G,  ben 
1  leaf  1525.   doubul  bat  o}w  3,  &  bat  wel  be  G  ;  do  away  3  &  set  \ere  1G,  ben 
doubul  be  4,  bat  welle  be  8;  ben  doubul  5.  be  quych  stondes  oue?" 
be  lied  of  4,  &  bat  wol  be  10;  east  10  to  8,  &  J>«t  schal  be  18;  do  16 
away  4  &  bat  5,  &  set!  pere  8,  &  sett  that  1,  be  quych  is  an  articul 
of  be  Composit  J?e  quych  is  18,  ouer  be  next  figures  bed  toward  be 
lyft  side,  be  qnych  is  G.     drav  bat  1  to  6,  be  quych  1  in  be  dravyng 
schal  be  rekente  bot  for  1,  &  bat  1  &  bat  G  togedur  wel  be  7.     do  20 
away  bat  G  &  bat  1.  the  quych  stondes  oiu  /•  his  hede,  &  setl  ther  7, 
&  ben  bim  schalt  haue  bis  nombur  1678.     And  bis  same  nombur 
bou  hadyst  or  Jjou  began  to  medye,  as  bou  mayst  see  in  be  secunde 
ThenWi       Ensampul  bat  bou  had  in  be  4  case  of  mediacion),  bat  was  bis :  when  24 

example.  '        '       >  >  '  •  * 

bou  had  niediet  truly  alle  the  nombur,  a  pn'ncipio  usque  ad  finem. 

5 
bou  schalt  haue  of  bat  mediacion)  bis  nombur  102.     Now  doubul 

1.  bat  wel  be  2.  do  away  1  &  sett  here  2.  ben  doubul  0.  bat  will  be 

nojt.     berefore  take  be  5,  be  quych  stondes  oue>"  be  nexi  figures  28 

hed,  &  doubul  it,  &  bat  wol  be   1<».     do  away  be  0  bat  stondes 

betwene  be  two  figwr/s,  A  sette  bere  in  his  stid  1,  for  bal    1   now 

schal  stonde  in  be  secunde  place,  where  he  schal  betoken  10;  ben 

ieafi5Sa.  doubul  2,  bat  wol  lie  I.  do  away  2  &  set!  bere  1.  A'  -bou  schal  haue  32 

bus  nombur  214.      bis  is  be  sane'  nuwibur  bat    bou   hadyst    or  b<<u 

began  to  medye,  as  bou  may  see.     And  so  do  eue?"  mor< .  yf  bou  wil 

knowe  wheber  bou  base  wel  ymedyi  or  no.     '.  doubull<  be  nuwbur 

J1, it  conies  aft'/'  be  mediaciouii),  &  bon  schal  haue  be  same  nombur  36 

bal   Jjou  hadyst  or  Jjou  began  to  medye,  yf  bou  haue  welle  ydo.  or 

els  doute  be  no?t,  but  yf  Jjou  haue  be  same,  bou  base  faylide  in  b/ 

Craft.  „.,,.,..  ,„ 

Sequitur  de  multiphcatione.  40 


To  write  down  a  Multiplication  Sum.  21 


Si  tu  per  num'vui/)  namerum  vis  ni/dtiplicar- 
.    ! 


►O  Scribe  duas  qua&cunque  velis  series  muneroium 
Ordo  servetur  vt  vltima  ni«ltiplicandi 
4  Ponat'//  sup-/  ant>/iorem  multiplicantts 

A  leua  reliq'/e  sint  scripte  ni/dtiplicantes. 
If  Here  be-gynnes  pe  Chapt?'e  of  multiplication),  in  be  quych  Four  things 
p<>\\  most  know  -1  thynges.     If  Ffirst,  qwat  is  multiplicacion).     The  of Haitlpiica- 
8  secunde,  how  mony  cases  may  hap  in  multiplicacion).     The  thryde, 
how  mony  rewes  of  figures  fere  most  he.     IF  The  4.  what  is  pe 
profet  of  pis  craft.     1F  As  for  pe  first,  pou  schal  vnderstonde  ]>at  the  firsts 
multiplication)  is  a  bryngynge  to-geder  of  2  thynges  in  on  nombur, 

12  pa  quych  on  nombur  coutynes  so  mony  tymes  on,  howe   hnony   iieafi53&. 
tymes  pere  ben  vnytees  in  pe  nowmbre  of  }>at  2,  as  twyes  4  is  8. 
now  here  ben  pe   2   nombe?'s,  of  Jje   quych  too   nowmbres  on  is 
betokened  be  an  aduerbc,  pe  quych  is  pe  worde  twyes,  iV;  his  worde 

1G  thryes,  &  f»is  worde  foure  sythes,2  &  so  furth  of  such  other  lyke 
wordes.  H  And  tweyn  nombres  schal  he  tokenyde  he  a  nowne,  as 
fis  worde  foure  showys  j>es  tweyn)  nombres  y-broth  in-to  on  hole 
nombur,  Jiat  is  8,  for  twyes  4  is  8,  as  pou  wost  wel.     IT  And  J>es 

20  nombre  8  conteynes  as  "ft  tymes  4  as  pere  ben  vnites  in  pat  other 
nombre,  be  quych  is  2,  for  in  2  ben  2  vnites,  &  so  oft  tymes  4  ben 
in  8,  as  J>ou  wottys  wel.     H  ffor  J>e  secuude,  pm\  most  know  bat  Jv.m  the  second: 
most  haue  t«.«»  rewes  of  figures.     II  As  for  pe  thryde,  Jjou  most  know  the  third: 

24  pat  8  mane/1  of  diuerse  case  may  happe  in  J?is  craft.     The  p/v/fet  of 

j>is  Craft  is  to  telle  when  a  nomb?'e  is  multiplyed  be  a  nojje?*,  qwat  the  fourth, 
cowimys  p^re  of.     r\  fforthermore,  as  to  pe  sentence  of  oure  verse, 
yf  Jj^u  wel  multiply  a  nombur  be  a-nofe?1  nombur,  Jwu  schalt  write 

28  3n  rewe  of  figures  of  what  noniburs  so  euer  pow  welt,  &  jjat  schal  be  3  leafista. 
called  Numerus  multiplicands,  Anglice,  pe  nonibur  the  quych  to  The  muitipH- 
be  multiplied,     fen  Jjou  schall  write  a-nother  rewe  of  figures,  by  pe 
quych  pou  schalt  rnultiplie  the  nombre  pat  is  to  be  multiplied,  of  pe 

32  quych  nombur  p<-  furst  figure  schal  be  write  vnder  pe  last  figure  of 
pe  nombur,  pe  quych  is  to  be  multiplied.     And  so  write  forthe 
toward  pe  lyft  side,  as  here  you  may  se,  j~      67324~l     And  bis  one  Howtoset 
nombur  schalh    be  called  nu??ierus  m/dti- ! \  plicans.    Aug'- sum!' 

36  Nee,  pe  nombur  multipliynge,  for  he  schalle  multiply  pe  hyer  noun- 
bur,  as  Jjus  one  tyme  6.  And  so  forth,  as  I  schal  telle  the  afterwarde. 
And  Jjou  schal  begyn  in  pe  lyft  side.  U  ffor-Jjere-niore  )>ou  schalt 
vndurstonde  pat  pere  is  two  manurs  of  multiplicacion);  one  ys  of  Muitipiiea- 

40  be  wyrchynge  of  pe  boke  only  in  pe  mynde  of  a  mon.     fyrst  he  mentally, 
-  A  iter  'sythes'  insert  '&  |)is  wordes  fyne  sithe  &  sex  sythes.' 


22  The  Craft  of  Multiplication. 

and  on  paper,  teches  of  be  fyrst  man'/'  of  duplacion),  be 'quych  is  be  wyrchynge 
of  tabids.  Afterwarde  he  wol  beche  on  be  secunde  maner.  vnde 
versus. 

In  digitus  cures  digitus  si  ducere  ma/or  4 

i  ieafX5*6.  aP//'  qua//tu///  distat  a  denis  respice  debes 

IT  Namq//'  suo  decuplo  totiens  deler-  mi//ore//> 
Sitq//'  tibi  numerus  veniens  exinde  patebit. 
Howto  H  Here  he  teches  a  rewle,  how  pnw  schalt  fynde  J1''  nounbre  bat    8 

digits.  conies  by  be  multiplication)  of  a  digit  be  anober.     loke  how  mony 

[vny]tes  ben.  bytwene  be  more  digit  and  10.     And  reken  ten  for  on 
vnite.     And  so  oft  do  away  be   lasse  nounbre  out  of   his  owne 
subtract tiie  decuple,  bal  is  to  say,  fro  Jjat  nounbre  bat  is  ten  tymes  so  mych  is  12 
Tun;  be  nounbre  pat  comes  of  be  multiplication).  As  yf  bou  wol  multiply 

2  be  4.     loke  how  mony  vnitees  ben  by-twene  be  quych  is  be  more 
nounbre,  &  be-twene  ten.     Certen  bere  wel  be  vj  vnitees  by-twene  4 
take  the  less    &  tin.     yf  b<m  ivkni  pere  with  be  ten  be  vnite,  as  bou  may  se.  so  16 
tiraesfrom     mony  tymes  take  2.  out  of  his  decuple,  be  quych  is  20.  for  20  is  be 
itself.  decuple  of  2,  10  is  be  decuple  of  1 ,  30  is  be  decuple  of  3,   t0,  is  be 

decuple  of  4,  And  be  ober  digetes  til  bou  come  to  ten  ;  &  whan  b<>n 
Example.       hast  y-take  so  mony  tymes  2  out  of  twenty,  be  quych  is  sex  tymes,  20 
bou  schal  leue  8  as  bou  wost  wel,  for  G  times  2  is  twelue.     take 
1 1 12  ont  of  twenty,  &  pere  schal  leue  8.     hot  yf  bothe  be  digettes 
»ieafi55o.   '-'hen  y-lyech  mych  as  here,  l'l'2  or  too  tymes  twenty,  ben  it  is  no 

fors  quych.  of  hem  tweyn  bou  take  out  of  here  decuple,  als  mony  24 
Better  use      tymes  as  pat  is  fro  10.     hut  neuer-be-lesse,  yf  bou  haue  has!   to 
though.         worch,  bou  schalt  haue  her<   a  tabu!  of  figures,  wher<  by  bou  schall 
se  a  nonn)  ryght  what  is  be  nounbre  bat  comes  of  be  multiplication) 
of  2  digittes.     bus  bou  schalt  worch  in  bis  BgMre.  28 

1| 


2| 

1 

3| 

6 

9 

8 

12  16 

5 

10 

15  20|25 

1 

6 

12 1 

18  24|30 

|36 

7,1! 

2]  |28  35  12  19 

8  L6 

24   32  10  i-  56  Q4 

i 

9  18 

27  36  !.'•  54 

81 1 

1|  2| 

3   l  5  6  ,   3 

9 

Howtouseit.  yf  be  figure,  jv  quych  schalL  be  multiplied,  be  euen<  as  mych  as  be  29 
diget  be,  be  quych  bat  ober  figure  schal  be  uiultiplied,  as  two  tymes 
twa\  n1,  <>r  thre  tymes  3.  or  sj  ch  other,  loke  qwer<  bat  figure  sittes  in 


To  multiply  one  Digit  by  another.  23 

be  lyft  side  of  be  Wangle,  &  loke  qwere  be  diget  sittes  in  be  neper  The  way  to 
most  rewe  of  be  triangle.     cV  go  fro  hvm  vpwarde  in  be  same  rewe,  tipiication 

table. 

be  quycn  rewe  gose  vpwarde  til  bou  come  agaynes  be  oJ>er  digette  bat 

4  sittes  in  be  lyft  side  of  be  tro'angle.     And  bat  nounbre,  be  quych  bou 

fyn1des  bere  is  be  nounbre  bat  comes  of  the  multiplication)  of  be  2   '  leafisst. 

digittes,  as  yf  bun  wold  wete  qwat  is  2  tymes  2.     loke  quere  sittes 

2  in  be  lyft  side  in  be  first  rewe,  he  sittes  next  1  in  be  lyft  side  al 

8  on  hye,  as  b<m  may  se  ;  be[w]  loke  qwere  sittes  2  in  be  lowyst  rewe 

of  be  troangle,  &  go  fro  hym  vpwarde  in  be  same  rewe  tylle  bun 

come  a-^enenes  2  in  be  hyer  place,  &  ber  bou  schalt  fynd  ywrite  ^, 

&  bat  is  be  nounbre  bat  comes  of  be  multiplication)  of  two  tymes 

12  tweyn  is  4,  as  bow  wotest  welle.     yf  be  diget.  the  quych  is  mwlti- 

plied,  he  more  ban  be  ob^/1,  bon  schalt  loke  qwere   be  more  diget 

sittes  in  be  lowest  rewe  of  be  triangle,  &  go  vpwarde  in  be  same 

rewe  tyl2  bou  come  a-nendes  be  lasse  diget  in  the  lyft  side.     And 

16  fere  bou  schalt  fynde  be  nombre  bat  comes  of  be  multiplication); 

hut  bou  schalt  vnderstonde  bat  bis  rewle,  be  quych  is  in  bis  verse. 

IT  In  digitum  cures,  &c,  nober  bis  tn'angle  schalle  not  serue,  hot  to 

fynde  be  nounhres  Jvvt  comes  of  the  multiplication)  bat  comes  of  2 

20  articuls  or  composites,  be  nedes  no  craft  but  yf  bou  wolt  multiply 

in  bi  mynde.     And  -bere-to  bou  schalt  haue  a  craft  aftenvarde,  for  3  icafi56«. 
bou  schall  wyrch  with  digettes  in  be  tables,  as  bou  schalt  know 
afterwarde.     versus. 
24  H  Postea  p/</cedas  postrema///  multiplicand© 

[Recte  multiplicans  per  cu^ctas  i^feriores] 
Condic/onem  tamen  tali  quod  multiplicand* 
Scribas  in  capite  quicq>//d  p/<<cesserit  inde 
28  Sed  postq«c</;^  fuit  hec  m^ltiplicate  figure 

Anteriorent///'  serei  m>dtiplica?<t/>- 
Et  sic  m/dtiplica  velut  isti  ni/dtiplicasti 
Qui  sequit/o-  RumenLm  sc//ptu//<  quiscu/<q«<  figur/s. 
32        "  Here  he  teches  how  b<m  schalt  wyrch  in  bis  craft,     bou  schalt  n°wto 

7-iiii,-  ri  1  •>  .  multiply  one 

niwmplye  be  last  ngure  <>t  be  nombre,  and  quen  b-u  hast  so  vdo  bou  number  by 

*  another. 

schalt  draw  alle  be  figures  of  be  neb'/-  nounbre  more  taward  be  rot 
side,  so  qwen  bou  hast  umltiplyed  be  last  figure  of  be  heyer  nounbre 
36  by  alle  be  neber  figures.  And  sette  be  nounbir  bat  conies  fer-of  oner  Multiply  the 
be  last  figure  of  be  nefer  nounbre,  &  ben  bou  schalt  sette  al  be  ojje?*  oftbe l.fgher 
figures  of  be  nej>er  nounbre  hum-'/  nere  to  be  ryjt  side.    «:  And  whan  oftiwiowM 
bou  hast  multiplied  bat  figure  bat  schal  be  multiplied  be  next  after 
2  't'l'  marked  for  erasure  before  '  tyl'  in  JIS. 


Tlit-n  antery 
the  lower 


24  The  Craft  of  Multiplication. 

hym  by  al  be  neper  figures.  And  worch  as  bou  dyddyst  afore  til 
i  leaf  1566.  1boa  come  to  be  ende.  And  bou  sclialt  vnderstonde  bat  euery 
set  thean-     ficmre  of  be  hicr  nounbre  schal  be  multiplied  be  alle  be  figures  of  the 

swer  over  the     or  i  r        o 

first  of  the      neber  nounbre,  yf  be  hier  nounbre  be  any  figure  ben  one.     lo  an    4 
Ensampul  here  folowynge.  j"    2465  j.    bou  schalt  begyne  to  lmdtiplye 

in  be  lyft  side.     Multiply  L2!2. !  2  he  2,  and  twyes  2  is  4.    set  4 

then  mniti-     ouer  be  bed  of  brtt  2,  ben  nmltiplie  be  same  hier  2  by  3  of  be  nether 
of  the  lower,    nounbre,  as  thryes  2  pat  schal  he  G.     set  G  ouer  be  hed  of  3,  ban    s 
mwltiplie  be  same  hier  2  by  bat  2  be  quych  stondes  vnder  hym,  bat 
wol  be  4  ;  do  away  be  hier  2  &  sette  be?*e  4.     II  Now  bou  most 
antery  be  nether  nounbre,  bat  is  to  say,  b'<u  most  sett  be  neb'/1 
nounbre  more  towarde  be  ry$t  side,  as  bus.    Take  be  neb'-/-  2  toward  12 
be   ryjt  side,   &    sette   it   eueu)   Viuh/-   be    1    of   be   liver  nounbre,   & 
antery  alle  be  figures  bat  comes  after  bat  2,  as  bus;  sette  2  vnder  be 
4.     ben  sett  be  figure  of  3  bere  bat  be  figure  of  2  stode,  be  quych 
is  now  vndur  \>nt  4  ill  be  hier  nounbre  ;  ben  sett  be  ober  figure  of  2,  16 
be  quych  is  be  last  figwe  toward  be  lyft  side  of  be  neb'/1  noudw  bere 
as  thus.        be  figure  of  3  stode.  ben  b<m  schalt  liaue  such  a  nombre  '  4G44t35 " 

*  kaiir,7<(.   -11  Now  multiply  1,  be  <piych  comes  next  after  G,  by  be  last  1    232 ! 

2  of  be  neber  nounbur  toward  be  lyft  side,  as  2  tymes  4,  bat  wel  be  20 
8.  sette  bat  8  ouer  be  figure  the  quych  stondes  ou<  r  }v  hede  of  bat 
2,  be  quych  is  be  last  figure  of  be  nebe?"  nounbre;  ban  multiplie  bat 
same  -1  by  3,  bat  comes  in  be  nebe?"  re  we,  bat  wol  be  12.  sette  be 
digit  of  be  composyt  ouer  be  figure  be  quych  stondes  one/'  be  hed  of  24 
bat  3,  &  sette  J>e  articule  of  bis  co//qiosit  ouer  al  be  figures  bat 
Nowmulti-  stondes  ouer  be  neber  2  hede.  ben  nmltiplie  be  same  4  by  be  2  in 
h\si  but  one    be  n^t  side  in  b.e  neber  nounbur,  bat  wol  be  8.     do  away  4.  &  sette 

bere  8.     Euer  more  qwen  b'<u  multiplies  be  bier  figure  by  bat  figur<  28 
be  quych  stondes  vnder  hym,  bou  schalt  do  away  bat  hier  figure,  & 
sett  ber  bat  nounbre  be  quych  comes  of  imdtiplicacion)  of  ylke 
digittes.     Whan  bou  hast  done  as  1  haue  byde  be,  b"ii  schalt  haue 
astini  .        suych  an  order of  figure  as  is  here,  i~  >2  j.   ben  take  and  antery  32 

bi  neber  figures.    And  sett  be  fyrst  I  4*>48[65]  j    figure   of    be    neber 

figures ::   vndre    be    figure   of    G.  ' '  U  And   draw   al   be 

*leafi57&.    ober  figure-,  of  be  suae  lvwe  to  hyni-warde,  'as  b>ai  diddyst  albre. 

ben  mttltiplye  G  be   2,  &  sett  bat  be  quych  comes  oue?"  bm'-of  36 
OUer  al  J)e  ober  figures  hi'des  bat  stondes  ouer  bat   2.      ben  m/dti- 
ply   6    be   •">,   &   sett   alle   bat   comes   ber<  of   vpon   alle   be  figures 
hedes  bat  standes  oner  bal   ."> :    ba«  multiplye  6  be  2,  be  quych 
J  Here  'of  I  •   ame  rew  '  is  marked  for  erasure  in  MS. 


To  multiply  one  Composite  hy  another.  25 

stondes  vnder  fat  G,  fen  do  away  G  &  write  fere  fe  digitt  of 
fe  composit  fat  schal  come  fereof,  &  sette  fe  articull  ouer  alle 
jje  figures  fat  stondes  out/-  fie  hede  of  fat  3  as  heir,  fen  j    n       j 
4  antery  fi  figures   as  fou  diddyst  afore,  and  niwltipli  5|    J2*     j  Antery  the 

|     828        |  figures  again, 

be  2,  fat  wol  be  10;  -sett  fe  0  ouer  all  fe  figures  fat  |  464825  |  *|,d multiply 

stonden  oner  fat  2,  &  sett  fat  1.  ouer  the  next  figures  | 232    1 

hedes,  alle  on  hye  towarde  fe  lyft  side,  fen  midtiplye  5  he  3.  fat 
8  wol  he  15,  write  5  ouer  fe  figures  hedes  fat  stonden  ouer  fat  3,  & 
sett  fat  1  ouer  fe  next  figures  hedes  toward  fe  lyft  side,  fen 
umltiplye  5  he  2,  fat  wol  he  10.  do  away  fat  5  &  sett  fere  a  0, 
&  sett  fat  1   ouer  fe  figures  hedes  fat  stonden  ouer  3.  And  feu 

12  fou  schalt  haue  such  a  nounhre  as  here  stondes  aftur.  1f     11     j  Ueafisso. 
11  Now  draw  alle  fese  figures  downe  togeder  as  fus,  G.8. 1.  |    j*01    i 
&  1  draw  to-gedur;    fat  wolle  he  10,  do  away  alle  fese  j    82820  I 
figures  saue  G.     lat  hyni  stonde,  for  fow  fou  take  hym  i  464Li;)  I 

16  away  fou  most  wiite  fer  fe  same   a^ene.     ferefore  late  ' — — ' 

hym  stonde,  &  sett  1  ouer  fe  figure  hede  of  4  toward  fe  lyft  side  ;  Then  add  nil 

t  lit*  figures 

fen  draw  on  to  4,  fat  wolle  he  5.     do  away  fat  4  A;  fat  1,  it  sette  above  the 
fere  5.     fen  draw  4221  it  1  togedwr,  fat  wol  be  10.     do  away  alle 

20  fat,  <t  write  fere  fat  4  &  fat  0,  &  sett  fat  1  ouer  fe  next  figures 
hede  toward  fe  lyft  side,  fe  quych  is  G.  fen  draw  fat  G  it  fat  1 
togedur,  <t  fat  wolle  he  7  ;  do  away  G  &  sett  fere  7,  fen  draw  8810 
&  1,  A:  fat  wel  he  18;  do  away  alle  fe  figures  fat  stondes  oner  fe 

24  hede  of  fat  8,  &  lette  8  stonde  stil,  it  write  fat  1  ouer  fe  next 
figttm  hede,  fe  quych  is  a  0.  fen  do  away  fat  0,  &  sett  fere  1,  fe 
quych  stondes  ouer  fe  0.  hede.  fen  draw  2,  5,  it  1  togedwr,  fat 
wolle  he  8.     fen  do  away  alle  fat,  it  write  fere  8.     11  And  fen  fou  and  you  will 

28  schalt  haue  fis  nouuhre,  571880.  answer. 

-1f  Sed  cu///  m/dtiplicabis,  pr/mo  sic  est  operandi!///,  "  leanssa. 

Si  dabit  articulu//^  tibi  m^ltiplicacio  solu//> ; 
P/'oposita  cifra  su///ma//>  tronsferre  memento. 

32        11  Here  he  puttes  fe  fyrst  case  of  fis  craft,  fe  quych  is  f  is  :  What  to  do 

yf   fere   come   an   articulle  of   be  nmltiplicacion)  ysette  before  the  multipiica- 
.      ,.     .      ,      ,    „       ..  ,  ,  tion  results 

articulle  in  fe  Jylt  side  as  fus  |    51  ;.  multiplye  5  by  2,  fat  wol  he  in  an  article. 

10;  sette  ouer  f e  hede  of  fat  2  !  23  !  a  0,  it  sett  fat  on,  fat  is  fe 
3G  articul,  in   fe    lyft  side,   fat   is   next   hym,  fen   fou    schalt    haue 

fis  nounhre  fio5l~l     U  And  fen  worch  forth  as  fou  diddist  afore. 

Ami     fou     j    23    !  schalt  vnderstonde  fat  fou  schalt  write  no  0. 

hut  whan  fat  place  where  foil  schal  write  fat  0  has  no  figure  afore 
40  hym  nofer  after,     versus. 


20  The  Cm/I  of  Multiplication. 

IT  Si  aut< vm  digitus  excreuerit  articvlusque. 
Articul//.-.1  svprajiosito  dig-ito  salit  vltra. 
what toa..  IT  II  en-  is  be  secunde  case,  be  quych  is  bis:  yf  hit  happe  but 

if  the  result  r  ,  ,.    .  ,      .      ,        /  , 

is  a  composite  bere  come  a  comnosyt,  buu  sehalt  write  be  digitte  ouer  be  hede  01  be    4 
number.  r  f     J  >  r  ,.,.?.„  i 

neper  figure  by  be  quych  bou  multipliest  be  hier  figure;  and  sett  be 
articulle  next  liym  toward  be  lyft  side,  as  bou  diddyst  afore,  as  pus 
j~~83~j.     Multiply  8  by  8,  bat  wol  be  64.     Write  be  4  ouer  8,  bat  is 

2  ieafi59o.   [Jjp_ j  to  say,  ouer  be  liede  of  be  neb'/'  S;  &  set  G,  be  quych  2is  an     8 

articul,  next  after.     And  ben  bou  sehalt  haue  such  a  nounbre  as  is 

here,  j^(MS3:1~j,  And  ben  worch  forth. 

183     J 

11  Si  digitus  tarae?2  ponas  ipx//m  super  ip.vam.  12 

whatifit  11  Here  is  be  thryde  ease,  be  quych  is  jus :  yf  hit  happe  bat  of  bi 

mwltiplicacioun)  come  a  digit,  buu  sehalt  write  be  digit  ouer  be  hede 
of  be  neber  figure,  by  the  quych  bmi  multipliest  be  hieri  figure,  for 
bis  nedes  no  Ensampul.  16 

•i  Subdita  m^/ltiplica  non  hanc  que  [incidit]  illi 
Delet  earn  penitws  scribens  quod  pruuenit  inde. 
ihefourth  *    Here  is  be  1  case,  be  quych  is:  yf  hit  be  bappe  bat  be  neper 

ca t  the  '  " 

w-aft.  fig\ire  schal  multiplye  bat  figure,  be  quych  stondes  ouer  pat  hgures  £\) 

hede,  bou  schal  do  away  be  hier  figure  &  sett  bere  bat  pat  comys  of 
b//t  multiplication).  As  yf  pere  come  of  bat  niztltiplicaciori)  an 
articuls  buu  schalt  write  bere  be  hier  figure  stode  a  0.  H  And 
write  be  articuls  in  be  lyft  side,  yf  bat  hit  be  a  digit  write  pere  a  24 
digit,  yf  pat  hit 'be  a  composit,  write  be  digii  of  be  composit.  And 
be  articul  in  be  lyft  side,  al  bis  is  lyjt  y-nowjt,  pere-fore  per  nedes 
no  Ensampul. 

11  Sed  si  m//ltiplicat  alia///  ponas  sup-  r  ipsam  28 

Adiu//ges  nunv/U///  que///  p/>bet  duct//*  ear/////. 
*  leaf  1596.         «1  Here  is  pe  5  case,  pe  quych  is  pis  :  yf  4be  neber  figure  schul 
Jfthecraft!86  nw/ltinlie  be  hier,  and   bat  hier  figure   is  not   recto   otier  his   hede. 

And  pal  neber  figun  base  oper  figures,  or  on  figure  ouer  his  hede  by  32 
multiplication),  bal  hase  be  afore,  pou  sehalt  write  pat  nounbre,  be 
quych  comes  of  pat,  ouer  all*  pe  ylko  figures  hedes,  as  pus  here : 
j  2361  Multiply  2  1>\  2,  pal  wol  be  I  ;  sel  I  ouer  pe  hede  of  pal  2. 
j  234  1  ben6  multiplies  be  hier  2  by  pe  nepe?-  .">.  bat  vvol  be  G.  sel  36 
ouer  his  hede  6,  multiplie  pe  hier  2  by  pe  ne]>er  1,  pal  wol  be  8. 
do  away  pe  hier  2,  pe  quych  stondes  ouer  pe  hede  <>f  be  figure  of  4, 

1   'sed'  deleted  in  MS.  6883  in  Ms. 

5  '|>eu'  overwritten  on  '  bat'  marked  for  erasure. 


The  Cases  of  this  Craft.  27 

and  set  pere  8.    And  fou  schalt  haue  fis  nounbre  here  f4683G~i.     And 

antery  f  i  figures,  fat  is  to  say,  set  pi  neper  4  vnder  f  e  [_?_ !  hier  •'!, 

and  set  fi  2  other  figures  nere  liym,  so  fat  J>e  nefer  2  stonde  vndwr 
4  fe  hier  6,  fe  quych  6  stondes  in  \>e  lyft  side.  And  pat  3  fat  stondes 
vndur  8,  as  fus  aftur  je  may  se,  !~46836~j  Now  worch  forthermore, 
And  nmltiplye  fat  hier  3  by  2,  |  234  !  fat  wol  he  G,  set  f'd  G  fe 
quych  stondes  ouer  fe  hede  of  fat  2,  And  fen  worch  as  I  tajt  fe 
8  afore. 

JH  Si  suprnposita  cifra  debet  m/dtiplicare  >  ieai  woo. 

Prorsus  ea///  deles  &  ibi  scribi  cifra  debet. 
11  Here  is  fe  G  case,  fe  quych  is  fis  :  yf  hit  happe  fat  fe  figure  ruesixtiicase 
12  by  fe  quych  fou  schal  rawltiplye  fe  hier  figure,  fe  quych  stondes 
ryght  ouer  hym  by  a  0,  fou  schalt  do  away  fat  figure,  fe  quych 
oner  fat  cifre  hede.      11  And  write  fere  fat  nounhre  fat  conies  of 
fe  niwltiplicaciori)  as  fus,  23.  do  away  2  and  sett  fere  a  0.     vntZe 
]  6  versus. 

11  Si  cifra  m/dtiplicat  alia///  posita///  sup/ ir  ip.-am 
Sitq//''  locus  supra  vacuus  super  banc  cifra///  fiet. 
H  Here  is  fe  7  case,  fe  quych  is  fis:  yf  a  0  schal  mzdtiply  a  The  seventh 
20  figure,   fe   quych   stondes    not   recte  ouer   hym.     And  ouer   fat   0  craft, 
stonde  no  thyng,  fou  schalt  write  oner  fat  0  anofer  0  as  fus  :  j~    24~j 

multiplye  2  be  a  0,  it  wol  be  nothynge.  write  fere  a  0  ouer  be  1 I 

hede  of  fe  neber  0,  And  fen  worch  forth  til  fou  come  to  fe  ende. 
24  H  Si  sup/a-  fuerit  cifra  semper  est  p/ete/eunda. 

H  Here  is  fe  8  case,  fe  quych  is  fis  :  yf  fere  be  a  0  or  niony  Theeighth 
cifers  in  fe  hier  rewe,  fou  schalt  not  mwltiplie  hem,  hot  let  hem  craft, 
stonde.     And  antery  fe  figures  benefe  to  fe  next  figure  sygnificatyf 
28  as  f us :  roo032~l   Ouer-lepe  alle  fese  cifers  &  sett  fat  3nefer  2  fat  Meafi6o&. 

stondes  !_^ '  toward  fe  ryght  side,  and  sett  hym  vndwr  fe  3, 

and  sett  fe  ofer  nether  2  nere  hym,  so  fat  he  stonde  vndwr  fe 
thrydde  0,  f<-  quych  stondes  next  3.    And  fan  worch.    vnde  versus. 
32  H  Si  dubites,  an  sit  bene  m/dtiplicac/o  facta, 

Diuicle  totalem  wimernm  p'v  multiplicante///. 
H  Here  he  teches  how  fou  schalt  know  whefer  fou  base  wel  I-  Kowtoprova 

aii  lii-iii  l''1'  multipli- 

du  or  no.     And  he  says  fat  fou  schalt  delude  alle  fe  nounbre  fat  cation. 
36  comes  of  fe  nmltiplicacion)  by  fe  nefer  figures.    And  fen  fou  schalt 
haue  fe  same  nounbur  fat  fou  hadyst  in  fe  begynnynge.     hut  }et 
fou  hast  not  fe  craft  of  dyuision),  hut  fou  schalt  haue  hit  after- 
wards. 

-  '  Supra  '  inserted  in  MS.  in  place  of '  cifra  '  marked  for  erasure. 


28  The  Craft  of  Multiplication. 

U  Per  numerum  si  vis  nwnemm  q>/oq^"  m>/ltiplicare 
U  Tcottxm.  per  normas  subtiles  absq<7<  figuris 
Has  normas  pot>ris  p<  r  versus  sciiv  sequentes. 
Mental  imiiii-        1i  Here  he  teches  be  to  mwltiplie  be  bowat  figures  in  bi  niynde.    4 

plication.  r  ..,',,  r 

And  be  sentence  of  bis  verse  is  bis  :  yf  pon  wel  mzutrpke  on  nounbre 
by  anober  in  bi  mynde,  bou  schal  haue  bereto  rewles  in  be  verses 
bat  schal  come  after. 

U  Si  tu  per  digitus  digitus  vis  mwltiplicare  8 

Re<//ifa  p/vcedens  dat  quality  est  operandi!.///. 
Digit  by  digit        H  Here  he  teches  a  rewle  as  bou  hast  afore  to  mwltiplie  a  digit 

is  eaej'.  '  l 

'  leaf leia.   ^c  anober,  as  yf  bou  wolde  wete  qwat  is  sex  tymes  C>.     bon  lschalt 

wete  by  be  rewle  bat  I  ta$t  be  before,  yf  bou  haue  mynde  berof.         12 
U  Articulii///  si  per  reliquu///  reliquu///  vis  multiplicare 

In  propriu///  digitii///  debet  vterque  resolui. 
H  Articul//*  digitos  post  se  m//ltiplicantes 
Ex  digitus  quociens  retenerit  multijAicaxi  1 G 

Artieuli  faciu//t  tot  centu///  m//ltiplieati. 
Thefiretcase        H  Here  he;  teches  be  furst  rewle,  be  quych  is  bis :  vf  bon  \wl 

of  the  craft.  .  .  r  '       *  *  . 

mwltiplie  an  articul  be  anober,  so  bat  both  be  articuls  bene  v/itJi- 
Inne  an  hundreth,  bus  Jwu  schalt  do.     take  be  digit  of  bothe  the  20 
Article  by      articuls,  for  euery  articul  base  a  digit,  ben  nmltiplye  bat  on  digit  by 

article;  ,  r  .  l    J      '  °         J 

bat  ober,  and  loke  how  niony  vnytes  hen  in  be  nounbre  bat  comes 
of  be  umltiplicacion)  of  be  2  digittes,  &  so  mony  bundrytbes  ben  in 
be  nounbre  bat  schal  come  of  be  mwltiplicacion)  of  be  ylke  2  articuls  _  I 

anexampie:  as  bus.  yf  bou  wold  wete  qwat  is  ten  tymes  ten.  take  be  digit  of 
ten,  be  quych  is  1  ;  take  be  digit  <>f  bat  ober  ten,  be  quych  is  on. 
H  Also  mwltipfie  1  be  1,  as  on  tyme  on  bat  is  but  1.  In  on  is  bul 
on  vnite  as  bou  wost  welle,  berefort    ten  tymes  ten  is  but  a  hun-  2s 

anotherex-  di'yth.  1!  Also  yf  bou  wold  wete  what  is  twenty  tymes  30.  take  be 
digit  of  twenty,  bat  is  2:  >V  take  be  digitt  of  tbrytty,  bat  is  3. 
mwltiplie  3  be  2,  bat  is  6.     N"ow  in  t!  ben  6  vnites,  '   And  so  mony 

Motion,  hundrythes  hen  in  20  tymes  302,  berefore  20  tymes  .".()  is  6  hun- 32 
dryth  euen).  loke  »V  se.  •  Bui  yf  it  be  so  bat  on<  articul  be  wiih- 
Inne  an  hundryth,  or  by-twene  an  hundryth  and  a  thowsande,  so 
bat  it  be  not  a  bowsande  fully,  ben  loke  how  mony  vnytes  ben  in 
he  nounbur  bat  comys  of  be  mwltiplicaciori)  8And  so  monj  tymes3  36 
of  "_'  digittes  of  ylke  articuls,  so  mony  thowsant  hen  in  be  nounbre, 
the  qwycb  (Mines  of  }v  umltiplicacion).  And  so  monj  tymes  ten 
thowsand  schal  be  In  be  nounbre  bal  comes  of  be  multiplication  of 
y— 3  M  irked  for  erasure  in  .VS. 


//  w  to  work  subtly  without  Pigun  >.  29 

2  articuls,  as  yf  bou  wold  wete  qwat  is  4  hundryth  tymes  [two 
hundryth].  Multiply  4  be  2,1  bat  wol  he  8.  in  8  ben  8  vnites. 
IT  And  so  mony  tymes    ten    thousand   be   in    4    hundryth   tymes  Mental  mum- 

J      «'  plication. 

i  [2]1  hundryth,  b"t  is  80  thousand.     Take  hede,  I  schall  telle  be  a 
generalle  rewle  whan  bou  bast  2  articuls,  And  bou  wold  wete  qwat  Another  ex- 

o  /  >  A  ample. 

comes  of  be  mMltiplicacion)  of  hem  2.  nmltiplie  be  digit  of  bat  on 
articuls,  and  kepe  bat  nounhre,  ben  loke  how  mony  cifers  schuld  go 
8  before  bat  on  articuls,  and  be  were  write.  Als  mony  cifers  schuld 
go  before  bat  other,  &  he  were  write  of  cifers.  And  haue  alle  be 
ylke  cifers  togedur  in  bi  mynde,  2a-rowe  ychon)  aftur  other,  and  <ieafi62a. 
in  be  last  plase  set  be  nounbre  bat  comes  of  be  mwltiplicacion)  of  be 
12  2  digittes.  And  loke  in  bi  mynde  in  what  place  he  stondes,  where 
in  be  secundc,  or  in  be  thryd,  or  in  bo  4,  or  where  ellis,  and  Like 
qwat  be  figures  by-token  in  bat  place  ;  &  so  mych  is  be  nounbre  bat 
comes  of  be  2  articuls  y-mwltiplied  to-gedwr  as  bus:  vf  bou  wold  Another  ex- 

r  J  1  °  .    .  ample. 

16  wete  what  is  20  thousant  tymes  3  bowsande.  multiply  be  digit  of 
bal  articulle  be  quych  is  2  by  be  digitte  of  bat  ober  articul  be  quych 
is  3,  bat  wol  be  G.  ben  loke  how  mony  cifers  schal  go  to  20  thousant 
as  hit  schuld  be  write  in  a  tabul.     certainly  1  cifers  schuld  go  to 

20  20  bowsant.    ffor  bis  figure  2  in  be  fyrst  place  betokenes  twene. 

U  In  be  secunde  place  hit  betokenes  twenty.     r  In  be  3.  place  bit  Notation. 
betokenes  2  hundryth.      .r.  In  be  4  place  2  thousant.     1i  In  be  5 
place  lu't  betokenes  twenty  bousant.     b'/refore  he  most  bane  4  cifers 

24  a-fore  hym  bat  he  may  stowde  in  be  5  place,     kepe  bese  4  cifers  in 
'  thy  mynde,  ben  loke  bow  mony  cifers  gon)  to  3  thousant.     Certayn 
to  3  thousante  3gori)  .">  cifers   afore.     Now  cast  ylke  4  cifers  bat  3  ieafiG2&, 
schuld  go  to  twenty  thousant,  And  thes  3   cifers   bat   schuld   go 

28  afore  3  thousant,  &  settc  hem  in  rewe  ychon)  aft''/'  obey  in  bi 
mynde,  as  bai  schuld  stonde  in  a  tabulle.  And  ben  schal  bou  bane 
7  cifers;  ben  sett  bat  G  be  quych  comes  of  be  nittltiplicaciori)  of  be 
2  digittes  aftwi  be  ylke  cifers  in  be  8  place  as  yf  bat  hit  stode  in  a 

32  tabul.  And  loke  qwat  a  figure  of  G  schuld  betoken  in  be  8  place,  yf 
hit  were  in  a  tabul  &  so  mych  it  is.  A;  yf  bat  figure  of  6  stonde  in 
be  fyrst  place  he  schuld  betoken  but  6.  U  In  be  2  place  he  schuld 
betoken  sexty.     IT  In  the  •">  place  he  schuld  betoken)  sex  hundryth. 

3G  If  In  be  4  place  sex  thousant.     H  In   be  5  place  sexty  bowsant.  Notation 
H  In  be  sext  place  sex  hundryth  bowsant.     1F  In  be  7  place  sex 
bowsant  thousantes.     H  In  be  8   place  sexty  bowsant  thousantes. 
berfore  sett  G  in  octauo  loco,  And  he  schal  betoken  sexty  bowsant 

1  4  in  .MS. 


30  The  Graft  oj   Multiplication. 

Mentaimui-  thousantes.  And  so  mych  is  twenty  bowsant  tymes  •">  fcliousant, 
H  And  J^is  rewle  is  generalle  for  alle  man'/-  of  articuls,  Whethir 
bai  be  hnndryth  or  bowsant ;  but  bou  most  know  well  be  craft  of  be 
i  leafiesa.  wryrchynge  in  be  tabulle  lor  bou  know  to  do  bus  in  bi  mynde  4. 
aftur  bis  rewle.  Thou  most  bat  Jris  rewle  holdybe  note  but  wher< 
y>  n  ben  2  articuls  and  no  mo  of  be  quych  aytlier  of  hem  lmse  but 
on  figure  significatyf.  As  twenty  tymes  3  thousant  or  3  hundryth, 
and  such  opnr.  <S 

H  Articulum  digito  si  m//ltiplicaie  oportet 
Articuli  digit[i  sumi  quo  multiplicate] 
Debem//*  rsliquu///  quod  m/dtiplicat///-  ab  Wis 
Per  reliq//o  decuplu///  sic  summ&m  latere  neq"/b/t.  12 

The  third  H  Here  he  puttes  be  thryde  rewle,  be  quych  is  bis.     yf  bou  wel 

craft i  multiply  in  bi  mynde,  And  be  Articul  be  a  digitte,  bou  schalt  loke 

bat  be  digitt  be  \v«t/i-Inne  an  hundryth,  ben  bun  schalt  multiply  the 
digitt  of  be  Articulle  by  be  ober  digitte.     And  euery  vnite  in  }>e  16 
nounbre  bat  schalle  come  J?ere-of  schal  betoken  ten.     As  bus:  yf 
an  example,    bat  bou  wold  wete  qwat  is  twyes  to.    m?dtiplie  J?e  digitte  of  -10,  be 
quych  is  4,  by  be  ober  diget,  be  quych  is  2.  And   bat  wolle  be  8. 
And  in  be  nombre  of  8  ben  -s  vnites,  &  euery  of  pe  ylke  vnites  20 
schidd  stonde  for  10.     pen  fore  ber<   schal  be  8  tymes  1",  J>a1  wol 
lie  1  score.     And  so  mony  is  twyes  10.     *   If  be  articul  be  a  hun- 
dryth   or  ho    2  hundryth  And  a  bowsant,  so   bat  hit   be  notte  a 
-1  ieafi6S6.   thousant,  2worcb  as  poit  dyddyst  afore,  saue  bon  schali  rekene  euery  24 
vnite  for  a  hundryth. 

11  In  nu///'/U///  mixtu//'  digitus  si  ducer-  cures 
Articul"-  mixti  sum&tur  deinde  resoluas 
In  digitu///  post  fac  respectu  de  digitis 
Articul/  sq//<  docet  excrescens  in  diriuawdo 
In  digitu///  mixti  post  ducas  m?iltiplicarctew 
H  De  digitis  vt  norma1  (docet]  de  [hunc] 
Multiplica  simwl  et  sic  postea  summa  patebit.  32 

The  fourth  Here  he  puttes  be    I  rewle,  be  quycb  is  Jus :  yf  bun  niMltipliy 

CA96  of  t  llC 

crafi  on  composit  be  a  digit  as  <">  tjrmes  2  1.  lben  take  |>e  digcl  of  psA  com- 

posit,  &  multiply  bed  digitt  by  bai  ober  diget,  and  kepe  be  nombur 
bai  comes  pert  of.   ben  take  j)e  digil  of  bat  composii,  &  nu/ltiply  bat  36 
digit  by  anober  diget,  by  }>e  quych  bou  hast  mwltiplyed  be  diget  of 

Composite      be  art  icul ,  and  loke  qwal  comes  beri  of.     ben  take  bou  bat  uounbur, 

by  digil  '  ,  ,        '  '  .  ' 

\-  cast  hit  to  bat  other  nounbur  bai  pou  secheste  as  pus  yl  pou  wet 
:;  docet.  decel  MS.  '   '  I  times  1 '  in  MS  . 


How  to  multiply  without  Figures.  31 

wete  qwat  conies  of  6  tymes  4  &  twenty,     multiply  bat  articxillc  of  Mental mui- 

t    ■  /.  i  tiptication. 

pe  composit  by  pe  digit,  be  quych  is  6,  as  yn  be  thryd  rewle  b"ii 
■was  tau$t,  And  bat  schal  be  C>  score,  ben  multiply  be  diget  of  be 
4  composit,  Jpe  quych  is  4,  and  multiply  bat  by  pat  other  diget,  be  iieafi6ia. 
quycli  is  6,  as  bou  wast  tau^t  in  be  first  rewle,  yf  pou  haue  mynde 
berof,  &  pat  wol  be  4  &  twenty,  cast  all  ylke  nounburs  to-gecKr, 
&  hit  schal  lie  144.  And  so  mych  is  6  tymes  4  &  twenty. 
8  11  "Ductus  in  articulu///  nttmerws  si  compo&itus  sit 

Articuluw.  puru///  comites  articulu///  quoque 
Mixti  pro  digit/*  post  fiat  [et  articulus  vt] 
Norma  iubet  [retinendo  quod  extra  dicta  ab  illis] 
12  Articuli  digitus  post  tu  mixtii/^  digitus  due 

"ELegula  de  digitis  nee  p/<  cipit  articulwsqwe 
Ex  quib>/>'  exc/v  scens  su///me  tu  iunge  pn'ori 
Sic  ma/ifesta  cito  fiet  tibi  su///ma  petita. 
16         If  Here  he   puttes    be   5    rewle,  be  quych   is    bis:    yf  bou   vvel  The  fifth  case 

,, .    i  ,     ..       ,    ,  ..  ,    .    , .  .      ,  of  the  craft : 

multiply  an  Articul  be    a   com  posit,   niwltipne  bat  Articnl  by  be 
articul  of  pe  composit,  and  worch  as  bou  wos  tai^t  in  be  secunde 
rewle,  of  be  quych  rewle  pe  verse  begynnes  pus.     U  Articulu//?  si  Article  by 
20  pe;1  Relicuw  vis  mwltiplicare.     ben  multiply  pe  diget  of  pe  composit    omposi 
by  pat  op/V  articul  afl/V  pe  doctrine  of  pe  3  rewle.     take  Jvrof  gode 
hedc,  I  pray  pe  as  pus.     Yf  pou  wel  wete  what  is    24  tymes  ten. 
Multiplie  ten  by  20,  pat  wel  be  2  hundryth.     pen  multiply  pe  diget  Anexampie. 
24  of  pe  10,  pe  quych  is  1,  by  pe  diget  of  pe  composit,  pe  quych  is  4, 

&  pat  2wol  be  4.    pen  reken  euery  vnite  pat  is  in  4  for  10,  &  pat  Meafiei*. 
schal  be  40.    Cast  40  to  2  hundryth,  &  pat  wol  be  2  hundryth  &  40. 
And  so  mych  is  24  tymes  ten. 
28  «  Compositu///  nunvrii///  mixto  si[c]  m>dtiplicabis 

Vndecies  tredeci///  sic  est  ex  hiis  op'/andum 
In  reliquu///  jiHmum  demu///  due  post  in  eund^// 
Vnu///  post  den//m  due  in  tn'a  dei//de  per  vnu/// 
32  Multiplices'/?"  dem//m  intra  omnia,  m//ltiplicata 

In  su/;/ma  decies  q//om  si  fuerit  tibi  doces 
Multiplicandoiv////  de  normis  sufficiunt  hec. 
H  Here  he  puttes  pe  6  rewle,  &  be  last  of  alle  multiplicacion),  The  sixth  case 
36  pe  quych  is  pis:  yf  J>ou  wel  mwltiplye  a  romposit  by  a-noper  com- 
posit, bou  schaltdo  bus.     rmdtiplie  bat  on  composit,  qwych  bou  welt  composite  by 

.  ,,  •      i      j.  Composite. 

ot  the  twene,  by  be  articul  oJ  pe  toper  composit,  as  pou  were  tat^t  in 

pe  5  rewle,  J-en  mwltiplie  pal   same  composit,  pe  quych  bou  hast 

40  multiplied  by  pe  oper  articul,  by  be  digit  of  be  ober  composit,  as 


'■'■>-  How  to  work  wit  In )  u  I   Figures. 

Mental  mui-    h<m  was  taint  in  be  I  rewle.     As  bus,  yf  bull  wold  wete  what  is  11 

tiplication.       r  ?  *  Y         "       ' 

An  example    tymes   13,  as  bou  was  taujt  in  be  5  rewle,  &  bat  sehal  he  an  hun- 
dryfch  &  ten,  aftenvarde  multiply  bat  same  composit  pat  bou  hast 
multiplied,  be  quych  is  a  .11.     And  nwltiplye  hit  be  be  digit  of  be    4 
oper  composit,  be  quych  is  3,  for  3  is  be  digit  of  13,  And  pat  wel 
he  30.     ben  take  be  digit  of  bat  composit,  be  quych  composit  bou 
iieafi65«.   multiplied  by  be  digit  of  bat  oper  composit,  Jpe  quych  is  a  11. 
of  the  sixth    1[  Also  of  be  quych  11  on  is  be  digit,     nmltiplie  bat  digitt  by  be    8 
craft.  digctt  of  pat  other  composit,  be  quych  diget  is  3,  as  bou  was  tau^t  in 

be  first  rewle  m  be  begynnynge  of  pis  craft,  be  quych  rewle  begynnes 
"In  digitus?  cures."  And  of  alle  be  nraltiplicacion)  of  be  2  digitt 
comys  thre,  for  onys  3  is  hut  3.  Now  cast  alle  pese  nounhers  12 
toged?^-,  the  quych  is  pis,  a  hundiyth  &  ten  &  30  &  3.  And  al  bat 
wel  be  143.  AVrite  3  first  in  be  ryglit  side.  And  cast  10  to  30,  bat 
wol  be  40.  set  40  next  after  towardc  be  lyft  side,  And  set  aftur  a 
bundryth  as  here  an  Ensampulle,  143.  16 

(Cetera  desunt.) 


33 


^Ijc  %xt  jof  |lom.brnng. 

A   TRANSLATION   OF 

Sotjn  of  Iftotofoooti's  ©r  Hvtr  Numcrantu. 


B 


T 


[Ashmole  MS.  396, /o/.  48.] 

oys  seying  in  the  begynnyng  of  his  Arsemetrikc :  —AIL' 
thynges  that  bem  fro  the  first  begynnyng  of  thynges  Ful- 4S- 
have  p/v^ceded',  and  come  forth'',  And  by  reso/m  of 
nombre  ben  formed'  ;  And  in  wise  as  they  bene,  So  oweth'' 
they  to  be  knowen-  ;  wherfor  in  vniu'/sall''  knowlechyng 
of  thynges  the  Art  of  nombrynge  is  best,  and  most 
operatyfe. 

herfore  sithen    the  science  of   the  whiche   at   this    lyme  we 
intendene   to  write  of   standithe   alle    and    about   nombre  :  The  name  of 

.  the  art. 

Hirst  we  most  se,  what  is  the  propro  name  therofe,  and  fro 
whena  the  name  come:  Afterward','  what  is  nombre,  And  how 
manye  spices  of  nombre  ther  ben.     The  name  is  clepede  Algorisme, 

12  hade  out  of  Algore,  other  of  Algos,  in  grewe,  That  is  clepide  in  Derivation  of 
englisshe  art  other  craft,  And  of  Rithmws  that  is  callede  nombre. 
So  algorisme  is  cfepede  the  art  of  nombryng,  other  it  is  had  ofe  en 
or  in,  and  gogos  that  is  iutroducciown,  and  Rithimts  nombre,  thai  is  Another. 

16  to  say  Interducciown  of  nombre.  And  thirdly  it  is  hade  of  the 
name  of  a  kyng  thai  is  clepede  Algo  and  Rythmws;  So  callede 
Algorisms.  Sothely  .2.  manere  of  nombres  hen  notifiede; 
Formalle,1  as  nombre  is  vnitees  gadrede  to-gedres  ;    Materially2  as  Another. 

20  nombre  is  a  collecciowri  of  vnitees.  other  nombre  is  a  multitude 
had'-'  out  of  vnitees,  vnitee  is  that  thynge  wher-by  enery  thynge  is 
called'?  oone,  other  o  thynge.  of  nombres,  that  one  is  clepede 
digitalle,  that  othere  Article,  Another  a  nombre  componede   obe?' 

24  myxt.     Another  digitalle  is  a  nombre  w/t//-in  .10.:   Article  is  batKm<38<>f 

'        numbers, 

nombre  that  may  be  dyvydede  in  .10.  parties  egally,  And  that  there 

1  MS.  Materially  «  MS.  Formalle. 

NOMBRYNGE.  n 


3  f  ( 'ha/pU  r  1.     Numeration. 

leve  no  residue;  Componede  or  medlede  is  thai  nombre  that  is 
come  of  a  digite  and  of  an  article.  And  vndrestande  wele  that  alle 
nombres  betwix  .2.  articles  nexl  is  a  nonibr<  componede.  Of  this 
The  n  mi, s  art  bene  .9.  spices,  thai  is  forto  sey,  nume/'aciottn,  addicioun,  Sub-  4 
tracciozm,  Mediawozm,  Duplaciomi,  IVlultipIiacio?m,  1  )yvysiown,  Pro- 
gression!), And  of  Rootes  the  extracciown,  ami  that  may  be  hade  in 
.2.  manors,  that  is  to  sey  in  nombres  quadrat,  and  in  cubices: 
Amonge  the  whiche,  ffirst  of  Nume?"aciown,  and  afterwarde  of  J>c  s 
ojjers  l»y  ordure,  y  entende  to  write. 


>  Poi.  48i         ^or-soth?  numeracioun  is  of  eivry  numbre  by  competent 
figures  an  artificialle  rep/vsentacio/m. 

Figures,        /*    ^J  otlily  figure,  difference,  places,  and  lynes  supposen  o   tbyng  12 

piaces,"mid     ,^^^  other  the  same,  Bui   they  ben  sette  here  for  dyuers  resons. 
f^^y  fiigure  is  clepede  for  protracciown  of  figuracioun  :  1  >ifference  is 
railed''  tor  therby  is  shewede  eue?'y  figure,  how  it  hath*   difference 
fro  the  figures  before  them:  place  by  cause  of  space,  where-in  me  L6 
writethe :    lynees,  for  that  is  ordeyned*    for  the   presentaciown  of 

The o figures,  euery    figure.     And    vnderstonde    (hat    ther    ben    .9.    lymytes    of 
figures  that  representen  the  .'.>.  digites  that  1  »< •  1 1  tin'-',  it.  9.  8.  7.  6. 

Thecipher.    5.  4.  3.  2.  1.     The  .10.  is  clepede  theta,  or  a  cercle,  other  a  cifre,  20 
other  a  figure  of  nought  for  nought  it  signyfiethe.     Nathelesse  she 
holdyng  that  place  giveth<  others  for  to  signyfie  ;  for  with*  oul  cifre 
or  cifres  a  pure  article  may  not    be  writte.     And  sithen  that  by 

rhenumera-  these  .'.'.  figures  significatifes  [oynede  with  cifre  or  with  cifres  alle  21 
nombres  ben  and  may  be  repn  sentedi .  It  was,  nether  is,  no  nede  to 

ofdigits,       fynde  any  more  figures.     And  note  wele  that  euery  digite  shall*  be 
writte  with  oo  figure  allone  to  it  aproprede.     And  alle  articles  by 

of  articles,      a  cifre,  ffor  euery  article  is  namede  for  oone  of  the  digitis  as  .10.  of  28 
1..  20.  of.  2.  and  so  of  the  others.  &c.     And  all-  nombres  digitalle 

nwell   to   lie   Sette   ill    the   fil'Si    dillerelice  :     All    articles  ill    the  seeulide. 

Also  all-  nombres  fro  .  I<».  til  an  .100.  [which]  is  excluded* ,  with  .2. 
figures  inv  i  l>e  writte;  And  yf  it  he  an  article,  by  a  cifre  first  put,  32 
and  the  figure  y-writte  toward'   the  lift  honde,  thai  signifiethe  the 
digit  of  the  whichc  fche  article  is  named'  ;   And  yf  it  be  a  nombre 
ofcompo-      componede,  ffirst  write  the  digil  that  is  a  part  of  that  componede, 

and  write  to  the  lift   side  the  article  as  it   is  seid*    he  fore.     All-  36 
nombre  that  is  fro  an  hundred*  tille  a  thousand*  exclusede,  owithe 
to  lie  writ   by  .3.  figures  ;  ami  alle  nombre  that  is  fro  a  thousand'' 


Chapter  II     Addition.  35 

til  .x.  Mt.  mvsl  be  writ  by  A.  figures;  And  so  forth  e.     And  vnder- 
stond*   wele  that  euery  figure  sette  in  the  first  place  signyfiethe  his  lvalue 

J       °  J  °    ^  due  to  posi- 

digit ;  In  tin'  seconde  place  .1".  tynies  his  digit;  In  the  .3.  place  an  tiol>- 
4  hundrede  so  moche  ;  In  the  .4.  place  a  thousands  so  moche  ;  In  the 
.5.  place  .x.  thousande  so  nioche;  In  the  .6.  place  an  hundrede 
thousands  so  moche  ;  In  the  .7.  placea  thousande  thousande.  And 
so  infynytly  mvltiplying  by  'these  .3.  10,  100,  1000.  And  vnder-  >  Foi.49. 
8  stande  wele  that  competently  me  may  sette  vpon  figure  in  the  place 
of  a  thousand/',  a  prike  to  shewe  how  many  thousand''  the  last  figure 
shade  represent.     We  writene  in  this  art  to  the  lift  side-warde,  as  Numbers  are 

■     written  from 

arabiene  writene,  that  weren  fynders  of  this  science,  othere  for  this  right  to  left. 

12  resomi,  that  for  to  kepe  a  custumable  ordre  in  redyng,  Sette  we 
alle-wey  the  more  nombre  before. 

ddiciottn  is  of  nombre  other  of  nombres  vnto  nombre  or  to 
nombres  aggregation,  that  me  may  see  that  that  is  come  Definition. 

10  1  \  therof  as  excressent.  In  addicio/m,  2.  ordres  of  figures  and 
.2.  nombres  hen  necessary,  that  is  to  sey,  a  nombre  to  he  addede 
and  the  nombre  wherto  the  addiczoun  sholde  he  made  to.  The 
nombre  to  he  addede  is  that  bat  sholde  be  added/'  therto,  and  shade 

20  he  vndervvriten  ;  the  nombre  vnto  the  whiche  addiciomi  shalle  be 
made  to  is  that  nombre  that  resceyuethe  the  addicion  of  fat  other, 
and  shall/'  he  writen  above;    and  it  is   convenient  that  the  lesse  Ho«- the 

ii  i  •  iii  iiii  numbers 

nombre   be  vndenvrit,  and  the   more   addede,  than  the  contrary,  should  be 

written. 

24  But  whether  it  happe  one  other  other,  the  same  comythe  of, 
Therfor,  yf  bow  wilt  adde  nombre  to  nombre,  write  the  nombre 
wherto  the  addiciown  shalle  be  made  in  the  omest  ordre  by  his 
differences,  so  that  the  first  of  the  lower  ordre  he  Andre  the  first 

28  of  the  omyst  ordre,  and  so  of  others.      That  done,  adde  the  first  of  The  method 
the  lower  ordre  to  the  first  of  the  omyst  ordre.     And  of  suche 
addition,  other  J?ere  gvo\vit7i    therof  a  digit,   An  article,  other  a 
composed/'.     If  it  he  digitas,  In  the  place  of  the  omyst  shalt  thow  Betfn  at  the 

32  write  the  <li- i t  excrescyng,  as  thus  : — ■ 


A 


The  resultant  I  2      If  the  article;    in   the   place  of   the  The  sum  is 

To  whom  it  slml  be  addedfl    |  1       l)|llV,,     put   a.way    },v   a   0jfre    writte,  *' 

The  »omi,i-p.  to  be  added/-     |  l     and    t]l(.    (]igi|    transferrede,   of    be 
36  which/'  the  article  toke  his  name,  toward/'  the  lift  side,  and  be  it 
added/'  to  the  next  figure  folowyng,  yf  fcher  be  any  figure  folowyng ; 
or  no,  and  yf  it  he  not,  leve  it  [in  the]  voide,  as  thus : — 


36 


Chapter  Til.     Subtraction. 


or  an  article. 


The  resultant 


in 


To  whom  it  shall?  he  added': 


The  noinbre  to  be  addede 


Resultans 

|2|7|8|2|7 

Cui  debet  addi 

|  1  I  0  j  0  |  8  |  4 

Numcriw  addendws 

|1|7|7|4J8 

•    Fol.  49  A. 


or  a  compo- 
site. 


The  trans- 
lator's note. 


Definition  of 
Subtraction, 


How  it  may 
be  done, 


What  is  re- 
quired, i 


And  yf  it  happe  that  the  figure  folowyng  wherto  tlio  addiciown 
shalle  be  made  by  [the  cifre  of]  an  article,  it  sette  a-side ;  In  his 
place  write  the  ] [digit  of  the]  Article,     The  resultant  j  1 7 

as  thus  :  — 


Te  whom  it  shalh  be  addede    |  10 


The  nombre  to  be  added'- 


I    7 


And  yf  it  happe  that  a  figure  of  .9.  by  the  figure  that  me  mvst 
adde  [one]  to,  In  the  place  of  that  9.  put  a  cifre  and  write  be  article 
toward''  be  lift  honde  as  bifore, 
and  thus :  — 


The  resultant 

1  io 

To  whom  it  shalle  be  addede 

1     9 

The  nombre  to  be  addede 

I     1 

And  yf2  [therefrom  grow  a]  nombre  componed,3  [in  the  place  of 
the  nombre]  put  a- way4  [let]  the  digit  [be]5  writ  bat  is  part  of  bat 
composide,  and  ban  put  to  be  lift,  T]|l,  ,vsu|(;m, 
side    the    article    as    before,    and 

bus  : — 


I  12 


To  whom  it  shall  be  added*    |    8     12 


The  nombre  to  be  addede 


I     4 


This  done,  adde  the  scconde  to  the  second'',  and  write  above  ober 
as  before.     Note  wele  bat  in  addic/ons  and  in  alb-  spices  folowyng, 
whan  he  seithe  one  the  other  shall'  be  writen  aboue,  and  me  most  \q 
vse  eiUT  figure,  as  that   v\v  ry   figure  were  sette  by  half',  and   by 
hym-selfe. 

Subtraction  is  of  .2.  proposede  nombres,  the  fyndyng  of  the 
excesse  of  the  more  to  the  lasse ;  Other  subtraccioMn  is 
ablatio  Mil  of  o  nombre  fro  a  nother,  that  me  may  see  a  some 
left.  The  lasse  of  the  more,  or  even  of  even,  may  be  w/t/'draw  ; 
The  more  fro  the  lesse  may  neuej'  be.  And  sothly  that  nombre  is 
more  thai  hath'  more  figures,  So  that  the  last  be  lignyficatifes : 
And  yf  ther  ben  as  many  in  that  one  as  in  thai  other,  me  most 
deme  it  by  the  last,  other  by  the  next  last.  More-oue?1  in  w/t//- 
drawyng  .'_'.  nombres  hen  necessary:  A  nombre  to  be  w/t/«lraw, 
And  a  nombre  that  me  shalh  w/t//-draw  of.  The  nombre  to  be 
w/tA-draw  shall-  be  writ  in  the  lower  ordre  by  his  differences  j  The 


20 


24 


28 


3  'the'  in  MS. 


■  ■  be  '  in  MS. 
5  'is'  in  MS. 


4  'and"  in  .MS. 


The  remanent 


20 


Wherof  me  shalle  withdraw    |  22 


The  nombre  to  be  withdraw 


Chapter  III.     Subtraction. 

nombre  fro  the  whiche  mo  shalle  withe-draw  in  the  omyst  ordre, 
so  that  the  first  be  vnder  the  first,  the  seconde  vnder  thg  second?, 
And  so  of  allc  others.  Withe-draw  therfor  the  first  of  the  lowere 
4  ordre  fro  the  first  of  the  ordre  above  his  hede,  and  that  wolle  be 
other  more  or  lesse,  ober  egall?. 
yf  it  be  egalle  or  even  the  figure 
sctte  beside,  put  in  his  place  a 
8  cifre.  And  yf  it  be  more  put  away 
be?"fro  als  many  of  vnitees  the 
lower  figure  eonteynethe,  and 
writ  the  residue  as  thus 

12 _  And   yf    it    he 

lesse,  by-cause 
the  more  may 
not     be     wiih- 

1G  draw  ther-fro,  borow  an  vnyte  of  the  next  figure  that  is  worthe  10. 

Of  that  .10.  and  of  the  figure  that  ye  wolde  have  w/tA-draw  fro 

be-fore  to-gedre  Ioynede,  wtt/i-draw  be  figure  be-nethe,  and  put  the 

residue  in  the  place  of  the  figure 

20  put  a-side  as  bws  :— 


37 


Write  tlie 
greater  num- 
ber above. 

Subtract  the 
first  figure 
if  possible. 


The  remanent                            |  2     2 

Wherof  me  shalle  w/tA-draw    |  2  |  8 

f>e  nombre  to  be  withdraw             |  6 

Remaneiis                        |  2  |  2  |  1  |  8    |  2  |  9  |  9  |  9  |  8 

A  quo  sit  subtraccio        |  8  |  7  |  2  |  4    |  3  |  0  |  0  [  0  |  4 

Numerus  subtrahends  |  6  |  5  |  2  |[6]  |  .  |  .  |  .  |  .  |  6 

1  Fol.  50. 

If  it  is  not 
possible 
'  borrow  ten, 


ami  then  sub- 
tract. 


The  remanent 


1  I  8 


And    yf    the    figure    wherof    me 
shal   borow  the   vnyte   be    one, 


Wherof  me  shalle  witA-draw    |  2  |  4 

The  nombre  to  be  wtt/i-draw    10  16 


If  t lie  second 
figure  is  one. 


put  it  aside,  and  write  a  cifre  in  the  place  bm>f,  lest  the  figures 
24  folowing  fade  of  thaire  nombre,  and  ban  worche  as  it  shew/tA  in 

this  figure  here  : — 

And  yf  the  vnyte  wherof  me 

shal    borow    be    a    cifre,   go 
28  ferther   to   the  figure  signy- 

ficatife,  and  ther  borow  one,  and  retowmyng  bake,  in  the  place  of 

euer)'  cifre  fat  ye  passide  oue?*,  sette  figures  of  .'.».  as  here  it  is 

specified*' : — 
32  And  whan  me  comethe 


The  remanent                             |  3  |  0  |  93 

Wherof  me  shal  witA-draw       |  3  |  1  |  2 

The  nombre  to  be  witA-draw      .  |  .  |  3 

If  the  secon.l 
figure  is  a 
cipher. 


The  remenaunt 

1-2  |  9 

!' 

9|9 

Wherof  me  shalle  n  ith  draw 

|3|0 

" 

ii  |  3 

The  nombre  to  be  \\  itA-draw 

1      1 

14 

to  the  nombre  wherof 
me  intendithe,  there  re 
maynethe  alle-wayes  .10.  ffor  J'e  whiche  .10.  &c.  The  reson  why 
3G  bat  for  euery  cifre  leff  behynde  me  setteth  figures  ther  of  .9.  this  it 
is : — If  fro  the  ..'!.  place  me  borowede  an  vnyte,  that  vnyte  by 
respect  of  the  figure  that  he  came  fro  repj'esentith  an  .C,  In  the 


A  jil^titi.  :i- 
tiim  of  I  he 
rule  given. 


2  6  in  MS. 


3  Oin  .MS. 


38  Chapter  IV.     Mediation. 

place  of  that  cifrc  [passed  over]  is  left  .9.,  [which  is  worth  ninety], 

and  yit  it  remaynethe  as  .10.,  And  the  same  resone  wolde  be  yf 

me   hade  borowede    an  vnyte  fro  tlie   .4.,  .5.,  .G.,  place,  or  ony 

other  so  vpwarde.     This  done,  withdraw  the  seconde  of  tlie  lower    4 

ordre  fro  the  figure  above  his  hede  of  be  omyst  ordre,  and  wirche 

why  it  is       as  before.     And  note  wele  that  in  addicion  or  in  subtracciown  me 

workfrom      m;iv  wele  fro  the  lift  side  begynne  and  ryn  to  the  right  side,  l.ut  it 
right  to  left.  •  J»'  .  "  .  °  ' 

wol  be  more  profitabler  to  be  do,  as  it  is  taught.     And  yf  thow    8 

How  to  prove  wilt  p?'ove  yf  thow  have  do  wele  or  no,  The  figures  that  thow  hast 

withdraw,  adde  them  ayene  to  the  omyst  figures,  and  they  wolle 

accorde  with   the  first  that  thow  haddest  yf  thow  have  labored 

nnd addition,   wele  ;  and  in  like  wise  iii  addiciozin,  whan  thow  hast  added-'  w\\e  12 

iFoi.561.    thy  figures,  w/t//draw  them  that  thow  first  'addest,  and  the  same 

wolle  reto///-ne.     The  subtraccio/m  is  none  other  but  a  prouffe  of  the 

addiciown,  and  the  contrarye  in  like  wise. 

Definition  of  ~M   M~ediacio*m  is  the  fyndyng  of  the  halfyng  of  euery  nombre,  16 

that  it  may  he   seyne  what  and   how  moche   is  euery  half'. 


M 


In  halfyng  ay  oo  order  of  figures  and  oo  nombre  is  neces- 
sary, that  is  to  sey  the  nonibre  to  be  halfede.     Therfor  yf  thow 
wilt  half  any  nombre,  write  that  nombre  by   his  differences,  and  20 
whereto       besrvnne  at  the  right,  that-  is  to  sey,  fro  the  first 'figure  to  the  right 

begin.  OJ  . 

side,  so  that  it  he  siguyncatife  other  represent  vnyte  or  eny  other 

digitalle  nombre.     If  it  he  vnyte  write  m  his  place  a  cifre  for  tlie 

[fthefn-st      figures   folowyng,    [lest   they    signify   less],   and    write   that    vnyte  24 

unity.  w/t//oiit  in  the  table,  other  resolue  it  in  .00.  mynvtes  and  sette  a- 

side  half  of  tho  minutes  so,  and  reserve  the  remenawnt  w-'t//ont  in 

the  table,  as  thus  ..'Hi.  ;  other  sette  wzt/touf  thus  .,/,  :  that  kepethe 

none  ordre  of  place,  Nathelesse  it  bathe  signyficaciown.     And  yf  -,s 

the  other  figure  signyfie  any  other  digital  nombre  fro  vnyte  forthe, 

wimt  to  do    ober  the  nombre  is   ode  or  evene.      If  it   he 


if  it  is  m,t  .  .         .  Halfedi  2  12 

unity.  even,  write  tins  halt  in  this  wise  : — 


.         to  bi  halfedi       i      I 

And    it     It    lie    Odde,     lake    tlie    lie\l   eVell   Vlldl'e 


32 


liym  conteynede,  and  put  his  half  in  the  place  of  that  odde.  and  of 
be  vnyte  that  remaynethe  to  he  halfed 

do  thus  : — 


Then  halve      This  done,  the  SCCOnde  is  to  he  halted-  .  \  f 

the  Bei'iind 


balfed< 


To  be  halfed. 


[di] 
36 


tignre.  it  be  a  cifre  put  it  be  side,  and  yf  it  he  significatifi .  other  it  is  even 

or  od(  :  It'  it  he  even,  write  in  the  place  of  be  nombres  wiped--  out 
the  half-  :  yf  it  he  od  .  take  the  next  even  vnder  it  wwtenythe,  and 
in  the  place  of  the   lmpar  sette  a-side  put  half  of  the  even:  The  40 


Chapter    J".     Duplation. 


89 


vnyte  that  remaynethe  to  be  halfede,  respect  hade  to  them  before, 

is  worthe  .10.     Dyvide  that  .10.  in  .2.,  5.  is,  and  sette  a-side  that  x™  u  odd> 

J  '  add  "•  t"  the 

one,  and  adde  that  other  to  the   next  figur( 
4  precedent  as  here  : — 
And  yf  fe  addicioam  sholde  ho  made  to  a  cifre, 


Halfed< 


to  be  halfede 


sette  it  a-side,  and  write  in  his  place  .5.    And  vnder  this  fozmne  me 
shalle  write  ami  worch< . 
8  till-  tin'  total  le  nombre  be 
halfede. 


1  doubled*;             |  2  |  6 

8  |  9  |  0 

10| 17  |  4 

to  be  doublede   |  1  |  3 

4|4|5 

5|   8|7 

D 


uplicaciotm  is  asr<  p acion  of  nombre  [to  itself]  bat  me  raav  se  Definition  of 

i  i  t        -i    "  i  i  '  Duplation. 

the  nombre  growen.     In  doublynge  ay  is  but  one  ordre  of 
12    |    J    figures  necessarie.     And  me  most  be-gynne  with  the  lift 
side,  other  of  the  more  figure,  And  after  the  nombre  of  the  more 
figure  representithe.     1In  the  ether  .3.  before  we  begynne  alle  way     '  r-oi.si. 
fro  the  right  side  and  fro  the  lasse  nombre,  In  this  spice  and  in  alle  whereto 

°  L  begin. 

16  other  folpwyng  we  wolle   begynne  fro  the  lift  side,  ffor  and  me 
bigon  the  double  fro  the  first,  omwhiie  me  myght  double  oo  thyn'ge 
twyes.     And  how  he  it  that  me  myght  double  fro  the  right,  that  why. 
wolde  be   harder  in  techyng  and  in  workyng.     Therfor  yf  thow 

20  wolt  double  any  nombre,  write  that  nombre  by  his  differences,  and 
double  the  last.  And  of  that  doublyrcg  other  growithe  a  nombre 
digital,  article,  or  componede.  [If  it  be  a  digit,  write  it  in  the 
place  of  the  first  digit.]     If  it  he  article,  write'  in  his  place  a  cifre 

24  and  transferre  the  article  toward'   the  lift,  as 
thus  : — 
And  yf  the   nombre  be   componede,  write  a 


double 

to  be  doubled* 


Hi 


n  ith  the  1 1 
suit. 


doubled* 
to  I"'  donblei 


16 


digital  that  is  part  of  his  coinposiciomi,  and  sette  the  article  to  the 
28  lift  hmd',  as  thus:— 

That  done,  me  most  double  the  last  save  one, 

and  what  growethe  peroi  me  most  worche  as 

before.     And  yf  a  cifre  be,  touche  it   not.      But   yf  any  nombre 

32  dial]-  be  added-    to  the  cifre,  in  be  place  of  be  figure  wipede  out 

me  most  write  the  nombre  to  be  addede,      •    

i  doubled*  |  6  |  0      6| 


to  be  doubled*      3  |  0  j  3 


as  thus  :  — 

In  the  same  wise  me  shalle  wirche  of 
36  alle  others.     And  this  probacio?m  :  If  thow  truly-double  the  halfis 

and    truly    half   the   doubles,    the    same 

nombre  and  figure  shalle  mete,    m  hi    n 

thow  labow>-ed<  rpone  first,  And  of  the 
40  contrarie. 


Ifow  to  provi 
j  our  answer. 


led* 
to  be  doubled* 


1      ^ 


40 


Definition  of 
Multiplica- 
tion. 


Multiplier. 
Multiplicand. 


M' 


Chapter   VI.     Multiplication. 

ultiplicaciown  of  nonibre  by  hym-self  other  by  a-nother,  wiUi 
proposide  .2.  nombres,  [is]  tlie  fyndyng  of  the  thirde,  That 

so  nft uteynethe  that  other,  as  tlier  ben  vnytes  in  the 

In  multiplicackmn  .2.   nombres  pryncipally  ben  necessary,    4 
that  is  to   sey,   the  norabre  multiplying  and  the  nombre   to  be 
multiplied^,  as  here  ; — twies  fyve.     [The  number  multiplying]  is 
designede  adue^bially.     The  nombre  to  be  multiplied^  resceyvethe 
a  no»ii??alle  appellaciotm,  as  twies  .5.  5.  is  the  nombre  multiplied^,    8 
and  twies  is  the  nombre  to  be  multipliede. 


of 


j  Reaultans             |  *   |  1  |  0  | 

1  |3  |  2 

6  |  6  |  8 

0  |  0  |  8 

|  Multiplicand's    |  .  |  .  |  5  | 

.   |    .   |  4 

•  |3|4 

0  |  0  |  4 

J  Multiplicans        |  .  |  2  |  2  1 

.  |  3  |  3 

- :  - 1  - 

.  |   .  |   . 

Product. 

*  Fol.  51  6. 


There  are  G 
rules  .if  Mul- 
tiplication. 


I    Digit  by 
digit. 


Also  me  may  thervpone  to  assigne  the.  3.  nombre,  the  whiche  is 
2clepede  product  or  p?*ovenient,  of  takyng  out  of  one  fro  another: 
as  twyes  .5  is  .10.,  5.  the  nombre  to  be  multiplied^,  and  .1*.  the  12 
multipliant,  and.  10.  as  before  is  come  therof.  And  vnderstonde 
welf,  that  of  the  multipliant  may  be  made  the  nombre  to  be  mul- 
tipliede, and  of  the  con- 
trarie,  remaynyng  eue?1 
the  same  some,  and  her- 
ofe  comethe  the  comen 
speche,    that    seithe    all 

nombre  is  convertede  by       6  j_l2  |  18  |  24  j  30  |  36  !  12  ;  48  |  56  j    60 
Multiplying  in  hym  selfe. 
And  thcr  ben  .6  rules  of 
Multiplicacioftn ;     ftlrst, 
yf    a   digit    multiplie    a   - 


1  |    2 

3 

1 

5|    6|    7 

8 

9|    10 

2|    4 

6 

8 

in    i<>:;  1 1 

16 

18  !    20 

3  |     6 

9 

12 

15  |  18  |  21 

24 

|  27  |    30 

4  |     8 

12 

16 

|  20  |  24  j  28 

32 

1  36  |    40 

5  |  10 

15 

20 

25  |  30  |  35 

40 

|  45  |     50 

6  |  12  | 

7  11 

18 

24 

30  '  36  1  42 

L8 

56  |    60 

21 

28 

35      12      in 

56 

8  |  1(5  | 

24 

32 

40  |  48  |  56 

64 

9  |  18 

27 

36 

15     54     63 

72 

81  J    90 

in  |  20  | 

30 

■10 

60 1  ro 

80 

90  |  100  ': 

See  Hi.  table 
ubove. 


■1    Digit  l.y 
:n  tide. 


digit,  considre  how  many  of  vnytees  ben  betwix  the  digit  by  multi- 
plying and  his  .10.  bethc  to-gedre  accomptede,  and  so  ofl  with  -draw 
the  digit  multiplying,  vnder  the  article  of  his  denomiwaciozm. 
Example  of  grace.  If  thow  woll  wete  how  mocht  is  .1.  tymes  .8.,  28 
*se  how  many  vnytees  ben  betwix  .8.5  and  .10.  to-geder  rekenede, 
and  it  shrw/iA  that  .'_'.:  withdraw  ther-for  the  quaternary,  of  the 
article  of  his  denomination  twies,  of  .1"..  And  ther  remaynethe" 
.32.,  thai  is,  to  some  of  all<  the  multiplicaciowu.  Wher-vpon  for  32 
more  evidence  and  declaration  the  seid<  table  is  made.  Whan  a 
digit  mulliplieth*  an  article,  thow  most  bryng  the  di.it  into  \>e 
digit,  of  \>e  which*    the  article  [has]0  his  name,  and  euery  vnyte 


MS. 

•  1  ih 


"    SIC. 

in-'  rted  in  Ms. 


Ami '  insei  ted  in  MS. 

'    'to'  in  MS. 


The  Cases  of  Multiplication. 

shall*-  stondfi  for  .10.,  and  euery  article  an  .100.  Whan  the  digit 
niultipliethe  a  nombre  componede,  Jjou  most  bryng  the  digit  into 
aiber  part  of  the  nombre  componede,  so  pat  digit  be  had  into  digit 
4  by  the  first  rule,  into  an  article  by  be  seconds  rule;  and  afterwarde 
Ioyne  the  producciown,  and  pere  vvol  be  the  some  totalle. 


41 


:;   Composite 
by  digit. 


Resultans 

|  1  |  2  |  6 

7  |  3  !  6 

1 

2(0' 

1  j  2  |  0  |  8 

Multiplicands 

1      1      |2 

|  3  |  2 

|6  1 

MM 

Multiplicans 

1      1  6  |  3 

2|3| 

2  |  0  | 

1  3  |  0  |  2 

"Whan  an  article  multipliethe  an  article,  the  digit  wherof  he  is 
namede  is  to  be  brought  Into  the  digit  wherof  the  oper  is  nainede, 
8  and  euery  vnyte  wol  he  worthe  xan  .100.,  and  euery  article,  a 
.1000.  Whan  an  article  multipliethe  a  nombre  componede,  thow 
most  bryng  the  digit  of  the  article  into  aitlier  part  of  the  nombre 
componede;  and  Ioyne  the  p/v/duecio//n,  and  euery  article  wol  be 

12  worthe  .100.,  and  euery  vnyte  .10.,  and  so  wolle  the  some  be 
opene.  Whan  a  nombre  componede  multipliethe  a  nombre  com- 
ponede, euery  part  of  the  nombre  multiplying  is  to  be  hade  into 
euery  part  of  the  nombre  to  be  multiplied^',  and  so  shalle  the  digit 

16  be  hade  twies,  onys  in  the  digit,  that  other  in  the  article.  The 
article  also  twies,  ones  in  the  digit,  that  other  in  the  article.  Ther- 
for  yf  thow  wilt  any  nombre  by  hym-self  other  by  any  other 
multiplie,  write  tlie  nombre  to  be  multipliede  in  the  ouer  ordre  by 

20  Ids  differences,  The  nombre  multiplying  in  the  lower  ordre  by  his 
differences,  so  that  the  first  of  the  lower  ordre  be  vnder  the  last  of 
the  ouer  ordre.  This  done,  of  the  multiplying,  the  last  is  to  be 
hade  into  the  last  of  the  nombre  to  be  multipliede.     Wherof  than 

2  1  wolle  grow  a  digit,  ari  article,  other  a  nombre  componede.  If  it  be 
a  digit,  even  above  the  figure  multiplying  is  hede  write  his  digit 
that  come  of,  as  it  apperethe  here  : —         The  resultant  HT 


I     Article  by 
article. 


5  Composite 

by  article. 


(6  Composite 
by  composite. 


How  to  set 
down  your 
numbers. 


If  the  result 
is  a  ilk'it. 


To  be  multiplied! 


pc  nombre  multipliyng   |  2 
And  yf  an  article  had  be  writ  oue?"  the  figure  multiplying  his  hede, 
2S  put  a  cifre  per  and  transferre  the  article  towarde  the  lift  hande,  as 

thus  : — 


in  arti.le, 


The  resultant 

|1  |0 

to  1"-  mull  iplii  dfl 

1      1  5 

be  nombre  multipliyng 

1      |2 

And  yf  a  nombre  componede  be  writ  ouer  the  figure  multyplying  is 
hede,  write  the  digit   in  the  nombre  componede  is  place,  and  sette 

32  the  article  to  the  lift  hand'-,  as  thus  : — • 


or  a  compo- 
site. 


42 


Chapter   VI.     Multiplication. 


The  resultant 
Co  be  multiplied^ 

1  |2 

1     M 

the  nombre  multiplying 

I      13 

Resultant 

l« 

6 

to  be  multiplied^ 

1 

3 

the  nombre  nwdti 

>liyng 

!  2 

2 

The  resultant                    |  1  |  1  |  0 

tn  be  multiplied*!                         |  5 

be  nombre  multiplying            2     i: 

Multiply  next      _  TlllS    doilO,   1110    lllOSt    blVim   the    last 

by  the  last         The  resultant  i  1  ]  2  '        ,.  .J  .? 

but  one,  and  save    one    0f    the    iiiultn>hyii£    mto 

the  last  of  be  nombre  to  be  multi- 
plied'-, and  se  what  comythe  tberof 
as  before,  and  so  do  with  alle,  tille  me  come  to  the  first  of  the 
nombre  multiplying,  that  must  be  brought  into  the  last  of  the 
nombre  to  be  multiplied'',  wherof  growithe  obe?"  a  digit,  an  article, 
i  Foi.526.  *  other  a  nombre  componede.  If  it 
be  a  digit,  In  the  place  of  the 
ouerer,  sette  a-side,  as  here  : 

If   an  article   happe,  there   put  a 

cifre  in  his  place,  and  put  hym  to 

the  lift  hande,  as  here  : 

11'  it  be  a  nombre  componede,  in 

the  place  of  the  ouerer  sette  a-side,  write  a  digit  that9  is  a  part  of 

the  componede,  and  sette  on  the 

left  honde  the  article,  as  here  : 

Then  nnter.y     That      done,      sette      forwards      the 
the  multiplier 

one  place.      figures  of  the  nombre  multiplying 

by  oo  difference,  so  that  the  first  of  the  multiplianl  be  vnder  the 
last  save  one  of  the  nombre  to  be  multipliede,  the  other  by  o  place 
sette  forwarde.  Than  me  shall  brynge  the  last  of  the  multipliant 
in  hym  to  be  multipliede,  vnder  the  whiche  is  the  first  multipliant. 
Ami  than  wolle  growe  obe?"  a  digit,  an  article,  or  a  componedi 
nombre.  If  it  he  a  digit,  ad<le  hym  even  above  his  hede  ;  Lf  it  be 
an  article,  transferre  hym  to  the  lift  side;  And  if  it  Le  a  nombre 
componede,  adde  a  digit  to  the  figure  above  his  hede,  and  sette  to 
the  lift  hand'-  the  article.  And  all-  waves  euery  figure  of  the 
nombre  multipliant  is  to  be  brought  to  the  last  save  one  nombre  to 
be  multiplied^',  til  me  come  to  the  first  of  the  multipliant,  where 
me  halh  win-he  as  ii  is  seide  before  of  the  first,  and  afterward*  to 
put  forward*  the  figures  by  o  difference  and  one  tille  they  alle  be 
multiplied'.  And  yf  it  happe  that  the  firsl  figure  of  pe  multi- 
pliant be  a  cifre,  and  boue  it  is  sette  the  figure  signyficatife,  write  a 
cifrc  in  the  place  of  the  figur*  sette  a  side,  as  thus,  etc.  : 


The  resultant 

|  1  |  3S|  2 

to  be  multipliede 

1      1'    |4 

be  nombre  multipliant 

1      1  3  |  3 

L2 


1G 


20 


Work  aa  I.. 
fore. 


How  to  ileal 
wuh  ciphers, 


The  resultanl 

1 

|2 

0 

to  1"'  multipliede 

|6 

i  lie  multiplianl 

|2 

11 

'•'  ■  thai  '  repi  ited  in  .MS. 


-1  •  J  '  iri  MS 


Chapter   VII.     Division. 


43 


The  resultant 

[  2  |  2  |  6  |  4  |  4 

To  lie  multiplied*' 

1      |      |  2  |  2  |  2 

The  multipliant 

|1|0|2|      |      | 

Resultant                 |  8  |  0  |  0  |  8  | 

to  be  multiplied*'    |  4  j  0  |  0  |  4  | 

the  nwltiplianl         2  |   .  |   .  |  .  | 

j  Resultant 

3 

2  |  01 

l  To  be  mwlt: 

pliede 

8  !  0 

1  The  nmltip 

!iaut 

1 

4  1 

And  yf  a  cifre  happe  in  the  lower  order  be-t\vix  the  first  and  the 

last,  and  even  above  be  sette  the  figure   signyficatif,  leve  it  vn-Howtode 

'  °    *  with  ciplu 

fcouchede,  as  here  : — 
4  And  yf  the  ?pace  above  sette  be 

void'',  in  that  place  write  thow 

a  cifre.     And  yf  the  cifre  happe 

betwix   be    first   and  the    last    to  be    rmdtipliede,   me    most  sette 
8  forwards  the  ordre  of  the  figures  by  thaire  differences,  for  oft  of 

ducciomi  of  figures  in  cifres  nought  is  the  resultant,  as  here,  1\vherof 

it  is  evident  and   open,  yf  that 

the  first  figure  of  the  nombre  be 
12  to  be  multipliede  be  a  cifre,  vndir 

it  shall?  be  none  sette  as  here  : — 

Vnder  Tstandl  also  tliat  in  multiplica- J-eave  room 

L  J  i  between  the 

ciozm,  divisio/m,  and  of  rootis  the  ex-  rowa.°l 

figures. 

10  ,-tt,, rrr-^r. —  tracciown,   competently    me    may   leve 

a  mydel  space  betwix  .2.  ordres  of 
figures,  that  me  may  write  there  what  is  come  of  addyng  other 
withe-drawyng,  lest  any  thynge  sholde  be  ouerdiippede  and  sette' 

20  out  of  mynde. 

For  to  dyvyde  oo  nombre  by  a-nother,  it  is  of  .2.  nombres  pro-  Definition  or 
'      '        .  J  l  division. 

.  posed*',  It  is  forto  depart  the  moder  nombre  into  as  many 
partis  as  ben  of    vnytees   in  the  lasse  nombre.     And  note 
24  wele  that  in  makynge  of  dyvysiown  ther  ben  .3.  nombres  necessary  : 

that  is  to  sey,  the  nombre  to  be  dyvydede;  the  nombre  dyvydyng  Dividend, 
and  the  nombre  exeant,  other  how  oft,  or  quocient.     Ay  shalle  the  Quotient. 
nombre  that  is  to  be  dyvydede  be  more,  other  at  the  lest  evene  with 
28  tbe  nombre  the  dyvysere,  yf  the  nombre  shalle  be  made  by  hole 

nombres.     Therfor  yf  thow  wolt  any  nombre  dyvyde,  write  tbe?owtoset 

*  ^  "'     J  down  your 

nombre  to  be  dyvydede  in  be  ouerer  bordure  by  Ids  differences,  the  Sum* 
dyvisere  in  the  lower  ordure  by  bis  differences,  so  thai   the  last  of 
32  the  dyviser  be  vnder  the  lasl  of  the  nombre  to  be  dyvyde,  the  next 
last  vnder  the  next  last,  and  sunt' the  others,  yf  it  may  <■<  mpetently 
be  done  ;  as  here  : — 


The  residue 

1       1  2 

7 

The  quotienl 

1       1 

5 

To  be  dyvydede 

|3|4 

2 

The  d\  \  \  ser 

I      |« 

3 

An  example. 


1   Blank  in  Ms. 


44 


Chapter   VII.     Division, 


Examples. 


When  the 
last  of  the 
divisor  must 
not  be  set 
below  the 
last  of  the 
dividend. 


i  Fol.  5:P. 


How  to  begin. 


An  example. 


Residuum                 |  8  ||      |            |  2  |  7  ||      |  2  j  6 

Quociens        \      |  2  |  1      2  |  2  ||      |      |  5  ||      |      |  9 

Diuidendus      6     8     0      6  |  6  ||  3  |  4  |  2  ||  3  |  3  |  2 

Diuiser           |  3  |  2  |      ||  3  |      ||      |  6  |  3  ||      |  3  |  4 

Where  t>>  set 
the  quotiente 


And  thcr  ben  .2.  causes  whan  the  last  figure  may  not  be  sette  vnder 
the  last,  otlier  that  the  last  of  the  lower  nombre  may  not  be  with' 
draw  of  the  last  of  the  ouerer  nombre  for  it  is  lasse  than  the  lower, 
other  how  be  it,  that  it  myght  be  wtt/i-draw  as  for  iiyin  self  fro  4 
the  ouerer  the  remenaunt  may  not  so  oft  of  them  above,  other  yf 
be  last  of  the  lower  be  even  to  the  figure  above  his  hede,  and  be 
next  last  oJ>er  the  figure  be-fore  brtt  be  more  ban  the  figure  above 
sette.  ]  These  so  ordeynede,  me  most  wirche  from  the  last  figure  of  8 
be  nombre  of  the  dyvyser,  and  se  how  oft  it  may  be  wtt/i-draw  of 
and  fro  the  figure  aboue  his  hede,  namly  so  that  the  remenaunt 
may  be  take  of  so  oft,  and  to  se  the  residue  as  here  : — 

And  note  wele  thai  me  may  not  withe-  12 
draw  more  than  .9.  tymes   nether  lasse 
than    ones.     Therfor    se    how    oft    be 
figures  of  the  lower  ordre  may  be  wiili- 
draw  fro  the  figures  of  the  ouerer,  and  the  nombre  that  shew/t//  be  1G 
qjfocient  most  be  writ  owr  the  hede  of  bat  figure,  vnder  the  whichc 
the  first  figure  is,  of  the  dyviser  ;  And  by  that  figure  me  most  withe- 
draw  alle  ober  figures  of  the  lower  ordir  and  that  of  the  figures 
aboue  thaire  hedis.     This  so  don-,  me  most  sette.  forward*   |?e  figures  20 
of  the  diuiser  by  o  difference  towards  the  right  hondt  and  worche 
as  he  fore  ;  and  Jams  : — 


'Die  residue                 |  2  |  G 

The  quoeienl                    |  9 
To  be  dyvydede    |  3  |  3  |  2 

The  dyvyser          |      |  3  |  4 

Examples. 


Residuum 

1       1       1       1       1       1        1!        1       i       1       1    •    1    1       ■-' 

quociens 

i      1      ,        6  |  5  |  4          1      1      1  2  1  0  |  0  |  4 

Diuidendus 

3  |  5  |  5  1  1  |  2  |  2      8|8|6|3|7|0|4 

Diuisor 

|      |  5      1     3                  1      1     2  :  3        |      | 

The  quocient 

|       |       |       |G     5      1 

To  1"  dj  vydedi 

|  3  |  5  |  5  |  1     -J     'J 

The  dy \ J    i  i 

:,     1     :; 

a  special 


And  yf  ii  happ<  after  be  setlyng  forwardc  of  the  figures  bat  }v 
last  of  the  divisor  may  not  so  oft  be  \\/t//draw  of  the  figure  above  '-'I 
his  hede,  above  bat  figure  vnder  the  whichi  the  first  of  the  diuiser 
is  writ  uk'  most  sette  a  cifre  in  ordre  of  the  uombre  quocient,  and 
sette  the  figures  forward*  as  be-fore  be  o  difference  alone,  and  so  me 
shalle  do  in  all*  nombres  to  be  d\  vidi  d< .  for  where  the  dyviser  may  28 


Chapter   VIII.     Progression.  45 

e  w«t7t-draw  me  mosl   sette  there  a  cifre,  and  sette  forwarde 
the  figures  ;  as  here  :— 

And  Die   shalle   not    CeSSe  fro  Anollier ex- 
ample. 

such?  settyng  of  figures  for- 


,  The  residue 

1      1      1 

I     ! 

in 

2 

Tlie  quocient 

1      1      1 

|2| 

,,    n 

» 

To  be  dyvydede 

|  8  !  8  | 

« I  s.i 

7  1  0 

i 

The  dyvyser 

1     1 

2  |  3 

i      1 

J_    ward'',  nether  of  settynge  of 
be  quocient  into  the  dyviser, 
neb'/-  of  subt?'acciown  of  the  dyvyser,  tille  the  first  of  the  dyvyser 
8  be  wit7i-draw  fro   be  first   to  he  divided''.     The  whiche   don?,  or 
ought,1  ober  nought  shall?  remayne :  and  yf  it  be  ought,1  kepe  it  in 
the  tables,  And  euer  vny  it  to  be  diviser.     And  yf  bou  wilt  wete 
how  many  vnytees  of  be  divisio»n  2wol  growe  to  the  nonibre  of  the    *Foi.33». 
12  diviser?,    the   nombre    quocient   wol    shewe  it:    and    whan    suche  quotient 
divisiown  is  made,  ami  b<»u  lust  prove  yf  thow  have  wele  done  or 
no,  Multiplie  the  quocient    by  the  diviser,  And  the  same  figures  How  to  prove 
wolle  come  ayene  that  thow  haddest  bifore  and  none  other.     And  ' 
16  yf  ought  be  residue,  than  with  addiciown  therof  shalle  come  the 
same  figures  :  And  so  mul'tiplicacioMn  provithe  divisiown,  and  dyvi- 
siown  niultiplicaciown  :  as  thus,  yf  rnultiplicaciown  be  made,  divide  it  ormuitipUca- 
by  the  multipliant,  and  the  nombre  quocient  wol  shewe  the  nombre 
20  that  was  to  be  multiplied'3,  etc. 

rogressiozra  is  of  nombre  after  egalle  excesse  fro  oone  or  tweyne  Definition  o. 

.  .  Progression. 

take  agregacioun.     oi  progression  one  is  naturelle  or  con- 


P 


tynuelle,  bat  ober  broken  aud  discontynuelle.     Naturelle  it 

24  is,  whan  me  begynnethe  with  one,  and  kepethe  ordure  ouerlepyng  Natural  Pro- 
one  ;  as  .1.  2.  3.  4.  5.  C,  etc.,  so  bat  the  nombre  folowynge  passithe 
the  other  be-fore  in  one.     Broken  it  is,  whan  me   lepithe  fro  o 
nombre  tille  another,  and  kepithe  not  the  contynuel  ordire;  as  1.  3.  Broken  Pro- 

28  5.  7.  9,  etc.  Ay  me  may  begynne  with  .2.,  as  bus  ;  .2.  4.  G.  8.,  etc., 
and  the  nombre  folowyng  passethe  the  others  by-fore  by  .2.  And 
note  wele,  that  naturelle  progressioioi  ay  begynnethe  with  one,  and 
Intercise  or  broken  progression,  omwhile  begynnythe  w/th  one, 

32  omwhile  with  twayue.     Of  progression  naturell  .2.  rule.-  ther  be 

yove,  of  the  which)  tin  in  t  is  this]  whan  the  progression  naturelle  The  1st  role 
endithe  in  even  nombre,  by  the  half  therof  multiplie  be  next  totalb.  Progression. 
ou?/-er?  nombre  :  Example  "f  grace  :  .1.  2.  •">.  L.     Multiplie  .-">.  by  .2. 

36  ami  so  .10.  comethe  of,  that  is  the  totalb  nombre  berof.    The  seconde 

rule  is  such'1,  whan  the  progression  naturelle  endith    in  nombre  The  second 
ode.     Take  the  more  portion  of  the  oddes,  and  multiplie  therby 

i()  the  totalle  nombre.     Example  of  grace   1.  2.  3.  4.  5.,  multiplie 

1  '  uoudit '  iii  M.S. 


46  Chapter  IX.     Extraction  of  Boots. 

.5.  by  .^>,  and  fchryes  ."».  shall*  be  resultant,  so  the  nombre  totalle 
riie flret rule  is  .15.  Of  progresiown  inte?'cise,  ther  ben  also  .2. ]  rules:  and  be 
I'rogreseion.   first  is  bis :  Whan  the  Lntercisc  progression  enditn*  ra  even  nombre 

by  half  therof  multiplie  the  next  noinbre  to  Jjat  halfe  as  .2.1  t.  G.    4 

Multiplie  .  I.  by  .•">.  so  J>ai  is  thryes  .1..  and  .12.  the  nombre  of  alle 
Thesecona     the  progression,  wolle  folow.     The  second*  rule  is  this:  whan  the 

progression  interseise  endithe  in  ode,  take  be  more  porciown  of  alle 
*Foi.5s*.    Jje  nombre,  2 and  multiplie  by  hym-selfe;  as  .1.  3.  5.     Multiplie  .3.    8 

by  hym-selfe,  and  be  some  of  alle  wolle  be  .'.'..  etc. 
The  preamble  ~B    ■""ere  folowithe  the  ext  .racci*  ,/m  of  rotis,  and  first  in  nombre 
ii fr.M.tij,     I — I     (|;/^dra.t''.<.    Wherfor  me  shall*  se  what  is  a  nombre  quadrat, 

J_JL  and  what  is  the  rote  of  a   nombre  quadrat,  and  what  it  12 

is  to  draw  out  the  rote  of  a  nombre.  And  before  other  note 
Linear,         this   divisiown :    Of   nombres   one    is    lyneal,  ano)>er   superficialle, 

superficial,  ill  i  •       i 

andsoiid       anober  quadrat,  anob'r  cubike  or  hoole.     lyneal  is  that  bat  is  con- 
numbers.  '  . 

sidrede   after  the  processe,  havynge  no  respect  to  the  direccio?«n  lb 

of  nombre  in  nombre,  As  a  lyne^atbe  but  one  dyraensiown  that 
is  to    sey  after  the    lengthe.     Nombre  superficial    is  b<d   comethe 
of  ledynge  of  oo  nombre  into  a  nother,  wherfor  it  is  callede  super- 
superficial      ficial,  for  it,  hath'    .2.   nombres    notyng  or  niesuryng*    hym,  as  a  20 

numbers.  ,,        ,  ,      , ,         .-.      ,  •  •  ,     ,     •  1  ,1  1 

superficialle  thynge  hathe  .2,  dimensions,  Jvt,  is  to  sey  lengthe  and 
brede.  And  for  bycause  a  nombre  may  be  hade  in  a-nother  by  .2. 
mane?*s,  b"t  is  to  sey  other  in  hym-selfe,  oJ?er  in  anojer,  Vnder- 

squarenum-  stonde  yf  it  he  liad  in  hym  -self.  It  is  a  quadrat,     ffor  dyvisiottn  24 
write  by  vnytes, -hathe  .1.  sides  even  as  a  quadrangille.     and  yf  the 
nombre    be  hade   in  a-nober,  the    nombre    is    superficiel    and    not, 
quadrat,  as  .2.4jade  in  .3.  raakethe  .6.  thai  is  be  firsi  nombre  sup 
ficiellej  wlierfor  it  is  open  bat  alle  nombre  quadrat  is  superficiel,  28 

riwrootofa  and  not  co?iuertide.     The  rote  of  a  nombre  quadrat  is  ba1   nombre 

I-'''"  that  is  had  of  hym-self,  as  twies  .2.  makithe  t.     and  .1.  is  the  first 

nombre  quadrat,  and  2.  is  his  rote.    9.  8.  7.  6.  5.  I.  3.  2.  1.       The 

Notesofsomi  rote  of  the  more  quadrat  .■">.  1.   I.  2.  6.     The  most  nombre  quadrat  32 

exampli    ol 

squareroots     [)     g     7.   5     9.   •">.   4.    7.   •'».        the    lviilellelit     OU*  r    the   quadrat    .<>.    (.).    O. 

hereinterp 

Lated.  |.  ;,.     The  first  caas  of  nombre  quadrat  .5.  I.  7.  o.  •  >.      Lhe  rote  .2. 

3.4.  The  second*  caas  .3.  8.  I.  5.  The  rote  .6.  2.  The  thirde 
caas  .2.  8.  I.  9.     The  rote  .5.  3.     The  .4.  caas  .3.  2.  1.     The  rote  36 

soUdnum.  .1.  7.  The  5.  caas  .9.  I.  2.  0.  I.  The  rote  3.  0.  2.  The  solide 
nombre  or  cubik*  is  bat  bat  comythe  of  double  ledyng  of  nombre 
in  nomhiv ;  And  ii   is  clepede  a  solide  body  that  hath*   per-ia  .3 

1  3  written  for  '1  in  MS. 


bers. 


Ghapter  A'.     Extraction  of  Squaw    Root.  47 

[dimensions]  but  is  to  sey,  lengthe,  brede,  and  thiknesse.     so  bat  Three  di- 

L  "  '  inensions  oi 

nombre  liatli'    ,3.  nonibres   to  be    broughl    forthe    in    hym.     l!ut  solids. 
nombre  may  be  hade  twies  in  nombre,  for  other  it  is  hade  in  hym- 
4  self'/,  ober  in  a-nobe;\     II'  a  nombre  be  hade  twies  in  hyin-self,  ob<  r 

.  .  '  .  '  Fol.  54. 

ones  in  his  quadrat,  b"t  is  tin*  same,  bat  a  cubike  lis,  And  is  the  cubic uum- 
same  that  is  solide.    And  yf  a  nombre  twies  be  had'  in  a-nober,  the 
nombre  is  clepede  solide  and  not  cubike,  as  twies  .3.  and  bat  .2. 
8  makithe  .12.     Wherfor  it  is  opyne  that  alle  cubike  nombre  is  solid'',  Aiicubics 

an-  solid 

and  not  co?iuertide.     Cubike  is  bat  nombre.  bat  comythe  of  ledyngi  numbers, 
of  hym-selfe  twyes,  or  ones  in  his  quadrat.     And  here-by  it  is  open 
that  o  nombre  is  the  route  of  a  quadrat  and  of  a  cubike.     Natheles 
12  the  same  nombre  is  not  qwadrat  and  cubike.     Opyne  it  is  also  that  No  number 

1  l  "  may  I  e  both 

alle  nombres  may  be  a  rote  to  a  qwadrat  and  cubike,  but  not  alk  lin.?'ir a,ld 
nombre  quadrat  or  cubike.     Therfor  sithen  be  ledynge  of  vnyte  in 
hym-self  ones  or  twies  nought  comethe  but  vnytes,  Seithe  Boice  in 
16  Arsemetrike,  that  vnyte  potencially  is  al  nombre,  and  none  in  act.  unity  is  not 

^         L  J  a  number. 

And  vndirstonde  wele  also  that  betwix  euery  .2.  quadrates  ther  is  a 


Examples  of 
square  roots. 


meene   proporcionalle,   That  is  opened''  thus;   lede  the  rote  of   o 
quadrat  into  the  rote  of  the  ob' •/•  quadrat,  and  ban  wolle  be  meene 
20  shew.     Also  betwix  the  next  .2.  cubikis,  me  may  fynde  a  double  a  note  on 

.  i  mean  propor- 

meene,  that  is  to  sey  a  more  meene  and  a  lesse.     The  more  meene  tionais. 
thus,  as  to  brynge  the  rote  of  the  lesse  into  a  quadrat  of  the  more. 
The  lesse  thus,  If  the  rote  of  the  more  be  brought  Into  the  quadrat 

2  1  of  the  lesse. 

•"TI^o  draw  a  rote  of  the  nombre  quadrat  it  is  What-euer  nombre  be 

1      proposed*  to  fynde  his  rote  and  to  so  yf  it  be  quadrat.     And  Tofinda 
yf  it  be  not  quadrat  the  rote  of  the  most  quadrat  fynde  out,  vnder 

28  the  nombre  proposede.  Therfor  yf  thow  wilt  the  rote  of  any  quadrat 
nombre  draw  out,  write  the  nombre  by  his  differences,  and  compt 
the  nombre  of  the  figures,  and  wete  yf  it  be  ode  or  even.  And  yf 
it  be  even,  than  most  thow  begynne  worche  vnder  the  last  save  one.  Begin  with 

.32  And  yf  it  be  ode  w/tA  the  last  ;  and  forto  sey  it  shortly,  al-weyes  place. 

fro  the  last  ode  me  shalle  begynne.     Therfor  vnder  the  last  in  an 

od  place  sette,  me  most  fynd«  a  digit,  the  whiche  lad<    in  hym-selfe 

it  puttithe  away  that,  bat  is  ouer  his  hede,  ober  as  neighe  as  me 

-  7  in  MS.  :t  runs  on  in  MS. 


Residuum 

1    1    1  o  i 

1      1      |4 

1 

!  o 

1     1  o  | 

Quadrande 

|4|3|5|6 

3  |  0  |  2  |  9 

i  ! 

'  !  4 

2  |  4 

1  |  9  |  3  |  6 

Duplum 

|1|2|      | 

1|0|      | 

2| 

|6 

| 

|[8]  |  2 

Subduplu»i 

1      |6|      |6 

|5|      j  5 

1  1 

18 

- 

M|       |4  | 

48 


Chapter  X.     Extraction  of  Square  Root. 


Kind  the 
nearest 
square  root 
Ol  thai  num- 
ber, subtract, 

double  it, 

I  Fol.  546. 
and  set  the 
double  one  to 
the  ri(,'lit. 
Find  the 
second  figure 
by  division. 
Multiply  the 
double  by  the 
second  figure, 
and  add  after 
it  the  square 
of  the  second 
figure,  and 
subtract. 


Examples. 


may:  suche  a  digit  founde  and  w/t//draw  fro  his  ouerer,  me  most 
double  that  digit  and  sette  the  double  vnder  the  next  figure  towarde 
the  right  honde,  and  his  vnder  double  vnder  hym.    That  done,  than 
uiemosl  fyred<  a  nober  digil  vnder  the  next  figure  bifore  the  doublede,     4 
the  whiche  1brought  in  double  settethe  away  alle  that  is  oner  his 
hede  as  to  reward''  of  the  doublede  :  Than  brought  into  hym-self 
settithe  all  away  in  respect  of  hym-self,  Other  do  it  as  nye  as  it 
may  be  d<>:  other  me  may  vvz't/j-draw  the  digit  2[last]  founde,  and      8 
lede  hym  in  double  or  double  hym,  and  after  in  hym-self'';  Than 
[oyne  to-geder  the  pj'oduccione  of  them  bothe,  So  that  the  Brsl  figure 
of  the  last  pj'oduct  be  addede  before  the  first  of  the  first  productes, 
the  seconds  of  the  first,  etc.  and  so  forthe,  subtrahe  fro  the  totalle   12 
nombre  in  respect  of  be  digit.     And  if  it  hap  fat  no  digit  may  be 


The  residue 

MM                    1      1      1      1       II       1      1    '  1  5  |  4  |  3  |  2 

To  lie  qnadredfl 
Tbe  double 

|4|1|2|0|9||1|5|1|3|9||9|0|0|5|4|3|2 

|  4  |  0  |      |      ||       |  2  |      |  4  |              |  6  I       |  0  |      |      |  0 

The  vnder  double 

2|      I  0  |      |3||1|      |2|      |3||[3]|      | CO]  1      ICO] |      |0 

founde,  Than  sette  a  cifre  vndre  a  eifre,  and  cesse  uot  tille  thow 
fynde  a  digit;  and  whan  thow  hast  founde  it  to  double  it,  neb'/'  to 

special  cases,  sette  the  doubled'  forward!    nether  the  vnder  doublede,  Till   thow    \<] 
fynde  vndre  the  firs!  figure  a  digit,  the  which'    lad<    in  all-   double, 
settyng  away  all-   that  is  ou<  r  hym  in  respect  of  the  doublede  :   Than 
lede  hym  into  hym  selfe,  and  put  a-way  all'   in  regarde  of  hym,  other 

i he  residue,  as  nyghe  as  thow  maist.     That  done,  other  oughl  or  nought  wolle   20 
be  the  residue.      It'  nought,  than  it   shewithe  thai  a  nombre  cdm- 
ponede  was  the  quadrat,  and   his   rote    a   digil    last   founde  with 
vndere-double  other  vndirdoubles,  so  that  it  be  sette  be-fore:  And 
yf  ought3  rcmayii' .  that  . -hew/i/'  that  the  nombre  proposede  was  not  24 
quadrat,4  but  a  digit  [last  found  with  the  subduple  or  subduplea 


11,1-  tabic  is 

consti  iici.  d 
for  use  in 
cube  root 
sum  .  gh  ing 
the  value  ol 
ab.a 


1 

1      2 

1      3  |      4  |      5|      6  | 

7|      3|      9 

2 

8 

12  |     16  |    20  |     24  | 

28  |    32  |    36 

3 

4 

18 
32 

27       36  ,     15  |    54  | 

63  |     ri\    81 

|    48  |     (54  |    80  |     96  | 

i  L2     128     114 

5 

50 

|     75  |  100  |  125  |  150  | 

175  |  200  |  225 

'; 

n 

L08  ,MI      180     216  ! 

252  |  288 

i 

98 

1  17  |  L96  |  245  |  294  j 

111 

9 

L28 
168 

L92  |  256     320  ]  384 
243  [  324  |   105  1  486  | 

148     512     576 

567  |  CIS  |  72!tf 

'-'  '  so'  iii  MS.  :1  '  nougbl '  in  MS. 

1  M>.  adds  here  :  '  wher-vponc  -■  the  table  in  the  aexl  side  of  the  next  leefc' 
110  in  MS.  6  0  in  MS. 


Chapter  XL     Extraction  of  Cuh    Hoot.  40 

is]  The  rote  of  the   most  quadrat  conteynede  vndre  the   nombre 
proposede.     Therfor  vf  thow  wilt  prove  yf  thow  have  wele  <lo  or  How  to  prove 

tlie  square 

no,  Multiplic  tlie  digit  last  iounde  w/t/'  the  vnder-double  ober  vnder-  i<»>t  without 

'  r  °  '  or  with  a 

4  doublis,  ami  thow  shalt  fynde  the  same  figures  that  thow  haddest  remainder. 

before;  And  so  that  nought  be  the  'residue.     And  yf  thow  have     iFol.55. 
any  residue,  than  with  the  addicioztt)  berof  that  is  rese?-uede  with-out 
in  thy  table,  thow  shalt  fynde  tin  first  figures  as  thow  haddest  them 
8  before,  etc. 

Heere  folowithe  the  extraceio«n  of  rotis  in  cubike  nonibres  ;  Definition 
'  of  a  cubic 
wher-for  me  most  se  what  is  a  nomine  cubike,  and  what  number  and 
a  cube  root, 
is  his  route,  And  what  is  the  extracciown  of  a  rote.     A 

12  nombre  cubike  it  is,  as  it  is  before  declarede,  that  comethe  of 
ledyng  "f  any  nombre  twies  in  hyni-selfe,  other  ones  in  his  quadrat. 
The  rote  of  a  nombre  cubike  is  the  nombre  that  is  twies  had'/  in 
hym-selfe,  or  ones  in  his  quadrat.     Wher-thnrghe  it  is  open,  that 

16  eiury  nombre  quadrat  or  cubike  have  the  same  rote,  as  it  is  seide 
before.  And  forto  draw  out  the  rote  of  a  cubike,  It  is  first  to 
fynde  be  nombre  p?-oposede  yf  it  be  a  cubike;  Am!  yf  it  be  not, 
than  thow  most  make  extraeciown  of  his  rote  of  the  most  cubike 

20  vndre  tlie  nombre  proposide  his  role  founde.  Therfor  p?'oposede 
some  nomine,  whos  cubical  rote  boil  woldest  draw  out;   First  thow  Mark  off 

,  .  .  the  places  in 

most  compl   the  figures  by  fourtnes,  that  is  to  sey  in  the  place  of  threes, 
thousandes;   And  vnder  the  last  thousand''  place,  thow  most  fynde  Findthe  first 

21  a  digit,  the  whiche  lad'  in  hym-self  cubikly  puttithe  a-way  that  bat 
is   one/-  his   hede   as  in  respect  of  hym,  other  as  nyghe  as  thow 

maist.     That  done,  thow  most  trebille  the  digit,  and  that  triplat  treble  it  and 

n  ii-iii       I)'il<'e  it  under 

is  to  be  put  vnder  the  .3.  next  figure  towarde  the  right  lionae,  tlie  next  but 

'  pi        <"'e> am' |n|1'" 

to  And  the  vnder-trebille  vnder  the  trebille;  Than  me  most  fymh'  a  tipiybythe 

.  .  .        .    'li-il- 

digit  vndre  the  next  figure  bifore  the  triplat,  tlie  whiche  With  his  Then  find  the 

.  i  mi  r  i  i      ri      i  "ii   no  sec°nd  digit. 

vnder-trebille  had  into  a  trebille,  aftenvarde  other  vnderLtrebuleJ * 
had  in  his  produccfcwn,  puttethc  a-way  alle  that  is  ouer  it  in 
32  regarde  of3  [the  triplat.  Then  lade  in  hymself  puttithe  away  that 
bat  is  over  his  hede  as  in  respect  of  hym,  other  as  nyghe  as  thou 
maist:]    That  done,  thow  must  trebille  the  digit  ayene,  and  the  Multiply  the 

...  ,  "rst  triplate 

triplat  is  to   be    sette  vnder  the    next  .3.  figure   as   before,  And  and  the  sec- 

0  .  ond  digit, 

ob  the  vnder-trebille  vnder  the   trebille:   and  than  most   thow   sette  twice  by  this 

digit. 

forward''  the  first  triplat  with  his  vndre-trebille  by  .2.  differences. 

And  than  most  thow  fynde  a  digit  vnder  the  next  figure  before  the 
triplat,  the  which'    withe  his  vnder-t?'iplat  had  in  his  triplat  after- 

2  double  in  MS.  :;  'it  hym-selfe5  in  MS. 

KOMBKYNGE.  E 


Cliapfir  XL     Extraction  of  Cube  Boot. 


Subtract.  warde,  other  vnder  treblis  lad  in  product  ]  It  sitteth*  a-way  aH  that 
is  ouer  his  hede  in  respect  of  the  triplat  than  had  in  hym-self 
cubikly,2  or  as  nyghe  as  ye  may. 


Examples 


Continue 
i  his  process 
till  the  fust 
figure  is 
readied. 


Residuum      |      |      |      |      |      |      |  5  II      |      |      |      |      |  4  ||      |  1  |  0  |  1  |  9  | 

Cubicandus    |8|3|6|5|4|3|2||3|0|0|7|6|7||1|1|6|6|7| 

Triplum         1      |      |  6  |  0  |      |      |      1!      |      |      |  1  |  8  |             |      |      |  4  |      | 

Subtriplim    |2  |      1      |  0|      |     |[8]||      |      |  6|      |      |  7  II      |  2  |.    |      |  2  j 

Kxnmples. 


Nother  me  sballe  not  cesse  of  tlic  fyndynge  of  that  digit,  neither  of     4 
his  fcriplaciown,  nejrer  of  the  triplat-is  3anteriorac?own,  that  is  to  sey, 
settyng  forwarde  by  .•_'.  differences,  Ne  therof  the  vudro-triple  to  be 
put  vndre  the  triple,  Nether  of  the  multiplicackmn  berof,  Neither 
of   the   subtracciozm,  tills   it   conic   to  the  first  figure,  vnder  the      8 
whiche  is  a  digitally  nomine  to  be  found'',  the  whiche  withe  bis 
vndre-treblis  most  be  hade  in  tribles,  After-warde  wt'fc/ioul  vnder- 
treblis  to  he  had'  into  producciozm,  settyng  away  alle  that  is  ouer 
the  hede  of  the  triplat  nombre,  After  had  into  hymselfe  enhikly,    12 
and    sette    alle-way 
that    is    ouer    livni. 


|  To  be  cubicede       |  1  |  7  |  2  |  8  ||  3  |  2  |  7  |  6  |-8 

The  triple              |      |      |  3  |  2  ||     |      |      |  9  | 

1  The  vnder  triple    |      |      |  1  |  2  ||     |[3]|      |  3  |  3 

5pi  ciali  mi 


Also  note  vvele  that 
the  producc/on  coni- 
ynge  of  the  ledyng  of  a  digite  founde4  me  may  adde  to,  and  also 
with  draw   fro  of   the    totalle    nombre    sette   above   that  digit  so 
founde.5     That  done  ought  or  non-lit  most  be  the  residue.     If  it 
he  nought,  ft  is  open  that    the   nombre  pj-oposed*    was  a  cubik<     16 
nombre,  And  his  vote  a  digit  founde  last  with  the  vnder-triples ;   If 
the  rote  therof  w'ex  bade  in  hym-selfe,  and  afterwarde  product  they 
sballe  make  the  first  figwres.     And  yf  ought  be  in  residue,  kepe 
that  wiViOut  in  the  table  ;  and  it  is  open*  that  the  nomine  was  not    20 
a  cubike.     bid  a  digit  last  founde  with  the  vndirtriplis  is  rote  of 
the    in. .,-1    cubike    vndre    the    nombre    proposed*    conteynede,    the 
.  which*  rote  yf  it  be  hade  in  hym  selfe,  And  afterward*  in  a  product 
of  that  shalle  growe  the  most  cubike  vndre  the  nombre  proposed*    24 
couteynede,  And  yf  that  be  added-  to  a  cubiki  the  residue  reserued* 
in  the  table,  woll*  make  the  same  figures  that  ye  had*  first.     6And 

-  MS.  adds  here:  'it  sctteth*  a-way  all*  his  respect.' 

:;  ' ancterioracioun  '  i"  MS. 

1  MS.  adds  here:  'with  an  viidre-triple  /  other  of  an  vndre-triple  in  a 
triple  or  triplal  is  And  after-warde  with  oul  mire  triple  other  vndre-triplis  in 
the  p?-oducl  and  ayene  tlial  product  thai  cometh*  of  the  ledynga  of  a  digit 
foundi  in  hym  self)  cubicalli  '  / 

■  MS.  adds  here  i  'as  thei  had  be  a  divisiouu  made  as  it  ia  opened*:  before. 


/"     '•   of  Numbers,  &c. 


51 


yf  no  digit  after  the  anterioraciown1  may  not  be  found'',  than  put 
there  a  cifre  vndre  a  cifre  vndir  the  thirde  figure,  And  put  forwards  special  case, 
be  figures.  Note  also  wele  that  yf  in  the  nomine  proposede  ther 
i  ben  ii"  place  of  thowsandes,  me  most  begynne  vnder  the  first  figure 
in  the  extracciown  of  the  rote,  some  vsen  forto  distingue  the 
nornbre  by  threes,  and  ay  begynne  forto  wirche  vndre  the  first  of 

Examples. 


The  residue 

1       1      1      1      1      1      1  0  ||      |      |      |      |      |  1  |  1 

The  cubicanchts 

|8|0|0|0|0|0|0]!8|2|4|2|4|1|9 

The  triple 

I      I      I  3 1 0 | 0 |      |             |      |6|      |      |      | 

The  vndert/iple 

|[2]|      |      |  0  |  0  |      |          2|      |      |6|2|      | 

the  last  ternary  other  unco7»plete  nombre,  the  whiche  maner  of 
8  operaciozm  accordethe  with  that  before.     And  this  at  this  tyme 
suffisethe  in  extracciown  of  nomhres  quadrat  or  cuhikes  etc. 


12  3  4  5  6  A  table  of 

one.    x.    an.  hundred*      a  thowsande  /  x.  thowsande  /  An  hundred':  pl'^'iy' 
7 


thowsande  /  A  thowsande  tymes  a  thowsand*     x.  thousand'5  tyines 
12  a  thousand';  /  An  hundred*   thousande  tymes  a  thousande  A  thou- 
sande  thousande  tymes  a  thousande     this  is  the  x  place  etc. 

[Ende.] 
1  Ms.  anteriocaciotm.  -  4  in  MS. 


from  the 

Abacus. 


52 


^ccomptnnqc   bn   counters. 

1  "«»•      ^[  Tlic  secondc  dialoge  of  accomptynge  by  counters. 

Mayster. 
"Tk"T"Owe  that  you  haue  learned  the  conmien  kyndes  of  Arithme- 
\\\     tyke  with  the  penne,  you  shall  se  the  same  art  in  counters  : 
1   ^     whiche  feate  doth  not  only'seruc  for  them  that  can  not  write    4 
and  rede,  hut  also  for  them  that  can  do  bothe,but  haue  not  at  sonic 
tymes  theyr  penne  or  tables  redye  with  them.    This  sovtc  is  in  two 
fourmes  commenly.    The  one  by  lynes,  and  the  other  without  lynes  : 
in  that  y*  hath  lynes,  the  lynes  do  stande  for  the  order  of  places  :    8 
and  in  y*  that  hath  no  lynes,  there  must  he  sette  in  theyr  stede  so 
many  counters  as  shall  nede,  for   echo   lyne   one,  and   they  shall 
supplye  the  stede  of  the  lynes.     8.    By  examples  I  shuld  better 
3  117-7      perceaue  your  meanyuge.     M.  For  example  of  the  ly2ncs :  Lo  here  12 
you  se  .vi.  lynes  whiche  stande  for  syxe  places  so   — im«»» 

J  J  l  1-0  0-0-0 

that  the  nethermost  standeth  for  y"  fyrst  place,  and    l*.j .$?<,'"       ~ 

the  next  ahoue  it,  for  the  second  :  and  so  vpward  tyll  — > 

you  come  to  the  hyghest,  which  is  the  syxte  lyne,  and  standeth  for  16 
the  syxte  place.     Now  whal  is  the  valewe  of  euery  place  or  lyne, 
Numeration,  you  may  perceaue  by  the  figures  whiche  I  haue  set  on  them,  which 
is  accordynge  as  you  learned  before  in  the  Numeration  of  figures  by 
the  penne:  for  the  fyrste  place  is  the  place  of  vnities  or  one,-,  and  20 
euery  counter  set,  in  thai  lyne  betokeneth  hut  one  :  and  the  second e 
•   lyne  is  the  place  of  10,  for  euery  counter  there,  standeth  for  10. 
The  thyrd  lyne  tin'  place  of  hundredes:  the  Fourth  of  thousandes : 
and  so  forth.     S.    Syr  1  do  perceaue  that  the  same  order  is  here  of  21 
3  iiT'-.      lynes,  as  was  in  the  other  figures  8by  places,  so  that  you  shall   DOl 
nede  longer  to  stande  about  Numeration,  excepte  there  he  any  other 
difference.     M.    W  you  do  vndersta?ide  it,  then  how  wyll  you  set 
15431     S.    Thus,   as    I    suppose.    __x_,      —    M.    You   haue   set   yc  28 
places  truely.  hut  your  figures  he   — \ not  mete  for  this  vse : 


Addition  on  the  Counting  Board.  53 

for  the  inetest  figure  in  this  behalfe,  is  the  figure  of  a  counter  round, 
as  you  se  here,  where  I  haue  expressed  that  same    _^_#  _ZIZ= 
suinme.     S.    So  that  you  haue  not  one  figure  for  2,     — #~#~#~# — 

4  nor  3,  nor  4,  and  so  forth,  but  as  many  digettes  as  you  haue,  you 
set  in  the  lowest  lyne  :  and  for  euery  10  you  set  one  in  the  second 
line  :  and  so  of  other.  But  I  know  not  by  what  reason  you  set 
that  one  counter  for  500  betwene  two  lynes.  M.  you  shall  re- 
8  member  this,  that  when  so  euer  you  nede  to  set  downe  5,  50,  or 
500,  or  5000,  or  so  forth  any  other  nomber,  whose  numerator  lis  »  nsa. 
5,  you  shall  set  one  counter  for  it,  in  the  next  space  aboue  the  lyne 
that  it  hath  his  denomination  of,  as  in  this  example  of  that  500, 

12  bycause  the  numerator  is  5,  it  must  be  set  in  a  voyd  space:  and 
bycause  the  denominator  is  hundred,  I  knowe  that  his  place  is  the 
voyde  space  next  aboue  hundredes,  that  is  to  say,  aboue  the  thyrd 
lyne.     And  farther  you  shall  marke,  that  in  all  workynge  by  this 

1G  suite,  yf  you  shall  sette  downe  any  summe  betwene  4  and  10,  for 
the  fyrste  parte  of  that  nomber  you  shall  set  downe  5,  &  then  so 
many  counters  more,  as  there  reste  nowbers  aboue  5.  And  this  is 
true  bothe  of  digettes  and  articles.     And  for  example  I  wyll  set 

20  downe  this  summe  287965,    ~*      *-*#  which  sumine  yf  you 

marke  well,  you  nede  none    - *~j~l»i*m         other  examples  for  to 
lerne    the    numeration    of         ^i_  2this  forme.    But  this     mis*. 

shal  you  marke,  that  as  you  dyd  in  the  other  kynde  of  arithmetike, 

24  set  a  pricke  in  the  places  of  thousa?Rles,  in  this  worke  you  shall 
sette  a  starre,  as  you  se  here.     S.  Then  I  perceave  numeration,  but 
I  praye  you,  howe  shall  I  do  in  this  arte  to  adde  two  summes  or  Addition. 
more  together'?     M.  The  easyest  way  in  this  arte  is,  to  adde  but  2 

28  summes  at  ones  together  :  how  be  it  you  may  adde  more,  as  I 
wyll  tell  you  anone.  Therfore  when  you  wyll  adde  two  suwimes, 
you  shall  fyrst  set  downe  one  of  them,  it  forseth  not  whiche,  and 
then  by  it  drawe  a  lyne  crosse  the  other  lynes.     And  afterward 

32  set  downe  the  other  su?nme,  so  that  that  lyne  may  be  betwene  them, 


as  yf  you  wolde  adde  2G5'J  to  8342, 
you  must  set  your  sumnies  as  you  se 


here.  And  then  yf  you  lyst,  you  3may  adde  the  one  to  the  other 
36  in  the  same  place,  or  els  you  may  adde  them  both  together  in  a 
newe  place  :  which  waye,  bycause  it  is  moste  playnest,  1  wyll  showe 
you  fyrst.  Therfore  wyl  I  begynne  at  the  vnites,  whiche  in  the 
fyrst  summe  is  but  2,  and  in  y'  second  surame  9,  that  maketh  11, 
40  those  do  1  take  vp,  and  fur  them  1  set  11  in  the  new  roume,  thus. 


54 


Addition  hy  Counters. 


1   119  b. 


a  120  a. 


0-0-0- 


_#^#-I-  Then  do  T  take  vp  all  ye  articles  vnder 

— *-j-g —    a  hundred,  which  in  the  fyrst  sumnie 


^^ 


are  40,  and  in  the  second  suinme  50,  that  maketh  90  :  or  you  may 
saye  better,  that  in  the  fyrste  suinme  there  are  1  articles  of  10,  and 
in  the  seconde  suinme  5,  which  make  9,  but  then  take  hede  that 
you  sette  them  in  theyr  xryght    -*-#*j 
lynes  as  you  se  here.     Where  I  - 

haue  taken  awaye  40  from  the  fyrste  summe,  and  50  from  ye  8 
second,  and  in  theyr  stede  I  haue  set  90  in  the  thyrde,  whiche  I 
haue  set  playnely  y*  you  myght  well  perceaue  it :  how  be  it  seynge 
that  90  with  the  10  that  was  in  yp  thyrd  roume  all  redy,doth  make 
100,  1  myghte  better  for  tliose  G  counters  set  1  in  the  thyrde  12 
lyne,  thus  ;  _^  ~Z  For  it  is  all  one  summe  as  you  may  se,  but 
it  is  beste,  —    neuer  to  set  5  counters  iu  any  line,  for  that 

may  be  done  with  1  counter  in  a  hygher  place.  S.  I  iudge  thai 
good  reaso?i,  for  many  are  vnnedefull,  where  one  wyll  serue.  16 
M.  Well,  then  -wyll  1  adde  forth  of  hundredes :  I  fynde  3  in  the 
fyrste  summe,  and  G  in  the  seconde,  whiche  make  900,  them  <.h>  I 
take  vp  and  set  in  the  thyrd  roume  where  is  one  hundred  all  redy, 
to  whiche  1  put  900,  and  it  wyll  be  1000,  therfore  I  set  one  20 
counter  in  the  fourth  lyne  for  them  all, 
as  you  se  here.      Then  adde  I  ye 


thou- 


-0*0 -0  \-0-0- 


sandes  together,  whiche  in  the  fyrst  summe  are  8000,  an>/  in  \p 
second  "2000,  that  maketh  10000:  them  do  1  take  vp  from  those  -I 
two  places,  and  for  them  I  set  one  counter  in  the  fyfte  lyne.  and 
then  appereth  as    z^ljzz :    you  se,  to  be  11001,  for  so  many  doth 

3  1206.     amount    of    the         m         addition   of   8342   to   2659.       >.   Syr, 

this  1  do  pereeave  :  but  how  shall  1  sel  one  sumnie  to  an  other,  not  28 
chaungynge  them  to  a  thyrde  place  !  M.  Marke  well  how  I  do  it : 
I  wyll  adde  together  65436,  and  3245, 
whiche  fyrste  I  set  downe  thus.  Then 
do  1  begynne  with  the  smalest,  which 
in  the  fyrst  summe  is  .  thai  do  1  take  vp,  and  wold  put  to  the 
other  5  in  the  seconde  summe,  sauynge  that  two  counters  can  nol 
be  set  in  a  voyd  place  of  5,  but  for  them  bothe  I  musl  sei  I  in  the 
seconde  lyne,  which  is  the  place  of  L0,  therfore  1  take  vp  the  5  of  36 
the  fyrsi  Bumme,  and  the  5  of  the  seconde,  and  for  them  I  set  1 

*  121  a.  in  the  second  lyne,  las  you  se  here. 
Then  do  I  lyke  wayes,  take  vp  the  1 
counters    of    the    fyrste    summe    and      —  -#  "      "— -  40 


J«t 


0000 


32 


-Jk 

*0 

—  0-0 

0  0-0-0- 

0-0-0-0  - 

Subtraction  on  the  Counting  Board.  55 

second e  lyne  (which  make  40)  and  adde  them  to  the  4  counters  of 
the  same  lyne,  in  the  second  summe,  and  it  maketh  80,  But  as  1 
sayde  1  maye  not  conueniently  set  aboue  4  counters  in  one  lyne, 

4  therfore  to  those  4  that  I  toke  vp  in  the  fyrst  summe,  I  take  one 
also  of  the  seconde  summe,  and  then  haue  I  taken  vp  50,  for  whiche 
5  counters  I  sette  downe  one  in  the  space  oner  yc  second  lyne,  as 
here  doth,  appere. 1 — 9 1  and  then  is  there  80,     1121 6 

8  as   well   w*  those    ~x"#"#~*~l~# ^»  #  »  4    counters,    as   yf    I 

had  set  downe  ye I  • — other   4    also.      Xow 

do  I  take  the  200  in  the  fyrste  su??znie,  and  adde  them  to  the  400 
in  the  seconde  summe,  and  it  maketh  GOO,  therfore  I  take  vp  the  2 
12  counters  in  the  fyrste  summe,  and  3  of  them  in  the  seconde  summe, 
and  for  them  5  I  set  1  in  ye  space  aboue,  ———- 
thus.  Then  I  take  yp  3000  in  ye  fyrste  Zx1^1 
gumrne,  vnto  whiche  there  are  none  in  the     


3= 


16  second  summe  agreynge,  therfore  I  do  onely  remoue  those  3  counters 
from   the   fyrste   summe   into   the   seconde,  as    here   doth   appere. 

—» —  -And  so  you  see  the  hole  sivmme,  that  amourcteth    l2  i--« 

•*•-•—      of  the  addytiow  of  654.30  with  3245  to  be  6868[1]. 


0 And  yf  you  haue  marked  these  two  examples  well, 


-x- 

20  = 

you  nede  no  farther  enstructioM  in  Addition  of  2  only  summes  : 
but  yf  you  haue  more  then  two  summes  to  adde,  you  may  adde 
them  thus.     Fyrst  adde  two  of  them,  and  then  adde  the  thyrde, 

24  and  ye  fourth,  or  more  yf  there  be  so  many  :  as  yf  I  wolde  adde 
2679  with  4286  and  1391.  Fyrste  I  adde  the  two  fyrste  summes 
thus.  -x_#a#  I_tf-#-#-#_ir^>'  3And  then  I  adde  the 

m~TV^  i*B ~m t-*I  —  thyrde     thereto    thus. 

28  And  so  of  more  yf  you  haue       x  9  T~^*~ 

them.       S.    Xowe    I   thynke     ===g#»=#IgIt— & 


3  122  b. 


m -0  »• 


beste  that  you  passe   forth  to   Subtraction,  except  there   be  any 
wayes  to  examyn  this  maner  of  Addition,  then  I  thynke  that  were 

32  good  to  be  knowen  nexte.     M.  There  is  the  same  profe  here  that  is 

in  the  other  Addition  by  the  penne,  I  meane  Subtraction,  for  that  Subtraction, 
onely  is  a  sure  waye  :  but  consyderynge  that  Subtraction  must  be 
fyrste  knowen,  I  wyl  fyrste  teache  you  the  arte  of  Subtraction,  and 

36  that  by  this  example  :  I  wolde  subtracte  2892  out  of  8746.  These 
summes  must  1  set  downe  as  1  dyd  in  Addition:  but  here  it  is 
best  'to  set  the  lesser  nomber  fyrste,    Xl   0^  T~#I»*»  uea'sic) 

thus.     Then  shall  I  begynne  to  sub-      — •*»-»-#-t1#a#-#-# — 

40  tracte  the  greatest  nombres  fyrste  (contrary  to  the  vse  of  the  penne) 


G  Subtraction  by  Counters. 

v1  is  the  bhousandes  in  this  example  :  tlierfore  I  fynd  amongost  the 
thousandes  2,  for  which  I  withdrawe  so  many  ivom  the  seconde 
sunime  (where  arc  8)  and  so  remayneth  there  G,  as  this  example 

showeth.     -+—m T-gS  •    ^ien  ^°  ^  ^ce  wayes  with     1 

the  hun-    -*1*1*1*1)  ij  r>—    dredes,   of   whiche   in   the 

i  ii66.  fyrste  sunime  ll  fynde  8,  and  is  the  seconde  summe  but  7,  out  of 
whiche  I  can  not  take  8,  therfore  thus  muste  1  do  :  I  muste  loke 
how  moche  my  summe  dyffereth  from  10,  whiche  1  fynde  here  to  8 
be  2,  tlien  must  I  bate  for  my  sumrne  of  800,  one  thousande,  and 
set  downe  the  excesse  of  hundredes,  that  is  to  saye  2,  for  so  moche 
100[0]  is  more  then  I  shuld  take  vp.  Therfore  fro??!  the  fyrsto 
su??zme  I  take  that  800,  and  from  the  second  sumuie  where  are  1  2 
G000,  I  take  vp  one  thousande,  and  leue  5000;  but  then  set  I 
downe  the  200  unto  the  700  y*  are  there  all  redye,  and  make  them 
900  thus.     ~|  T     9  Then  come  I  to  the  articles 

of  tt'/mes    — #-#*#-»-J— 0gm-e-0 —    where  in  tlie  fyrste  summe  16 

-  iir.i.  1  fynde  90,  -and  in  the  seconde  sumnie  but  only  40:  Now  con- 
syderyng  that  90  can  not  be  bated  from  10,  I  loke  how  moche 
yl  90  doth  dyffer  from  the  next  summe  aboue  it,  that  is  100  (or 
elles  whiche  is  all  to  one  effecte,  1  loke  how  moch  9  doth  dyffer  20 
from  10)  and  I  fynd  it  to  be  1,  then  in  the  stede  of  that  90,  1  do 
take  from  the  second  summe  100:  but  consyderynge  that  it  is  10 
to  moche,  1  set  downe  1  in  y'  nexte  lyne  beneth  for  it,  as  you  se 
here.     Sauynge   that  lure       ,  T    »  1   hane   sel    one  24 

counter  in  ye  space  in  stede    — g  m  I  ~~3t  OI  5  in  y'  nexte 

lyne.  And  thus  haue  1  subtracted  all  saue  two,  which  I  must  bate 
from  the  6  in  the  second  summe,  and  there  wyll  remayne  1,  thus. 

■ So  y*  yf  1  subtracte  2892  fro???  8746,  the  re- 28 

-*  —    mayncr  wyll  be  5854,  sAnd  that  this  is  truely 

wrought,  yon  inaye  proue  by  Addition:    for  yf  you  adde  to  this 
remayner  the  same  su??inic  that  yon  dyd  subtracte,  then  wyll  the 
formar  su???mc  8746  amount  agayne.     S.  That  wyll  1  proue:  and  32 
fyrst  1   set   the  su???me  that  was  subtracted,  which  was  2892,  and 
the//  the  i < -i i i.i \  uer  585  1,  thus,    'then 
do   1  adde  fyrst  \'   2  to   i,  whiche 


-i—m-0  0  0  — 


maketh  6,  so  take  1  vp  5  of  those  counters,  and  in  theyr  stede  1  3G 

sette    1    in   the   spaco,   as   liere  appereth.     -ii-#i 

■'Then  do  1  adde  the  90  nexte  aboue  to  * 

the  50,  and  it  maketh  I  I",  tlierfore  1  take  vp  those  6  counters,  and 

for  them   I  sette  1  to  the  hundredes  in  ye  thyrde  lyne,  and  1  in  y'  40 


*^i£i 


Subtraction  by  Counters.  57 

second  lyne,  thus,     -n-g»»- |~g  Then  do  I  come  to 

the  hundredes,  of    ===-  *~*  |'«|'»  whiche  1  fynde  8  in 

the  fyrst  summe,  and  9  in  y"  second,  that  malteth  1700,  therfore  I 

■1  take  vp  those  9  counters,  and  in  theyr  stede  1  sette  1  in  tlie  .iiii. 

lyne,  and  1  in  the  space  nexte  beneth,  and  2  in  the  thyrde  lyne, 


as  you  se  here,     _,|_#_#_ili» Then  is  there  lefte  in  the 


•*• 


Egg 


f\  rste    summe |-ga»*-»  —      hut  only  2000,  whiche  I 

8  shall  take  vp  from  thence,  ami  sit  lin  the  same  lyne  in  ye  second      i  ns&. 
su?nnie,  to  y"  one  y*  is  there  all  recly  :    and  then  wyll  the  hole 
sumine  appere  (as  you  may  wel  se)  to  he  >s7  16, 
which  was  y"  fyrst  grosse  summe,  and  therfore 

12  1  do  perceaue,  that  I  hadde  well  subtracted  before.  And  thus 
you  may  se  how  Subtraction  maye  be  tryed  by  Addition.  S.  I 
perceaue  the  same  order  here  w*  counters,  y*  I  lerned  before  in 
figures.     M.   Then   let   me    se   howe    can    you    trye   Addition   by 

16  .Subtraction.  S.  Fyrste  I  wyl  set  forth  this  example  of  Addition 
where  I  haue  added  2189  to  4988,  and  the  hole  summe  appereth 
to    he    7177.     -w-0-0 —       J tmtrirtrYif9 —       -Xuwe    to    trye      2  U9  (I. 

0- ■ — . ■  -000—0    0      I      00 

whether  that    ~z~%»%i%Z^Azm^\^ZAZ&%ZZZ    summe   be   well 

20  added  or  no,  I  wyll  subtract  one  of  the  fyrst  two  siwinies  from 
the  thynl,  and  yf  I  haue  well  done  ye  remayner  wyll  be  lyke 
that  other  summe.  As  for  example  :  I  wyll  subtracte  the  fyrste 
summe  from  the  thyrde,  whiche  I  set  thus     -1  \-0-m  ^0^0 

24  in  theyr  order.  Then  do  I  subtract  2000  =§Sg  g~i~T~g«S== 
of  the  fyrst. •  .-ummc  frow  \ '  second  su??ime,  and  then  remayneth 
there  5000  thus.       x  1     •  Then  in  the  thynl  lyne, 

I  subtract  ye  100     ~~i$i'i~m~T~m^=~    of    the    fyrste    summe, 

28  fro///  the  second  summe,  where  is  onely  100  also,  and  then  in  y1' 
thyrde  lyne  resteth  nothyng.     Then  in  the  second  lyne  with  his 
space  om-r  hym,   1  fynde  80,  which    I   shuld  subtract  3from  the     3 1194. 
other  su?nme,  then  seyng  there  are  bul  only  70  I  must  take  it  out 

32  of  some  hygher  summe,  which  is  here  only  5000,  therfore  1  take 
vp  5000,  and  seyng  that  it  is  to  inoch  by  4920,  1  sette  downe  so 
many  in  the  secondc  roume,  whiche  with  the  70  beyngo  there  all 
redy  do  make  1990,  &  then  the  summes     x t  t  »0  B  0 

36  doth  .-tuple  thus.     Yet  remayneth  there       -,.  _  _  f  *%*  *  * — 

0*0    0-0    *-—0*0 

in  the  fyrst  summe  9,  to  be  hated  from  the  second  summe,  where 

in  that  place  of  vnities  dothe  appere  only  7,  then  1  nmste  bate  a 

hygher  summe,  that  is  to  saye  L0,  but  seynge  that  L0  is  more  then 

40  9  (which  1  shulde  abate)  by  1,  therfore  shall  1  take  vp  one  counter 

from  the  seconde  lyne,  awl  set  downe  the  same-  in  the  fyrst  *or     '-  120 «. 


58  Multiplication  hy  Counters. 

lowest  lyne,  as  you  se  here.     Z^zi_###_#_# And  so   haue   I 

ended   this   worke,  and  the      — *£*%%  Biimme  appereth 

to  be  ye  .same,  whiche  was  yc  seeonde  sumnie  of  my  addition,  and 
therfore  I  perceaue,  I  haue  wel  done.  M.  To  stande  longer  about  4 
this,  it  is  Lnt  folye :  excepte  that  this  yon  maye  also  vnderstande, 
that  many  do  begynne  to  subtracte  with  counters,  not  at  the 
hyghest  summe,  as  I  haue  taughl  you,  but  at  the  nethermoste,  as 
they  do  vse  to  adde  :  and  when  the  sumnie  to  be  abatyd,  in  any  8 
lyne  appeareth  greater  then  the  other,  then  do  they  borowe  one 
of  the  next  hygher  roume,  as  for  example:   yf  they  shuld  abate 

18 1G  from  2378,  they  set  ye  summes  thus.    -u_#g !-»-» 

1  1201.-     lAnd  fyrste  they  take  6  whiche  is  in  the    z=ziJ»-*-~ *\Z$%-J—-  I2 


lion 


lower  lyne,  and  his  space  from  8  in  the  same  ronmes,  in  y'  second 
sumnie,  and  yet  there  remayneth  2  counters  in  the  lowest  lyne. 
Then  in  the  second  lyne  must  4  be  subtracte  from  7,  and  so 
remayneth  there  3.  Then  8  in  the  thyrde  lyne  and  his  space,  from  16 
3  of  the  second  sumnie  can  not  he,  therfore  do  they  bate  it  from  a 
hygher  roume,  that  is,  from  1000,  and  bycause  that  1000  is  to 
luoeh  by  200,  therfore  must  I  sette  downe  200  in  the  thyrde  lyne, 
after  I  haue  taken  vp  1000  from  the  fourth  lyne  ;  then  is  there  yet  20 
1000  in  the  fourth  lyne  of  the  fyrst  sumnie,  whiche  yf  1  withdrawe 
from  the  seeonde  summe,  then  dotli  all  ye  figures  stande  in  this  order. 
~7TT    ~~  So  that  (as  you  se)  it  differeth  not  greatly  whether 

— '  ~b~b  # —      you  ^e§ynne  subtraction  at  the  hygher  lynes,  or  24 

*i2ia.     at  '-'the  lower.     How  be  it,  as  some  menne  lyke  the  one  wave  beste, 
Muitipiica-     so  some  lyke  tlie  other:  therfore  you  now  knowyng  bothe,  may  vse 
whiche  you  lyst.     lint  nowe  touchynge  Multiplication  :  you  shall 
set  your  nombers  in  two  roumes,  as  yon  dyd  in  those  two  other  28 
kyndes,  but  so   thai    the   multiplier  he   set  in   the   fyrste   roume. 
Then  shall  you  begyn  with   the   hyghest  no?nbers  of  y''  seeonde 
roume,  and  multiply  them   fyrst  after  this  sort.      Take   that   ouer- 
niosl  lyne  in  your  fyrsi  workynge,  as  yf  it  were  the  lowest  lyne,  32 
setting  mi  it   some   mouable   marke,  as  you  Iyste,  and   loke  how- 
many  counters  he  in  hym,  take  them  vp,  and  for  them  set  downe 
the   hole   multyplyer,  so  many  tymes   as  you  toke   vp  counters, 
reckenyng,  1  saye  that  lyne  for  the  vnites:  and  when  you  haue  so  36 
done    with    the    hvgheest    no?ftber   then    come    to    the    nexte    lyne 
beneth,  and  do  euen  so  with  it.  and  so  with  ye  next,  tyll  you  haue 
done  all.     And  yf  there   lie  any  uomber  in  a  space,  then  for  it 

*vi\i.     3shall  you  take  ye  multiplyer  5  tymes,  and  then  must  you  recken  40 
that  lyne  for  the  vnites  whiche  is  nexte  beneth  that  space  :  or  els 


Multiplication  hy  Con/din. 


59 


after  a  shorter  way,  you  shall  take  only  halfe  the  multyplyer,  but 
then  shall  you  take  the  lyne  nexte  aboue  that  space,  for  the  lyne  of 
vnites :  but  in  suche  workynge,  yf  chau?zce  your  multyplyer  be  an 

4  odde  noniber,  so  that  you  can  not  take  the  halfe  of  it  iustly,  then 
muste  you  take  the  greater  halfe,  and  set  downe  that,  as  if  that  it 
were  the  iuste  halfe,  and  farther  you  shall  set  one  counter  in  the 
space  beneth  that  line,  which  you  reckon  for  the  lyne  of  vnities,  or 

8  els  only  remoue  forward  the  same  that  is  to  be  multyplyed.  S.  Yf 
you  set  forth  an  example  hereto  I  thynke  I  shal  perceaue  you. 
M.  Take  this  exa?3iple :  I  wold  multiply  1542  by  3G5,  therfore  1 
set  yp  numbers  thus.     _, ,_  \-*m  1Then  fyrste  I  be- 

12  gynne  at  the  1000  in  ~=0£z^z\z+-»»-»:=z  y"  hyghest  rounie, 
as  yf  it  were  yp  fyrst  place,  &  I  take  it  vp,  settynge  downe  for  it 
so   often   (that  is   ones)   the   multyplyer,  which  is   3G5,  thus,   as 


you  se   here  : 


u*=± 


where  for  the  one 

4^>     vp    from    the 

haue  sette  downe 


16  counter  taken  -x- 
fourth  lyne,  I  HI 
other  G,  whiche  make  yc  siu/nne  of  the  multyplyer,  reckenynge  that 
fourth  lyne,  as  yf  it  were  the  fyrste  :  whiche  thyng  I  haue  marked 

20  by  the  baud  set  at  the  begynnyng  of  ye  same,  S.  I  perceaue  this 
well :  fur  in  dede,  this  sumnie  that  you  haue  set  downe  is  3G5000, 
for  so  moche  doth  amount  2of  1000,  multiplyed  by  3G5.  M.  Well 
then  to  go  forth,  in  the  nexte  space  I  fynde  one  counter  which  I 

24  remoue  forward  but  take  not  vp,  but  do  (as  in  such  case  I  must) 
set  downe  the  greater  halfe  of  my  multiplier  (seyng  it  is  an  odde 
nomber)  which  is  1S2,  and  here  I  do  styll  let  that  fourth  place- 
stand,  as  yf  it  were  y" 

28  fyrst:  as  in  this  fourme 
you  so,  where  I  haue  set 


%eL 


m  »- 


P*£T 


±&i 


•£*> 


this  multiplycatiu//  with  yp  other  :  but  fur  the  ease  of  your  vnder- 

sta/zdynge,  1  haue  set  a  ly till  lyne  betwene  them  :  now  shulde  they 

32  both  in  one  suwinie  stand  thus. 


3 Howe  be  it  an  other  fourme  ~"~j 
to  multyplye   suche  counters  


::^ 


<£0 

3  123  a. 


in  space  is   this:    Fyrst  to  remoue  the  fynger  to  the   lyne   nexte 

3G  benethe  y"  space,  and  then  to  take  vp  y€  counter,  arid  to  set  downe 

ye  multiplyer  .v.  tymes,  as  here  you  se.     Which  suwmes  yf  you  do 


^==fi£i= 


::•• 


•»•  • 


_# 


v^ 

adde  together  into  one  suwzme,  you  dial  perceaue  that  it  wyll  be  y 


CO 


Multiplication  by  Counters, 


l  121)  I,. 


2  Vila. 


«& 


*  185  a. 


same  y*  appeareth  of  ye  other  working  before,  so  that  1botlie  sortes 
are  to  one  entent,  but  as  the  other  is  much  shorter,  so  this  is 
playner  to  reason,  for  suclic  as  hauc  had  small  exercyse  in  this  arte. 
Not  withstandynge  you  maye  adde  them  in  your  mynde  before  you    4 
sette  them  dovvne,  as  in  this  example,  yen  myghte  hauc  sayde  5 
tymes  300  is  1500,  and  5  tymes  GO  is  300,  also  5  tymes  5  is  25, 
whiche  all  put  together  do  make  1825,  which  yon  maye  at  one 
tyme  sot  downc  yf   you   lyste.     But  nowe  to  go  forth,   I   must    8 
remoue  the  hand  to  the  iiexte  counters,  whiche  are  in  the  second 
lyne,  and  there  must  1  take  vp  those  4  counters,  settynge  downe 
for  them  my  multiplyer  4  tymes,  whiche  thynge  other  1  maye  do 
at  4  tymes  seuerally,  or  elles  I  may  gather  that  hole  summe  in  my  12 
mynde  fyrste,  and  then  set  it  downe:   as  to   -aye  4   tymes  3(>0 
is  1200:  4  tymes  GO  are  240:  and  4  tymes  5  make  20:  y*  is  in 
all   1460,  vl   shall  I  set 
downe  also  :  as  here  you 
se.    2  whiche  yf  I  ioyne  *®     — -* —    .'-#-#- 

in  one  summe  with  the   forruar  nombers,  it  wyll   appeare   thus. 
_( • Then  to  eiule  this  inultiplycatiou,  1   re- 


Ufzlz 


i&±± 


%*- 


1G 


Ut± 


^m- 
-»-•- 


moue    the   fynger   to   the    lowest,  lyne,  20 
where  are  onelj   2,  them  do  1  take  vp, 
and  in  thcyr  stede  do  I  set  downc  twyse  3G5,  that  is  730,  for 
which  1  set  sone  in  the  space  abone  the  thyrd  lyne  for  500,  and  2 
more  in  the  thyrd  lyne  with  that  one  that  is  there  all  redye,  and  24 
the  reste  in  theyr  order,  and  so  banc  1  ended  the  hole  summe  thus. 

, . » Wherby   you   se,   that    1542   (which  is 

K»  the  nomber  of  yeares  syth  Ch[r]ystes 

incarnation)  beyng  multyplyed  by  3G5  28 


*£L 


which  is  the  nomber  of  dayes  in  one  yeare)  dothe  amounts  vnto 
5G2830,  which  declareth  ye  nomber  of  daies  sith  Chrystes  incarna- 
tion vnto  the  ende  of  15424  yeares.  (besyde  385  dayes  and  12 
houres  for  lepe  yeares).  S.  Now  wyll  1  proue  by  an  other  example,  32 
as  this:  40  labourers  (alter  6d.  \'  day  for  eche  man)  haue  wrought 
28  dayes,  I  wold  J know  what  theyr  wages  doth  amount  vnto:  In 
this  case  muste  I  worke  doublely  :  fyrsl  I  must  multyplye  the 
nomber  of  the  labourers  by  \'  wages  of  a  man  for  one  day,  so  wyll  3G 
\'  charge  of  one  daye  amount:  then  secondarely  shall  I  multyply 
thai  charge  of  one  daye,  by  the  hole  nomber  of  dayes,  and  so  wyll 
the  hole  summe  appeare  :  l\  rsl  therefore  I  shall  set  the  sumines  thus. 
4  1342  in  original. 


Division  on  the  Counting  Board.  61 

T  Where  in  the  fyiste  space  is  the  multyplyer 

— -^\-0-0-0-0 —  (y*  is  one  dayes  wages  for  one  man)  and  in 
the  second  space  is  set  the  nomber  of  the  worke  men  to  be  multy- 
4  plyed  :  the??  save  I,  G  tymes  1  (reckenynge  that  second  lyne  as  the 
lyne  of  vnites)  raaketh  24,  for  whiche  summe  I  shulde  set  2 
counters  in  the  thyrcle  lyne,  and  4  in  the  seconde,  therfore  do  I  set 
2   in  the  thyrde  lyne,  and  let  the  4  stand   styll  in  the   seconde 

So  apwereth  the  hole  dayes  wages      >  125  6. 
•z*E*Ez.     that  is  20s.     Then  do  I  multiply 
agayn  the  same  summe  by  the  nomber  of  dayes  and  fyrste  I  sette 


lyne,   thus.1     

to  be  2-t0d.     =z 


the  nombers,  thus. 


IZZZZ Tliera   by  cause   there 

-0-0-0-0 —      dyuers  lynes,  I  shall 


12  are     counters     in     - — Z*V~0 

begynne  with  the  hyghest,  and  take  them  vp,  settynge  for  them 
the  multyplyer  so  many  tymes,  as]  I  fcoke  vp  counters,  ye  is  twyse, 
then  wyll  ye  su??ime  stande  thus.     ZZZIZZ g  Then  come 

10  1    to    ye    seconde    lyne,   and   take  \-0-0  0-0 —       vp  those  4 

cou/ders,  settynge  for  them  the  multiplyer  foure  tymes,  so  wyll  the 

hole  summe  appeare  thus.-  \~iP  80  is  the  hole  wages 

000 

of    40    workeme/;,    for    28  \-0-m  dayes   (after   6d(.   eche 


20  daye  for  a  man)  G720d'.   that  is  5G0s.  or  28  l'i.     M.  Now  if  you 

wold  proue  Multiplycatum,  the  surest  way  is  by  Dyuision  :  therfore  Diuision. 
wyll  1  oner  passe  it  tyll  1   haue  taught  you  ye  arte  of  Diuision, 
whiche  you  shall  worke  thus.     Fyrste  sette  downe  the  Diuisor  for 

24  fcare  of  forgettynge,  and  then  set  the  nomber  that  shalhe  deuided, 
at  ye  ryghte  syde,  so  fane  from  the  diuisor,  that  the  quotient  may 
he  set  hetwene  them:  as  for  example:  Yf  225  shepe  cost  45  l'i. 
what  dyd  euery  shepe  cost?     To  knowe  this,  I  shulde  diuide  Hie 

28  hole  summe,  that  is  45  l'i.  by  225,  but  that  can  not  be,  therfore 
must  I  fyrste  reduce  that  4.")  l'i.  into  a  lessor  denomination,  as  into 
6hyllynges:  then  I  multiply  15  by  20,  ami  it  is  900,  that  summe 
shall  I  diuide   by   the   nowiber  of   -sliepe,  whiche   is   225,  these     s  12r,,,. 

32  two   nombers    therfore    I    sette    thus. t — r 

Then  begynne   I   at  the  hyghest   lyne    zE**?i:i      J— 


0-0-0- 


of  the  diuident,  and  seke  how  often  T  may  haue  the  diuisor  therin, 

and  that maye  I  do  4  tymes,  then  say  I,  1  tymes  2  are  8,  whyche  yf 

36  I  take  from  9,  there  resteth  hut  1,  thus   — 


And   bycause  1   founde  the   diuisor   I     — 0J0 


4== 

1  -00-0-0 


tymes  in  the  diuidente,  I  haue  set  (as  you  se)  4  in  the  myddle 
roume,  which   'is  the  place  of  the  quotient:  hut  now  must  t  take     tma. 
40  the  reste  of  the  diuisor  as  often  out,  of  the  remayner :  therfore  come 


62 


Division  by  Counters. 


'  127  6. 


I  to  the  seconde  lyne  of  the  diuisor,  sayeag  2  foure  fcymes  make  8, 
take  8  from  10,  and  there  resteth  2,      | ,  t 

**»  f 


thus.     Then  come   I  to  the  lowest 

nomber,  which  is  5,  and  multyply  it  i  tyines,  so  is  it  20,  that  take 
I  from  20,  and  there  remayneth  nothynge,  so  that  I  se  my  quotient 
to  be  i,  whiche  are  in  valewe  shyllynges,  for  so  was  the  diuident; 
and  therby  I  knowe,  that  yf  225  shepe  dyd  coste  -15  l'i.  euery  shepe 
coste  1  s.  S.  Tliis  can  1  do,  as  you  shall  perceaue  by  this  example  :  8 
Yf  160  sowldyars  do  spende  euery  monetli  68  l'i.  what  spendeth 
eehe  man  ?  Fyrst  1byca"use  I  can  not  diuide  the  68  by  160,therfore 
1  wyll  turne  the  poundes  into  pennes  by  multiplicacion,  so  shall 
there   be   16320d'.     Nowe    mush'    1    diuide    this    summe   by  the  12 


nomber  of  sowldyars,  therfore  I  set  them     _lt . 

in   order,    thus.      Then    begyn    1    at   the     — •*— 


u 


rt+ 


hyghest  place  of  the  diuidente,  sekynge  my  diuisor  there,  whiche  I 
fynde  ones,  Therfore  set   I  1  in  the  nether  lyne.     M.  Not  in  the  16 
nether   line  of    the   hole   summe,  but  in  the   nether  lyne  of   that 
worke,  whiche  is  the  thyrde  lyne.     S.  So  standeth  it  with  reason. 
M.  Then  thus  do  they  stande.2    | x        T      T  Then    seke 

1  agayne  in  the  reste,  how  -  **  — \-»~m —  -  often  I  may  20 
fynde  my  diuisor,  and  I  se  that  in  the  300  1  myghte  fynde  100 
thre  tymes,  but  then  the  60  wyll  not  be  so  often  founde  in  20, 
therfore  I  fake  2  for  my  quotient:  then  take  I  100  twyse  from 
300,  and  there  resteth  100,  out  of  whiche  with  the  20  (that  maketh  24 
120)  I  may  take  GO  also  twyse,  and  then  standeth  the  nombers  thus, 
n  T~  T~  swhere  I  haue  sette  the  quotient  2  in  the 
— #*— f  [  lowest   lyne:    So   is   euery  sowldyars   portion 

102d'.  that  is  8s.  6d\     M.   But  ye1   bycause  you  shall  perceaue  28 
iustly  the  reason  of  Diuision,  if  shall  he  good  that  you  do  set  your 
diuisor  styll  agaynst  those  nombres   from  whiche  yon  do  take  it: 
as  by  this  example  1  wyll  declare.     Yf  y"  purchace  of  200 
of   ground  dyd   coste   290  l'i.  what   dyd   one   acre   coste  1     Fyrst  32 
wy]    I    turne   the   poundes   into   pennes,  so   wyll  there  he   69600  d'- 
Then  in   settynge  downe  these  nombers   1   shall  do  thus.     Fyrsi 
set   the   diuident   on    the   ryghte   hande   as   it   oughte,  and   then 

—2 'the  diuisor  on  (lie  lefte  hande  agaynsl  36 

***#*  »    z  those  nombers,  fro///  which  1  entende 

" '■   to    take    hym     fyrst    as    here    you    se, 

wher    1    haue   set   the   diuisor   two   lynes   hygher  the//    is   theyr 
owne  place.     S.  This  is  lyke  the  order  of  diuision  by  the  penne.  40 


Division  by  Court  63 

M.  Truth  you  say,  and  nowe  must  I  set  ye  quotient  of  this 
worke  in  the  thyrde  lyne,  for  that  is  the  lyne  of  vnities  in  respecte 
to  the  diuisor  in  this  worke.     Then  I  seke  howe  often  the  diuisor 

4  maye  be  founde  in  the  diuident,  and  that  I  fynde  3  tymes, 
then  set  I  3  in  the  thyrde  lyne  for  the  quotient,  and  take  awaye 
that  60000  fro?//,  the  diuident,  and  farther  I  do  set  the  diuisor 
one  line  lower,  as  yow   se   here.     H  \-0-0- 

8  'And  then  seke  I  how  often  the     


0-0-0 


p^z^i 


diuisor  wyll  be  taken  from  the  nomber  agaynste  it,  whiche  wyll  be 
4  tymes  and  1  remaynynge.  S.  But  what  yf  it  chaunce  that  when 
the  diuisor  is  so  remoued,  it  can  not  be  ones  taken   out  of   the 

12  diuident  agaynste  it  ?  M.  Then  must  the  diuisor  be  set  in  an 
other  line  lower.  S.  So  was  it  in  diuision  by  the  penne,  and 
therfore  was  there  a  cypher  set  in  the  quotient :  but  howe  shall 
that  be  noted  here  ?     M.   Here  nedeth  no  token,  for  the  lynes  do 

16  represente  the  places  :  onely  loke  that  you  set  your  quotient  in 
that  place  which  standeth  for  vnities  in  respecte  of  the  diuisor  :  but 
now  to  returne  to  the  example,  1  fynde  the  diuisor  -1  tymes  in  the 
diuidente,  and  1  remaynynge,  for  -1  tymes  2  make  8,  which  I  take 

20  from  9,  and  there  resteth  1,  as  this  figure  sheweth  :  and  in  the 
myddle  space  for  the  quotient  I  set  1  in  the  seconde  lyne,  whiche 
is  in  this  worke  the  place  of  vnities.-  H)_#_#_ 
Then  remoue  I  ve  diuisor  to  the  next 


-0-0  -0-0— \ 


1  129  6. 


24  lower  line,  and  seke  how  often  I  may  haue  it  in  the  dyuident, 
which  1   may  do   here   8   tymes  iust,  and  nothynge   remayne,  as 

in  this  fourme,     ~\x  r  i where  you  may  se  that 

the  hole  quoti-    zzzzzz:izj#jijz*zi~    ent    is    348  d',    that    is 

28  29  s.  wherhy  I   knowe  that  so  moche  coste  the  purchace  of  one 
aker.     S.   Now  resteth  the   profes  of  Multiply  cation,  and  also  of 
Diuision.     M.  Ther  best   profes   are  eche  3one  by  the  other,  for:  *i3o&. 
Multyplication  is  proued  by  Diuision,  and  Diuision  by  Multiplyca- 

32  lion,  as  in  the  worke  by  the  prune  you  learned.  S.  Yf  that  lie 
all,  you  shall  not  nede  to  repete  agayne  that,  y*  was  sufficyently 
taughte  all  redye :  and  excepte  you  wyll  teache  me  any  other 
feate,  here  maye  you  make  an  ende  of  this  arte  J  suppose.      .1/.   So 

36  wyll  I  do  as  touchynge  hole  nomber,  and  as  for  broken  nomber,  1 
wyll  not  trouble  your  wytte  with  it,  tyll  you  haue  practised  tin's 
so  well,  y*  you  be  full  perfecte,  so  that  you  nede  not  to  doubte  in 
any  poynte  that    I    haue   taught    you,  ami   thenne  maye    I    boldly 

40  enstructe  you  in  y"  arte  of  fractions  or  broken  nomber,  wherin  I 


64  Merchants   Casting  Counters. 

wyll  also  showe  you  the  reasons  of  all  that  you  haue  nowe  learned. 

But  yet  before  I  make  an  ende,  I  wyll  showe  you  the  order  of 

commen  castyng,  wher  in  are  bothe  pennes,  shyllynges,  and  poundes, 

iisia.     procedynge    by   no   grounded    reason,    but   onely   by   a  receaued    4 

Merchants'     'fourine,  and  that  dyuersly  of  dyuers  men:   for  marchauntes  vse 

casting.  .  J  J 

one  fourme,  and  auditors  an  other  :  Iiut  fyrste  for  niarchauntes 
fourme  marke  this  example  here,  •  ##*  #  #  in  which  I  haue 
expressed  this  summe  1981'i.'2  19s.  •  lid'.      So  that    8 

you    maye    se    that    the    lowest  #*#  000    lyne  serueth  for 

pe/mes,  the  next  aboue  for  shyllynges,  the  thyrde  for  poundes,  and 
the  fourth  for  scores  of  pouwdes.     Ami  farther  you  maye  se,  that 
the   space  betwene   pennes   and   shyllynges   may  receaue   but   one  12 
counter  (as  all  other  spaces  lyke  wayes  do)  and  that  one  standi  th 
in  that  place  for  G  d'.     Lyke  wayes  betwene  the  shyllynges  >i)t<! 
the   poumles,   one    eoimter   standeth   fur   10  s.     And   betwene   the 
poundes  and   20  l'i.    one  counter  standeth  for   10  poumles.     But  16 
besyde  those  }rou  maye  see  at  the  left  syde  of  shyllynges,  that  one 
arsis,      counter   standeth  alone,   and  betokeneth   5s.     3So    agaynste    the 
poundes,  that  one  coulter  standeth  for  5  l'i.     And  agaynsl  the  20 
poundes,  the  one  counter  standeth   for  5   score   pouwdes,  that   is  20 
Auditors'        100  l'i.  so  that  euery  syde  counter  is  ■">  tymes  so  moch  as  one  of 
them  agaynst  whiche  he  standeth.    Now  for  the  accompt  of  auditors 
take   this   example.  00000         0         where    1    haue 

expressed   yr  same     m  000        summe  1981'i.  24 

19s.  lid'.  But  here  you  se  the  ]ie//nes  slaude  toward  yr  ryght 
hande,  and  the  other  encreasynge  orderly  towarde  the  lofte  hande. 
Agayne  you  maye  se,  that  auditours  wyll  make  2  lynes  (yea  and 
nmre)  h»r  pennes,  shyllynges,  nn<l  all  other  valewes,  yf  theyr  28 
summes  extende  therto.  Also  you  se,  that  they  set  one  counter  at 
the  ryght  ende  of  eche  rowe,  whiche  so  set  there  standeth  for  5  of 
•  ]:::„.     that  roume :  and  on  'the  lefte  corner  of  the  rowe  it  stawdeth  for 

10,  of  ye  same  row.  But  now  yf  you  wold  addo  other  subtiacte  32 
after  any  of  both  those  sortes,  yf  you  marke  yr  order  of  y*  other 
feate  which  1  taught  you.  you  may  easely  do  the  same  here  without 
nioeh  teachynge :  for  in  A.dditio?J  you  must  fyrst  set.  downe  one 
summe  and  to  the  same  set-  the  other  orderly,  and  lyke  maner  yf  36 
you  haue  many:  but  in  Subtraction  you  must  sette  downe  fyrst 
the  greatest  SUUinie,  and  from  it  inn  I  you  abate  that  other  euery 
denomination  from  his  drwv  place.     S.   I  do  not  doubte  but  with  a 

-  16*  in  ori'-inal. 


Aitditors    Casting  Counter*.  6i 

ly tell  practise  I  shall  attayne  these  bothe :  but  how  shall  1  multiply 
and  diuide  after  these  fourmes  1  M.  You  can  not  duely  do  none 
of  both  by  these  sortes,  therfore  in  suche  case,  you  must  resort  to 
t  your  other  artes.  S.  Syr,  yet  I  se  uot  by  these  sortes  how  to 
expresse  buredreddes,  yf  they  excede  one  hundred,  nother  yet 
thousandes.  M.  They  that  vse  such  accomptes  that  it  excede  200 
Mn  one  summe,  they  sette  no  5  at  the  lefte  hande  of  the  scores  of  '  1326. 
8  poundes,  but  they  set  all  the  hundredes  in  an  other  farther  rowe 
and  500  at  the  lefte  hand  therof,  and  the  thousandes  they  set  in  a 
farther  rowe  yet,  and  at  the  lefte  syde  therof  they  sette  the  5000, 
and  in  the  space  ouer  they  sette  the  10000,  and  in  a  hygher  rowe 

12  20000,  whiche  all  I  haue  expressed  in  this  example,  which  is 
978691'i.  12s.  9d'  oh.  q.  for  1  had  not  told  you  before  where, 
nother  how  you  shuld  set  downe  farthynges,  which  •  •  •  • 

(as  you  se  here)  must  be  set  in  a  voyde  space     #    m  »  m 

16  sydelynge  beneth  the  pernios  :  for  q  one  counter:     •     •  •  »  • 

for  ob.   2  counters  :   for  ob.  q.  3  counters  :    and  m  % 

1  000 

more  there  can  not  be,  for  4  farthynges  2do  make  J  0     -  133  a. 

1  d\  which  must  be  set  in  his  dewe  place.     And  yf  you  desyre 

20  yp  same  summe  after  audytors  manor,  lo  here  it  is. 

i  *  *  *  9    0  * 

0 
But  in  this  thyng,  you  shall  take  this  for  suffycyent,  and  the  reste 

you  shall  obserue  as  you  maye  se  by  the  working  of  eche  sorte  :  for 

the  dyuers  wittes  of  men  haue  iuuented  dyuers  and  sundry  waves 

24  almost  vnnumerable.  But  one  feate  I  shall  teache  you,  whiche  not 
only  for  the  straungenes  and  secretnes  is  moche  pleasaunt,  but  also 
for  the  good  cowmoditie  of  it  ryghte  worthy  to  be  well  marked. 
This  feate  hath  hen  vsed  ahoue  2000  yeans  at  the  leaste,  and  yet 

28  was  it  neuer  comenly  knowen,  especyally  in  Englysshe  it  was 
neuer  taughte  yet.  This  is  the  arte  of  nombrynge  on  the  hand, 
with  diuers  gestures  of  the  fyngers,  expressynge  any  summe  con- 
ceaued  in  the  3mynde.     And  fyrst  to  begynne,  yf  you  wyll  expresse     :i  isst. 

32  any  summe  vnder  100,  you  shall  expresse  it  with  your  lefte  hande  : 
and  from  100  vnto  10000,  you  shall  expresse  it  with  your  ryght 
hande,  as  here  orderly  by  this  table  folowynge  you  may  perceaue. 

^f  Here  foloweth  the  table 

of  the  arte  of  the 

hande 

NOMBRYNGE.  F 


6G 


%\t  wck  of  nombvpgc  bn  tbc  lgmbt. 

*14 


tooo 


JOOO 

-4-00  0 


i  isi6.    i  1  In  which  as  you  may  se  1  is  expressed  by  y'  lyttle  fynger  of  \" 

2  lefte  hande  closely  and  harde  croked.    *[2  is  declared  by  lyke  bow- 

ynge  of  the  weddyuge  fynger  (whiche  is  the  iiexte  to  the  lyttell 

s  fynger)   together  with  the  lytell   fynger.     [3  is  signified  by  the     | 

myddle  fynger  bowed  in  lyke  maner,  with  those  otheT  two.     [-1  is 

declared    by  the   bowyng  of   the   myddle   fynger  and   the  rynge 

Bracket  ( [ )  denotes  new  paragraph  in  original. 


Digital  Signs  of  Numbers.  07 

fynger,  or  weddynge    fynger,  with   the  other  all   stretched   forth. 
[5  is  represented   bj  the  myddle  fynger  onely  bowed.     [And  6  by  5,6 
the  weddynge  fynger  only  crooked:   and  this  you  may  marke  in 
4  these  a  certayne  order.      But  now  7.  8,  and  9,  are  expressed  witJi 
the  bowynge  of  the  .same  fyngers  as  are  1,  2,  and  3,  but  after  an 
other  fourme.     [For  7  is  declared  by  the  bowynge  of  the  lytell  7 
fynger,  as  is  1,  saue  that  for  1  the  fynger  is  clasped  in,  harde  and 
8  1rounde,  but  for  to  expresse  7,  you  shall  bowe  the  myddle  ioynte      i  ,:;:,„. 
of  the  lytell  fynger  only,  and  holde  the  other  ioyntes  streyght. 
S.  Yf  you  wyll  geue  me  Ieue  to  expresse  it  after  my  rude  maner, 
thus  I  vnderstand  your  meanyng  :  that  1  is  expressed  by  crookynge 

12  in  the  lyttell  fynger  lyke  the  head  of  a  bysshoppes  bagle  :  and  7  is 
declared   by  the   same  fynger    bowed    lyke   a  gybbet.     M.   So   I 
perceaue,  you  vnderstande  it.     [Then  to  expresse  8,  you  shall  bowe  - 
after  the  same  maner  both  the  lyttell  fynger  and  the  rynge  fynger. 

16  [And  yf  you  bowe  lyke  wayes  with  them  the  myddle  fynger,  then 
doth  it  betoken  'J.     [JSow  to  expresse  10,  you  .shall  bowe  your  9, 10 
fore  fynger  rounde,  and  set  the  ende  of  it  on  the  hyghest  ioynte  of 
the  thombe.     [And  for  to  expresse  20,  you  must  set  your  fyngers  20 

20  streyght,  and  the  ende  of  your  thombe  to  the  partitio?*  of  the  2fore     -  135&. 
moste  and  myddle  fynger.     [30  is  represented    by  the  ioynynge  30 
together  of  ye  headdes  of  the  foremost  fynger  and  the  thombe. 
[40  is  declared  by  settynge  of  the  thombe  crossewayes  on  the  fore-  to 

24  most  fynger.     [50   is  signified  by  ryght  stretchyng  forth  of  the  50 
fyngers  ioyntly,  and  applyengeof  the  thombes  ende  to  the  partition 
of  the  myddle  fynger  and  the  rynge  fynger,  or  weddynge  fynger. 
[60  is  formed  by  bendynge  of  the  thombe  croked  and  crossynge  it  60 

28  with  the  fore  fynger.     [70  is   expressed   by  the  bowynge  of  the  70 
foremosl  fynger,  and  settynge  the  ende  of  the  thombe  between  the 
2  foremost  or  hyghest  ioyntes  of  it.     [SO  is  expressed  by  settynge  so 
of  the   foremost   fynger  crossewayes   on   the   thombe,  so   that  <s0 

32  dyffereth  thus  fro?«  10,  that  for  80  the  forefynger  is  set  crosse  on 
the  thombe,  and  for  10  the  thombe  is  set  crosse  oner  y1'  forefinger. 
3[90  is  signified,  by  bendynge  the  fore  fynger,and  settyng  the  ende 90  a  i.w,,. 
of  it  in  the  innermost  ioynte  of  y"  I  limn  be,  that  is  euen  at  the  foote 

3G  of  it.     And  thus  are    ill   the  no??ibers  ended  vnder   100.     8.   In 
dede  these  be  all   the   nombers  Ivom   1   to   l'»,  and  then  all   the 
tenthes  within  100,  bul    this  teacyed  me  nol  how  to  expresse  11,  u 
12,  13,  eta.  21,  22,  23,  etc.  and  such  lyke.     M.   You  can  lytell  12,  is,  21, 22, 

40  vnderstande.  yf  yon  can  not  do  that  without  teachynge:  whal   is 


68  Digital  Numeration. 

11  ?  is  it  not  lo  and  1  i  then  expresse  10  as  you  were  taught,  and 
1  also,  ami  that  is  1 1  :  and  for  12  expresse  10  and  2  :  for  23  set  20 
and  3  :  and  so  for  68  you  muste  make  GO  and  there  to  8  :  and  so 
ioo  of  all  other  sortes.  [But  now  yf  you  wolde  represent*  100  other  4 
any  nomber  aboue  it,  you  muste  do  that  with  the  ryghte  hande, 
after  this  maner.  [You  must  expresse  100  in  the  ryght  hand, 
with  the  ly tell  fynger  so  bowed  as  you  dyd  expresse  1  in  the  left 
hand.  8 

1  1366.  ^And  as  you  expressed  2  in  the  lefte  hande,  the  same  fasshyon 

■-;11'1  in  the  ryght  hande  doth  declare  200. 
300        The  fonrme  of  .">  in  the  ryght  hand  standeth  for  300. 
too        The  fourme  of  4,  for  400.  12 

•' Lykewayes  the  fourme  of  5,  for  500. 

ooo  The  fourme  of  G,  for  GOO.  And  to  he  shorte  :  loke  how  you  did 
expresse  single  vnities  and  tenthes  in  the  lefte  hande,  so  must  you 
expresse  vnities  and  tenthes  of  hundredes,  in  the  ryghte  hande.  1G 
boo  S.  I  vnderstande  you  thus:  (hat  yf  1  wold  represent  900,  1  must 
so  fourme  the  fyngers  of  my  ryghte  hande,  as  I  shuld  do  in  my 
left  hand  to  expresse  9,  And  as  in  my  lefte  hand  I  expressed 
iooo  10,  so  in  my  ryght  hande  must  I  expresse  1000.  20 

And  so  the  fourme  of  euery  tenthe  in  the  lefte  hande  serueth 
to  expresse  lyke  no??iber  of  thousawdes,  so  y'  fourme  of  40  standeth 
*ooo  for  4000. 

- '         The  fourme  of  80  for  8000.  -' 

-And  the  fourme  of  90  (whiche  is 
the  greatest)  for  9000,  and  aboue  that 
I  can  not  expresse  any  nomber.      M. 
No  not  with  one  fynger:   how  he  it,  28 

with  dyuers  fyngers  you  maye  expresse 
9999,  and  all  at  one  tyme,  and  that  lac 
keth  hut  1  of  10000.     So  that  vnder 
10000  you  may  by  your  fyngers  ex-  32 

presse  any  summe.     And  this  shal  suf- 
fice for  Numeration  on  the  fyng(  1 3. 
And  as  for  Addition,  Subtraction, 
Multiplication,  and  Diuision  (which  36 

yet  were  neuer  taughl  by  any  man  as 
farre  as  1  do  knowe)  I  wyll  enstruct 
you  after  the  treatyse  of  fractions. 
And  now  for  this  tyme  fare  well.  40 


137  a 


Digital  Numeration.  09 

and  loke  thai  \  ou  cease  not  to 

practyse  that  you  haue  Lear 

ned.     S.  Syr,  with  moste 

harty  niyiulc  I  thanke 

you,  bothe  for  your 

■• 1  learnyng,  and 

also   your  good 

course],  which 

(god  wyllyng)  I  truste  to  folow. 

Finis. 


70 


APPENDIX   I. 


%  &xmtm  on  tin  flttmcrntion   of 
Rigorism. 

[From   a   MS.   of  tfo    l't>h   Century.'] 

To  alio  suche  oven   nombrys  the  most   have  cifrys  as  to  ten. 
twenty.  Ihirtty.  an  hundred,  an  thousand  and  suche  other,  but  ye 
schal  vnderstonde  that  a  cifre  tokeneth  nothinge  lmt  ho  maketh 
other  the  more  significatyf  thai  comith  after  hym.     Also  ye  schal 
vnderstonde  thai  in  nombrys  composyl  and  in  alle  other  nombrys 
that  ben  of  diverse  figurys  ye  schal  begynne  in  the  ritht  syde  and 
to  rekene  backwarde  and  so  he  schal  be  wryte  as  thus — 1000.  1hc 
sif ii'  in  the  ritht  side  was  first  wryte  and  yit  he  tokeneth  nothinge 
to  the  secunde  no  the  thridde  but  thei  maken  that  figure  of   1  the 
more  signyficatyf  that  comith  after  hem  by  as  moche  as  he  bora 
oute  of  his  first  place  where  he  schuld  yf  he  stode  ther  tokene  lmt 
one.     Ainl  there  he  stondith  nowe  in  the  ferye  place  he  tokeneth  12 
a  thousand  as  by  tins  rewle.     In  the  firsl  place  he  tokeneth  hut 
hymself.     In  the  secunde  place  he  tokeneth  ten  times  hymself.     In 
tin1  thridde  place  he  tokeneth  an  hundred  tymes  himself.     In  the 
ferye  he  tokeneth  a  thousand  tymes  himself.     In  the  fyftye  place  16 
he  tokeneth  ten  thousand  tymes  himself.     In  the  sexte  place  he 
tokeneth   an    hundred    thousand    tymes    hymself.     In    the  seveth 
place  he  tokeneth  ten  hundred  thousand  lymes  hymself,  &c.     And 
ye  schal  vnderstond  thai   this  worde  nombre  is  partyd  into  thre  20 
partyes.     Somme  is  callyd   nombre  of  digitys  fop  alle  hen  digitys 
thai    hen   withine   ten   as   ix,  viii.  vii,  vi,  v.  iv,  iii.  ii.  i.      Al'ticules 
hen  alle  thei  thai  mow  1"'  devyded  into  nombrys  of  ten  as  xx,  xxx, 
xl,  and  suche  other.     Composittys  be  alio  nombrys  thai  hen  com- 24 
ponyd  of  a  digyl  and  of  an  articule  as  fourtene  fyftene  thrittene 
and  suche  other.     Fourtene  is  componyd  of  four  thai  is  a  digyl 


Numeration.  71 

and  of  ten  that  is  an  articule.      Fyftene  is  componyd  of  fyve  that 

is  a  digyt  and  of  ten  that  is  an  articule  and  so  of  others 

But  as  to  this  rewle.  Jn  the  firste  place  lie  tokeneth  hut  himself 
4  that  is  to  say  he  tokeneth  hut  that  and  no  more.  If  that  he  stonde 
in  the  seeumle  place  he  tokeneth  ten  tyines  himself  as  this  figure  2 
here  21.  this  is  oon  and  twenty.  This  figure  2  stondith  in  the 
secunde  place  and  therfor  he  tokeneth  ten  tyraes  himself  and  ten 
8  tymes  2  is  twenty  and  so  forye  of  every  figure  and  he  stonde  after 
another  toward  the  lest  syde  he  schal  tokene  ten  tymes  as  moche 
more  as  he  schuld  token  and  he  stode  in  that  place  ther  that  the 
figure  afore  him  stondeth  :   lo  an   example  as  thus  9634.     This 

12  figure  of  foure  that  hath  this  schape  4  tokeneth  hut  himself  for  he 
stondeth  in  the  first  place.  The  figure  of  thre  that  hath  this  schape 
3  tokeneth  ten  tyine  himself  for  he  stondeth  in  the  secunde  place 
and  that  is  thritti.     The  figure  of  sexe   that  hath   this  schape  G 

1G  tokeneth  ten  tyme  more  than  he  schuld  and  he  stode  in  the  place 
yer  the  figure  of  thre  stondeth  for  ther  he  schuld  tokene  hut  sexty. 
And  now  he  tokeneth  ten  tymes  that  is  sexe  hundrid.  The  figure 
of  nyne  that  hath  this  schape  9  tokeneth  ten  tymes  more  than  he 

20  schulde  and  he  stode  in  the  place  ther  the  figure  of  G  stondeth  inne 
for  thanne  he  schuld  tokene  hut  nyne  hundryd.  And  in  the  place 
that  he  stondeth  inne  m>we  he  tokeneth  nine  thousand.  Alle  the 
hole  nombre  of  these  foure  figurys.     Nine  thousand  sexe  hundrid 

24  and  foure  and  thritti. 


APPENDIX   IT. 


Carmen  tic   ^(prisma. 

[From  a  B.M.  MS.,  8  C.  iv.,  with  additions  from  12  E.  1  &  Eg.  2622.] 
Hec  algorismus  ars  presens  dicitur1  ;  in  qua 
Talibus  Indorum2  fruimur  l>is  quinque  figuris. 
0.     9.     8.     7.     C.     5.     4.     3.     2.     1. 
Prima  significat  unum  :  duo  vero  secunda  :  4 

Tercia  significat  tria:  sic  procede  sinistra 
Donee  ad  extremam  venies,  qua  cifra  vocatur; 
8[Que  nil  significat;  dat  significare  sequenti.] 
Quelibet  illarum  si  primo  liruite  ponas,  8 

Simpliciter  se  significat :  si  vero  seenndo, 
Se  decies  :  sursuni  procedas  tnultiplicando.4 
[Namque  figura  sequens  quevis  signat  decies  plus, 
Ipsa  locata  loco  quam  signilicet  percunte  :  12 

Nam  precedentes  plus  \iltima  significabit.] 

5  Post  predicta  scias  quod  tres  breuiter  numerorum 

Distincte  species  sunt;  nam  quidam  digiti  sunt; 

Articuli  quidam  ;  quidam  quoque  compositi  -nut.  10 

[.Sunt  digiti  numeri  qui  citra  denarium  sunt  ; 

Articuli  decupli  degrtoruro  ;  compositi  sunt 

Illi  tpii  constant  ex  articulis  digitisque.] 

Ergo,  proposito  numero  tilii  scribere,  primo  20 

Respicias  quis  sit  numerus  ;  quia  si  digitus  sit, 

5  [Una  figura  satis  sibi ;  sed  si  compositus  sit,] 

I'rimo  scribe  Lien  d'i^itum  post  articulum  fac 

Articulus  si  sit,  cifram  post  articulum  sit,  24 

[Articulum  vero  reliquenti  in  scribe  figure.] 

1  "  Hoc  prsesens  ars  dicitur  algorismus  ab  Algore  rege  ejus  inventore,  vel 
dicitur  ab  algos  quod  est  ars,  et  rodos  quod  est  nuraerus;  quse  est  ars  numer- 
orum vel  numerandi,  ad  quam  artem  bene  sciendum  inveniebantur  apud  Imtos 
Ms  qninque  i^iil  est  decern)  ligurse. " — Comment.  Tkotna  de  Novo-Meratiu.  Ms. 
Bib.  Reg.  Mus.  Brit.  12  E.  1. 

-  "Il;i'  necessarise  figura  sunt  rndorum  characteros. "  .'/.v.  de  numcra- 
tione.  Bib.  Sloan.  .Mus.  Brit.  513,  fol.  58.  "Cum  ridissem  Yndos  constituisse 
i\  litems  in  mi i verso  numero  sun  propter dispositionem  suam  quam  posuerunt, 
volui  patefacere  de  opere  quod  sit  per  eas  aliquidque  esset  levius  discentibus, 
si  Deus  voluerit.  Si  autem  Indi  1km'  voluerunl  et  intentio  illorum  nihil  novem 
literis  fuit,  causa  que  mibi  potuit.  Dens  direxit  me  ad  hoc.  Si  \rero  alia 
dicam  preter  earn  quam  ego  exposui,  hoc  fecerunl  per  hoc  quod  ego  exposui, 
eadem  tarn  certissime  et  absque  ulla  dubitatione  poterit  inveniri.  Leritasque 
patebil  aspicientibus  et  discentibus."     MS.  1'.  I;.''.,  li.  vi.  5,  f.  102. 

'•'  From  Eg.  2622. 

*  8  0.  iv.  inserts  Nullum  cipa  significat  :  dat  significare  sequenti. 

«  From  12  E.  1. 


Addition,  Subtraction.  73 

Quolibet  in  numero,  si  par  sit  prima  figura, 
Par  erit  el  totum,  quicquid  sibi  continetur; 
Era  par  si  fuerit,  totum  sibi  fiet  et  inrpar.  28 

Septem.1  sunt  partes,  non  plures,  istius  artis; 

Addere,  subtrahere,  duplare,  dimidiare  ; 

Soxta  est  diuidere,  set  quinta  est  rnultiplicare  ; 

Radicem  extrabere  pars  septhna  dicitur  esse.  .".•_' 

Subtrabis  aut  addis  a  dextris  vel  mediabis  ; 

A  leua  dupla,  diuide5  multiplicaque  : 

Extrahe  radicem  semper  sub  parte  sinistra. 

Addere  si  numero  numerum  vis,  ordine  tali  36  Addition, 

Incipc ;  scribe  duas  primo  series  numerorum 

Prima  sub  prima  recte  poneudo  figurani, 

Et  sic  de  reliquis  facias,  si  shit  tibi  plures. 

Tndc  duas  adde  primas  hac  condicione;  40 

Si  digitus  crescat  ex  addicione  priorum, 

Primo  scribe  loco  digitum,  quicunque  sit  ille ; 

Si  sit  compositus,  in  limite  scribe  sequent: 

Articulum,  primo  digitum;  quia  sic  iubet  ordo.  44 

Articulus  si  sit,  in  primo  limite  cifram, 

Articulum  vein  reliquis  inscribe  figuris; 

Vel  per  se  scribas  si  nulla  figura  sequatur. 

Si  tibi  cifra  superueniens  occurrerit,  illam  48 

I  >eme  suppositam  ;  post  illic  scribe  figuram  : 

Postea  procedas  reliquas  addendo  figuras. 

A  numero  numerum  si  sit  tibi  demere  cura,  subtraction. 

Scribe  figurarum  scries,  vt  in  addicione;  52 

Maiori  numero  numerum  suppone  minorem, 

Sine  pari  numero  supponatur  numerus  par. 

1'..  tea  si  possis  a  prima  subtrahe  primam, 

Scribens  quod  remanet,  cifram  si  nil  remanebit.  56 

Set  si  non  possis  a  prima  demere  primam  ; 

Procedens,  vnuin  tie  Limite  deme  sequent!  ; 

1    En  argorisme  devon  prendre 
Vii  especes    .... 
Adi  ion    ubtracion 
I  loubloison  mediacion 
Monteploie  ot  division 
El  de  radix  enst  racion 
A  chez  \  ii  especes  savoir 
Doil  chai  eun  i  n  memoire  avoir 
Letres  qui  figures  sunt  dites 
Ml  quiexcellens  lonl  ecrites.     MS,  Scld.  Arch,  B.  26, 


74  Duplation,  Mediation. 

Et  demptum  pro  denario  reputabis  ab  illo, 

Subtrahe  totaliter  numerum  quem  proposuisti.  60 

Quo  facto,  scribe  supra  quicquit  remanebit, 
Facque  novcnarios  de  cifris,  cum  rernanebis, 
Occurrant  si  forte  cifre,  dum  demseris  viuim  ; 
Postea  procedas  reliquas  demendo  figuras.  6-t 

Proof.  ]  [Si  subtracio  sit  bene  facta  probare  valebis, 

Quas  subtraxisti  primas  addendo  iiguras. 
Nam,  subtractio  si  bene  sit,  primas  retinebis, 
Et  subtractio  facta  tibi  probat  additionem.]  68 

Dupiation.    Si  vis  duplare  numerum,  sic  iucipe;  solam 

Scribe  figurarum  seriem,  quamcamque  voles  que 

Postea  procedas  primam  duplando  figuram  ; 

Inde  quod  excrescet,  scribeus,  vbi  iusserit  ordo,  72 

Juxta  precepta  que  dantur  in  addicione. 

Nam  si  sit  digitus,  in  prinio  limite  scribe  ; 

Articulus  si  sit,  in  primo  limite  cifram, 

Articulum  vero  reliquis  inscribe  iiguris ;  76 

\Y1  per  se  scribas,  si  nulla  figura  sequatur  : 

Compositus  si  sit,  in  limite  scribe  sequent] 

Articulum  primo,  digitum  ;  quia  sic  jubet  ordo  : 

Et  sic  de  reliquis  facias,  si  .sint  tibi  plures.  80 

1 1 Si  super  extremam  nota  sit,  monadem  dat  (idem, 

Quod  tibi  contingit,  si  primo  dimidiabis.  ] 
Mediation.    Tncipc  sic,  si  vis  aliquem  numerum  mediare  : 

Scribe  figurarum  seriem  solam,  velud  ante  ;  84 

Postea  procedens  medias,  el  prima  figura 

Si  par  aut  impar  videas  ;  quia  si  fuerit  par, 

Dimidiabis  earn,  scribens  quicquit  remanebil  ; 

Impar  si  fuerit,  vnum  demas,  mediare,  S8 

Nonne  presumas,  sed  quod  superesl  mediabis  ; 

Inde  super  tractum,  fac  demptum  quod  notat  mniiii  : 

Si  monos,  dele  ;  sit  ilii  cifra  post  nota  supra. 

Postea  procedas  hac  condicione  secunda  :  -  92 

[mpar8  si  fuerit  hie  vnum  deme  priori, 

[nscribens  quinque,  nam  denos  significabil 

Monos  prsedictam  :  si  vero  secunda  dai  vnam, 

Ilia  deleta,  scribatur  cifra ;  priori  96 

1  From  12  E.  1. 

2  8  0.  iv.  inserts  A.tque  figura  prior  auper  merit  mediando. 
'  /.  e.  6gura  secundo  loco  posita. 


Multiplication.  7c 

Tradendo  quinque  pro  denario  rnediato; 

N      cifra  scribatuTj  nisi  hide  figura  sequatur  : 

Postea  procdeas  reliquas  mediando  figuras, 

Quin  supra  doeui,  si  sint  iibi  rnille  figure.  100 

1  [Si  mediatio  sit  bene  facta  probare  valebis, 
Duplaudo  numerum  quein  primo  dimidiasti.] 

Si  tu  per  numerum  numerum  vis  multiplicare,  tion. 

Scribe  duas,  quascunque  volis,  series  numerorum  ;  104 

Ordo  tamen  seruetur  vt  vltima  multiplicandi 
Ponatur  super  anteriorem  multiplicantis ; 

2  [A  leua  relique  sint  scripte  multiplicantes.] 

In  digitum  euros  digitum  si  ducere,  major  108 

Per  quantes  distat  a  denis  respice,  debes 

Namque  suo  decuplo  tociens  delere  minorem  ; 

Sicque  til ji  numerus  veniens  exinde  patebit. 

Postea  procedas  postremam  multiplicando,  112 

Juste  multiplicans  per  cunctas  inferiores, 

Condicione  tamen  tali ;  quod  multiplicantis 

Scribas  in  capite,  qtiicquid  processerit  hide; 

Set  postquam  fuerit  hec  multiplicata,  figure  116 

Anteriorontur  seriei  multiplicautis  ; 

El  sic  multiplica,  velut  istam  multiplicasti, 

Qui  sequitur  numerum  scriptum  quicunque  figuris. 

Set  cum  niultiplicas,  primo  sic  est  operandum,  120 

Si  dabit  articulum  tibi  multiplicacio  solum  ; 

Proposita  cifra,  summam  transferre  memento. 

sin  autem  digitus  excrescent  articulusque, 

Articulus  supraposito  digito  salit  ultra;  124 

Si  digitus  tamen,  ponas  ilium  super  ipsam, 

Subdita  multiplicans  banc  que  super  Lncidit  illi 

Delel  earn  penitus,  scribens  quod  provenit  inde; 

Sed  -i  multiplices  illam  posite  super  ipsam,  128 

Adiungens  numerum  quern  prebet  ductus  earum; 

Si  supraimpositam  cifra  debet  multiplicare, 

Prorsus  earn  delet,  scribi  que  loco  cifra  debet, 

2  [Si  cifra  multiplica!  aliam  positam  super  ipsam,  132 

Sitque  locus  supra  vacuus  super  hanc  cifra  fiet;] 

1  So  12  E.  1  ;  8  0.  iv.  inserts- 
Si  gnpei  extremam  aota  -it  monades  dat  eidem 
Quod  contingat  cum  primo  dimiabis 
Atijue  figura  prior  ouper  fuerit  mediando. 

-  12  K.  l  inserts. 


76  Multiplication    Without  Figures, 

Si  supra  fuerit  cifra  semper  pretereunda  estj 

Si  dubitee,  an  sit  bene  multiplicando  secunda, 

Diuide  totalem  numerum  per  multiplicantem,  13G 

Et  reddet  numerus  emergens  inde  priorem. 
Mental        *  [Per  numerum  si  vis  numerum  quoque  multiplicare 
^uHiphca-   rp.ul^um  per  normas  subtiles  absque  figuris 

Has  norm  as  poteris  per  versus  scire  sequentes.  HO 

Si  tu  per  digitum  digitum  quilibet  multiplicabis 

Regula  precedens  dat  qualiter  est  operandum 

Articulum  si  per  reliquum  vis  multiplicare 

In  proprium  digitum  debebit  uterque  resolvi  1 14 

Articulus  digitos  post  per  se  multiplicantes 

Ex  digitis  quociens  ten  ere  t  multiplicatum 

Articuli  faciunt  tot  centum  multiplicati. 

Articulum  digito  si  multiplicamus  oportet  148 

Articulum  digitum  sumi  quo  multiplicare 

Debemus  reliquum  quod  multiplicaris  ab  illis 

Per  reliquo  decuplum  sic  omne  latere  nequibit 

In  numerum  mix  turn  digitum  si  ducere  cures  L52 

Articulus  mixti  sumatur  deinde  resolvas 

In  digitum  post  hec  fac  ita  de  digitis  nee 

Articulusque  docet  excrescens  in  detinendo 

In  digitum  mixti  post  ducas  multiplicantem  156 

De  digitis  ut  norma  docet  sit  juncta  secunda 

Multiplica  summam  et  postea  summa  patebil 

Junctus  in  articulum  purum  articulumque 

2  [Articulum  purum  comittes  articulum  que]  1G0 

Mixti  pre  digitis  post  fiat  et  articulus  vt 

Norma  jubet  retinendo  quod  egreditur  ab  illis 

Articuli  digitum  post  iu  digitum  mixti  due 

Regula  tie  digitis  ut  percipit  articulusque  1G4 

Ex  quibus  excrescens  summe  tu  junge  priori 

Sic  manifesta  cito  lid  tibi  summa  petita. 

Compositum  numerum  mixto  sic  multiplicabis 

Vhdecies  tredecem  sic  est  ex  hiis  operandum  168 

In  reliquum  primum  demum  due  post  in  eundem 

Tiium  post  deinde  due  in  tercia  deinde  per  unum 

Multiplices  tercia  demum  tunc  omnia  multiplicata 

In  summa  duces  quam  que  fueril  te  dices  172 

1  12  E.  1  ins,  its  to  1.  174.  a   12  E.  1  omits,  Eg.  2G22  inserts. 


1 1  ,-  rion,  Square  Numbers. 


77 


Hie  ut  hie  mixtus  intentus  est  operanduni 
Multiplicandorura  de  norniis  sufficiunt  hec.]- 
Si  vis  dividere  numerum,  sic  incipe  primo  ; 
Scribe  duas,  quascunque  vol  3,    eries  numeroruni; 
Majori  numero  numerum  suppone  miuorem, 
1[X:mi  dicct  ut  major  ton  at  bis  terve  minorem;] 
Et  sub  supprima  supprimam  pone  figuram, 
Sic  reliquis  reliquas  a  dextra  parte  locabis  ; 
Postea  de  prima  primam  sub  parte  sinistra 
Subtrahe,  si  possis,  quociens  potes  adminus  istud, 
Scribens  quod  remanet  sub  tali  conditione; 
Ut  totiens  demas  demendas  a  remanente, 
Que  scrie  recte  ponentur  in  anteriori, 
I  nica  si,  tantum  sit  ibi  decet  operari  : 
Set  si  dou  ]  ossis  a  prima  demere  primam, 
Procedas,  et  earn  numero  suppone  sequenti  ; 
Hanc  uno  retrahendo  gradu  quo  comites  retrahantur, 
Et,  qUotiens  poteris,  ab  eadem  deme  priorem, 
Ut  totiens  demas  demendas  a  remanenti, 
Nee  plus  ipuun  novies  quicquam  tibi  demere  deb  3, 
Nascitur  liinc  numerus  quociens  supraque  sequentem 
Hunc  primo  scribas,  retrabas  exinde  figuras, 
Dum  fuerit  major  supra  positus  inferiori, 
Et  rarsum  Bat  divisio  mure  priori ; 
Et  numerum  quotiens  supra  scribas  pereunti, 
Si  fiat  saliens  retrahendo,  cifra  locetur, 
Et  pereat  numero  quotiens,  proponas  eidem 
C  if  ram,  ne  numerum  pereat  vis,  dum  locus  illic 
I.'     tat,  et  expletis  divisio  non  valet  ultra: 
Dum  fuerit  numerus  numerorum  inferiore  seorsum 
Ilium  servabis;  hinc  multiplicand©  probabis, 
Si  bene  fecisti,  divisor  multiplicetur 
Per  numerum  quotiens;  cum  multiplicaveris,  adde 
Totali  sumuue,  quod  servatum  fuit  ante, 
Reddeturque  tibi  numerus  quern  proposuisti  ; 
Et  si  nil  remanet,  hunc  multiplicando  reddet, 
Cum  ducis  numerum  per  se,  qui  provenit  inde 
Sit  tibi  quadratus,  ductus  radix  erit  hujus, 
Nee  numeros  omnes  quadratos  dicere  debes, 
Est  autem  oinnis  numerus  radix  alicujus. 
1   12  E.  1  inserts. 


176 


LSI! 


184 


188 


192 


IDG 


•JIM  I 


JU1  Proof. 


208 


Siiuare 
Numbers. 


212 


78  Sq  uare  Boot. 

Quando  voles  numeri  radicem  querere,  scribi 

Debet;  hide  notes  si  sit  locus  ulterius  impar, 

Estque  figura  loco  talis  scribenda  sub  ill", 

Que,  per  se  dicta,  numerum  tibi  destruat  ilium,  216 

Vel  quantum  potent  ex  inde  delebis  eandem; 

Vel  retrahendo  duples  retrahens  duplando  snl>  isla 

Que  prime  sequitur,  duplicatur  per  duplacationem, 

Post  per  se  minuens  pro  posse  quod  est  minuenduni,  '  220 

1 Post  liis  propones  digitum,  qui,  more  priori 

Per  precedentes,  post  per  se  multiplicatus, 

Destruat  in  quantum  poterit  numerum  remanentem, 

Et  sic  procedens  retraliens  duplando  figuram,  22  1 

Preponendo  novam  donee  totum  peragatur, 

Subdupla  propriis  servare  docetque  duplatis  ; 

Si  det  compositum  numerum  duplacio,  debel 

[nscribi  digitus  a  parte  dextra  parte  propinqua,  -L's 

Articulusque  loco  quo  non  duplicata  resessit; 

Si  dabit  articulum,  sit  cifra  loco  pereunte 

ArtiEulusque  locum  tenet  unum,  de  duplicata  rcsessil  ; 

Si  donet  digitum,  sub  prima  pone  sequente,  232 

Si  supraposita  fuerit  duplicata  figura 

Major  proponi  debet  tantummodo  cifra, 

Has  retrahens  solito  propones  more  figuram, 

Usque  sub  extrema  ita  fac  retrabendo  figuras,  236 

Si  totum  deles  numerum  quern  proposuisti, 

Quadratus  fuerit,  de  dupla  quod  duplicasti, 

Sicque  tibi  radixUlius  certa  patebit, 

Si  de  duplatis  fitjuncta  supprima  figura;  240 

Radicem  per  se  multiplices  habeasque 

Primo  propositum,  bene  te  fecisse  probasti  ; 

Non  est  quadratus,  si  quis  restat,  sed  habentur 

Radix  quadrati  qui  stat  major  sub  eadein  ;  J  1  1 

Vel  quicquitl  remanel  tabula  servare  memento ; 

Hoc  casu  radix  per  se  quoque  midtiplicetur, 

\  el  sir  quadratus  sub  primo  major  habetur, 

lliii"  addas  remanens,  el  prius  debes  haberi  ;  248 

Si  locus  extremus  fueril  par,  scribe  figuram 

Sub  pereunte  loco  per  quam  debes  operari, 

Que  quantum  poteril  supprimas  destruat  amb 

1  S  ('.  iv.  inserts— 

linn  ill.iin  dele  duplans  sub  ei  psallii  ado 

Que  sequitur  retraliens  quicquid  fuerit  duplicatum. 


Cube  Boot.  79 

Vel  penitus  legem  teneas  operando  priorem,  252 

Si  stippositum  digitus  suo  fine  repcrtus, 

Omnino  delet  illie  scribi  cifra  debet, 

A  leva  si  qua  sit  ei  sociata  figura  ; 

Si  cifre  remanent  in  fine  pares  decefc  harum  256 

Radices,  numero  mediam  proponere  partem, 

Tali  quesita  radix  patet  arte  reperta. 

I'll  niimerum  recte  >i  nosti  multiplicare 

Ejus  quadratum,  numerus  qui  pervenit  inde  2G0 

Dicetur  cubicus;  primus  radix  erit  ejus; 

Nee  numeros  omnes  cubicatos  dicere  debes, 

Est  autem  omnis  numerus  radix  alicujus; 

Si  curas  cubici  radicem  quaerere,  primo  264  cube  Root. 

Enscriptum  numerum  distinguere  per  loca  debes  ; 

Que  tibi  mille  notant  a  mille  notaute  suprema 

Initiam,  sum  ma  operandi  parte  sinistra, 

Illic  sub  scribas  digitum,  qui  multiplicatus  268 

In  semet  cubicc  suprapositum  sibi  perdat, 

Et  si  quid  fuerit  adjunctum  parte  sinistra 

Si  non  omnino,  quantum  poteris  minuendo, 

Hinc  triplans  retrahe  saltum,  faciendo  sub  ilia  272 

Que  manet  a  digito  deleto  tenia,  figuram 

Illi  propones  que  sub  triplo  asocietur, 

Et  cum  subtriplo  per  earn  tripla  multiplicatur ; 

Him'  per  earn  solam  productum  multiplicabis,  276 

Postca  totaleni  numerum,  qui  provenit  inde 

A  suprapositis  respectu  tulle  triplate 

Addita  supprimo  cubice  tune  niultiplicetur, 

Respectu  cujus,  numerus  qui  progredietur  280 

Ex  cubito  ductu,  supra  omnes  adimetur ; 

Tunc  ipsam  delens  triples  saltum  faciendo, 

Semper  sub  ternas,  retrahens  alias  triplicatas 

Ex  hinc  triplatis  aliam  propone  figuram,  284 

Que  per  triplatas  ducatur  more  priori  ; 

Primo  sub  triplis  sibi  junctis,  postea  per  se, 

In  numerum  ducta,  productum  de  triplicatis : 

Utque  prius  dixi  numerus  qui  provenil  inde  288 

A  suprapositis  has  respiciendo  trahatur, 

Huic  cubice  ductum  sub  primo  multiplicabis, 

EcspectunKjuc  sui,  removebis  de  remanenti, 

Et  sic  procedas  retrahendo  triplando  figuram.  292 


80  Ouhe  Boot 

Et  proponendo  nonam,  donee  totum  peragatur, 

Subtripla  sub  propriis  servare  decet  triplicatis ; 

Si  nil  in  fine  remanet,  nnmerus  datus  ante 

Est  cubicus;  cubicam  radicem  sub  tripla  prebent,  29G 

Cum  digito  juncto  quern  supprimo  posuisti, 

Hec  cubice  ducta,  numerum  reddant  tibi  priumm. 

Si  quid  erit  remanens  non  est  cubicus,  sed  habetur 

Major  sub  primo  qui  skit  radix  cubicam,  300 

Servari  debet  quicquid  radice  remansit, 

Extraeto  numero,  decet  hec  addi  cubicato. 

Quo  facto,  nnmerus  reddi  debet  tilii  primui . 

Nam  debes  per  se  radicem  niultiplicare  304 

Ex  hinc  in  numerum  duces,  qui  provenit  inde 

Sub  primo  cubicus  major  sie  invenietur; 

I  Hi  jungatur  remanens,  et  primus  habetur, 

Si  per  fcriplatum  numerum  nequeas  operari  ;  3ns 

Cifram  propones,  nil  vero  per  bam'  operare 

Set  retrahens  illam  cum  saltu  deinde  triplata, 

Propones  illi  digitum  sub  lege  priori, 

Cumque  cifram  retrahas  saliendo,  non  triplicabis,  312 

Namque  nihil  cifre  triplacio  dicitur  esse  ; 

At  tu  cum  cifram  protraxeris  aut  triplicata, 

llanc  cum  subtriplo  semper  servare  memento  : 

Si  det  compositum,  digiti  triplacio  debet  316 

Illius  scribi,  digitus  saliendo  sub  ipsam  ; 

Digito  delete,  que  tenia  dicitur  esse  ; 

Jungitur  articulus  cum  triplata  pereunte, 

Set  tacit  hunc  scribi  per  se  triplacio  prima,  320 

Que  si  det  digitum  per  se  scribi  facit  ilium  ; 

Consumpto  numero,  si  sole  fuit  tibi  cifre 

Triplato,  propone  cifram  saltum  faciendo, 

Cumque  cifram  retrahe  triplam,  scribendo  figuram,  324 

Preponas  cifre,  sic  procedens  operare, 

Si  tres  vel  duo  serie  in  sint,  pone  sub  yma, 

A  dextris  digitum  servando  prius  documentum. 

si  sit  continua  progressio  terminus  nuper  328 

Per  majus  me  Hum  totalem  multiplicato; 

Si  par,  per  medium  tune  multiplicato  sequentem. 

Set  si  continua  non  sit  progressio  finis  : 

[nipar,  tune  majus  medium  si  rnultiplicabis,  332 

Si  par  per  medium  sibi  multiplicato  propinquum.  333 


INDEX   OF   TECHNICAL   TERMS1 

algorisme,  33/i2;  algorym,  augrym,  •'!  3  ;  the  art  of  computing,  using 
the  so-called  Arabic  numerals. 

The  word  in  its  various  forms  is  derived  from  the  Arabic  nl- 
Khawarazmi  (i.e.  the  native  of  Khwarazm  (Khiva)).  This  was  the 
surname  of  Ja'far  Mohammad  ben  Musa,  who  wrote  a  treatise  early 
in  the  9th  century  (see  p.  xiv). 

The  form  algorithm  is  also  found,  being  suggested  by  a  supposed 
derivation  from  the  Greek  api8/j.6s  (number). 

antery,  24  11  ;  to  move  figures  to  the  right  of  the  position  in  which  they 
are  first  written.  This  operation  is  performed  repeatedly  upon  the 
multiplier  in  multiplication,  and  upon  certain  figures  which  arise  in 
the  process  of  root  extraction. 

anterioracioun,  50  5  ;  the  operation  of  moving  figures  to  the  right. 

article,  34  23  ;  articul,  031  ;  artiCUls,  0  36,  29,  7,  8  ;  a  number  divisible 
by  ten  without  remainder. 

Cast,  812  :  to  add  one  number  to  another. 

'Addition  is  a  cutting  together  of  two  numbers  into  one  number,' 
8/10. 

Cifre,  4/i  ;  the  name  of  the  figure  0.  The  word  is  derived  from  the 
Arabic  sifr=  empty,  nothing.     Hence  :<-r<>. 

A  cipher  is  the  symbol  of  the  absence  of  number  or  of  zero 
quantity.  It  may  be  used  alone  or  in  conjunction  witli  digits  or 
other  ciphers,  and  in  the  latter  case,  according  to  the  position  which 
it  occupies  relative  to  the  other  figures,  indicates  the  absence  of  units. 
or  tens,  or  hundreds,  etc.  The  great  superiority  of  the  Arabic  to  all 
other  systems  of  notation  resides  in  the  employment  of  this  symbol. 
When  the  cipher  is  not  used,  the  place  value  of  digits  has  to  be 
indicated  by  writing  them  in  assigned  rows  or  columns.  Ciphers, 
however,  may  be  interpolated  amongst  the  significant  figures  used, 
and  as  they  sufficiently  indicate  the  positions  of  the  empty  rows  or 
columns,  the  latter  need  not  be  indicated  in  any  other  way.  The 
practical  performance  of  calculations  is  thus  enormously  facilitated 
(see  p.  xvi). 

componede,  33/24;  composyt,  035;  with  reference  to  numbers,  one 
compounded  of  a  multiple  of  ten  and  a  digit. 

conuertide  =  conversely.  41;  29,  47/9. 

CUbicede,  50,  13  ;  to  be  C,  to  have  its  cube  root  found. 

1  This  Index  lias  been  kindly  prepared  by  Professor  J.  B.  Dale,  of  King's 
College,  University  of  London,  and  the  best  thanks  of  the  Society  are  due  to 
him  for  his  valuable  contribution. 

NOMBRYNGE.  81  ° 


82  Index  of  Technical  Terms. 

Cllbike  nombre,  47/8  ;  a  number  formed  by  multiplying  a  given  number 
twice  by  itself,  e. ;/.  27  =  3  x  3  x  3.     Now  called  simply  a  cube. 

decuple,  22/12  ;  the  product  of  a  number  by  ten.     Tenfold. 

departys  =  divides,  5/29. 

digit,  5/30;  digitalle,  33/24;  a  number  less  than  ten,  represented  by 
one  of  the  nine  Arabic  numerals. 

dimydicion,  7/23  ;  the  operation  of  dividing  a  number  by  two.     Halving. 

duccioun,  multiplication,  43/9. 

duplacion,  7/23,  14/15  ;  tne  operation  of  multiplying  a  number  by  two. 
Doubling. 

i-mediet  —  halved,  19/23. 

intercise  —  broken,  46/2  ;  intercise  Progression  is  the  name  given  to 
either  of  the  Progressions  1,  3,  5,  7,  etc.  ;  2,  4,  6,  8,  etc.,  in  which  the 
common  difference  is  2. 

lede  into,  multiply  by,  47/l8. 

lyneal  nombre,  4*> '14  ;  a  number  such  as  that  which  expresses  the  measure 
of  the  length  of  a  line,  and  therefore  is  not  necessarily  the  product 
of  two  or  more  numbers  (vide  Superficial,  Solid).  This  appears 
to  be  the  meaning  of  the  phrase  as  used  in  The  Art  of  Nombryng. 
It  is  possible  that  the  numbers  so  designated  are  the  prime  numbers, 
that  is,  numbers  not  divisible  by  any  other  number  except-  them- 
selves and  unity,  but  it  is  not  clear  that  this  limitation  is  intended. 

mediacioun,  16  36,  38/i6  ;  dividing  by  two  (set'  also  dimydicion). 

medlede  nombre,  34  1  ;  a  number  formed  of  a  multiple  of  ten  and  a  digit 
(vide  componede,  composyt). 

medye,  17/8,  to  halve  ;  mediete,  halved,  17  30  ;  ymedit,  20/9. 

naturelle  progressioun,  45/22  ;  the  series  of  numbers  1,  2,  3,  etc. 

prodllCCiOUn,  multiplication,  aO/n. 

quadrat  nombre,  16  12  ;  a  number  formed  by  multiplying  a  given  number 
by  itself,  e.g.  '.» —  3  x  ;»,  a  square. 

rote,  7  25  ;  rootej"47'n  ;  root.  The  roots  of  squares  and  cubes  are  the 
numbers  from  which  the  squares  and  cubes  are  derived  by  multi- 
plication into  themselves. 

significatyf,  significant,  5/14.  The  significant  figures  of  a  number  are, 
strictly  speaking,    those   other   than   zero,    e.g.   in  3  6  5  0  4  0  0,   the 

significant   figures  are  .">,  6,  5,  -I.     Modern  usage,  however,  regards 
all  figures  between  the  two  extreme  significant  figures  as  significant, 

even  when  some  are  zero.     Thus,  in  the  above  example,  3  6  5  0  4  are 
considered  significant. 

solide  nombre,  -4 « >  37  ;  a  number  which  is  the  producl  of  three  other 

numbers,  • .  g.  66  =  11  x  2  x  3. 
superficial  nombre,  46  iS  ;  a  number  which  is  the  product  of  two  other 

numbers,  e.  g.  6  =  2  x  3. 
ternary,  consisting  of  three  digits,  51     . 
vnder  double,  a  digit  which  has  been  doubled,  48  3. 
vnder-trebille,  a  digit  which  has  been  trebled,  49/28 ;  vnder-triplat, 

49/39- 

W,  a  symbol  used  to  denote  half  a  unit,  17/33. 


GLOSSARY 


ablacioun,  taking  away,  36/21 

addyst,  haddest,  IO/37 

agregacioun,  addition,   45/22.     (First 

example  in  X.E.D.,  15  17.) 
a-3enen.es,  against,  23/io 
allgate,  always,  8/39 
als,  as,  22/24 

and,  if,  29/8  ;  &,  4/27  ;  &  yf,  2O/7 
a-nendes,  towards,  23/15 
aproprede,  appropriated,  34/27 
apwereth,  appears,  61/8 
arisy;t,  arises,  H/24 
a-rowe,  in  a  row,  29/ 10 
arsemetrike,  arithmetic,  33/ 1 
ayene,  again,  45/15 

bagle,  crozier,  67/ 12 

bordure  =  ordure,  row,  43/30 

borro,    inf.    borrow,    11 /'38  ;    imp.    ?. 

borowe,  12/20;  pp.  borwed,  12/15  ; 

borred,  12/19 
boue,  above,  42/34 


ferye  =  ferj>e,  fourth,  70/ 12 
figure  ==  figures,  5/i 
for-by,  past,  H/21 
fors;  no  f,  no  matter,  22/24 
forseth,  matters,  53/30 
forye  =  forbe,  forth,  71/8 
fyftye  =  fjftbe,  fifth,  70/i6 

grewe,  Greek,  33/13 

haluendel,  half,  I6/16;   haldel,  19/4  ; 

pL  haluedels,  I6/16 
hayst,  hast,  17/3,  32 
hast,  haste,  22/25 
heer,  higher,  9/35 
here,  their,  7/26 
here-a-fore,  heretofore,  13/7 
heyth,  was  called,  3/5 
hole,  whole,  4/39  ;  nolle,  17/i  ;  hoole, 

of  three  dimensions,  46/i 5 
holdy!>e,  holds  good,  30/5 
how  be  it  that,  although,  44/4 


caputule,  chapter,  7/26 
certayn,  assuredly,  I8/34 
clepede,  called,  47/7 
competently,  conveniently,  35/S 
ODmpt,  count,  47/29 
contynes,    contains,    21/i2  ;    pp. 

tenythe,  38/39 
craft,  art,  3/4 

distingue,  divide,  51/5 

egalle,  equal,  45/21 
excep,  except,  5/i6 
exclusede,  excluded,  34/37 
excressent,  resulting,  35/ 16 
exeant,  resulting,  43/26 
expone,  expound,  3/23 


lede  =  lete,  let,  8/37 

lene,  lend,  12/39 

lest,  least,  43/27 

lest  =  left,  71/9 

leue,  leave,  6/5  ;  pr.  3  s.  leues,  re- 
mains, II/19  ;  leus,  H/28  ;  pp.  laft, 
left,  19/24 

lewder,  more  ignorant,  3/3 

lust,  desirest  to,  45/ 13 

ly3t,  easy,  15  31 

lymytes,  limits,  34/iS  ;  lynes,  34/i2  ; 
lynees,  34/i7  ;  Lat.  limes,  pi.  limit,  s. 

maystery,    achievement ;    no    m.,    no 

achievement,  i.e.  easy,  19/io 
me,  indef.  pron.  one,  42/ 1 
mo,  more,  9/ 16 


83 


84 


Glossary. 


moder  =  more  (Lat.  majorem),  43/22 

most,  must,  30/3 

multipliede,    to  be  m.  =  multiplying, 

40/9 
mynvtes,  the  sixty  parts  into  which  a, 

unit  is  divided,  38/25 
myse-wroU,  mis-wrought,  14/u 

nether,  nor,  3 1/25 
nex,  next,  19/9 
no;t  nought,  5/7 
note,  not,  30/5 

00,  one,  42/20-;  0,  42/21 

omest,     uppermost,     higher,     35/26  ; 

omyst,  35/28 
omwhile,  sometimes,  45/31 
on,  oue,  8/29 
opyne.  plain,  47/8 
or,  before,  13/25 
or  =  ))e  o}>cr,  the  other,  2S/34 
ordure,  order,  34/9  ;  row,  43/ 1 
other,   or,    33/i3,   43/26  ;    other  .   .  . 

or,  either  .  .  .  or,  38/37 
ouerer,  upper,  42/15 
ouer-hippede,  passed  over,  43/ig 

recte,  directly,  27/2o 
remayner,  remainder,  56/28 
reprosentithe,  represented,  39/14 
resteth,  remains,  63/29 
rewarde,  regard,  48/6 
rew,  row,  4/8 

rewle,  row,  4/20,  7/i2;  rewele,  4/iS; 
rewles,  rules,  5/33 

s.  =  scilicet,  3/8 

sentens,  meaning,  14/29 

signifye(tyf),  5/13.  The  last  three 
letters  are  added  above  the  line, 
evidently  because  of  the  word  'sig- 
nificatyf  in  1.  14.  But  the  «So- 
lucio,'  which  contained  tlie  word, 
has  been  omitted. 

sithen,  since,  33/8 

some,  sum,  result,  40/ 17,  32 

sowne,  pronounce,  6/29 


Bingillatim,  singly,  7/25 

spices,  species,  kinds,  34/4 

spyl,  waste,  H/26 

styde,  stead,  I8/20 

subtrahe,    subtract,    48/i2  ;    pp, 

trayd,  13/21 
sythes,  times,  21/ 16 


sub- 


tan,  taught,  I6/36 

take,  pp.  taken  ;  t.  fro,  starting  from, 

45/22 
taward,  toward,  23/34 
thou^t,  though,  5/20 
trebille,  multiply  by  three,  49/26 
twene,  two,  8/ 11 
]>OW,  though,  25/15 

|'Ow;t,  thought;  be  ]>.,  mentally,  28/4 
])us  =  pis,  this,  2O/33 

vny,  unite,  45/io 

wel,  wilt,  H/31 

wete,  wit,  15/i6;   wyte,  know,  8/38; 

pr.  2  s.  wost,  12/38 
wex,  become,  50/i8 
where,  whether,  29/ 12 
wher  thurghe,  whence,  4 9/ 15 
worch,    work,    8/19;     wrica,     8/35; 

wyrch,  *'»/i9;  iimp.  s.  worch,  15/9  ; 

pp.  y-wroth,  13/24 
write,  written,  29/19;  y-write,  I6/1 
wryrchynge  =  wyrchynge,     working, 

30/4 
wt,  with,  55/8 

y-broth,  brought,  21/ iS 
ychon,  each  one,  29/ 10 
ydo,  done,  added,  9/6 
ylke,  same,  5/12 
ydyech,  alike,  22/23 
y-my;t,  been  able,  12/2 
y-now;t,  enough,  15,31 
yove,  given,  45/33 
y'.  that,  52/8 
y-write,  v.  write, 
y-wroth,  v.  worch. 


ynov^t,  I8/34 


(ftaiilfl   (ftitfllish   jfest   £orictii 


COMMITTEE   OF  MANAGEMENT: 

Honorary  Director : 
SIR  I.  GOLLANCZ,  F.B.A.,  Litt.D.,  KING'S  COLLEGE,  LONDON,  W.C.  2. 

Assistant  Director  and  Secretary : 

Miss   MABEL   DAY,   D.Lit.,  15,  ELGIN   COURT,   ELGIN   AVENUE, 

LONDON,  W.  9. 

"J™    .  Prof.  G.  L.  KlTTREDQE,  Harvard  Coll.,  Canibr.,  Mass. 

American    ICnairmen  :   piof  j    w    BrigiiTj  Johna  Hopkins  Univ.,  Baltimore. 

J  Hon.  Sec.  :  Fruf.  Carleton  Brown,  Univ,  of  Minnesota. 

Dr.  HENRY   BRADLEY,   E.B.A.,  D.Lit.      Sir  SIDNEY  LEE,  F.B.A.,  Lirr.D. 
Professor  R.  W.   CHAMBERS,  D.Lit.       Mr.  HENRY   LITTLEHALES. 
Rev.  Dr.  ANDREW  CLARK.  Professor    A.    W.  POLLARD,   i 

Mr.   W.  A.  DALZIEL.  F.B.A. 

Professor  vV.  P.  KER,  F.B.A.,  LL.D.  Mr.  ROBERT   STEELE. 

Sir  G.  E.  WARNER,  F.B.A.,  D.Lit. 

Bankers  : 

THE  NATIONAL  PROVINCIAL  AND  UNION  LANK  OF  ENGLAND, 
2,  PRINCES  STREET,  LONDON,  E.<  .  2. 


The  Subscription  to  the  Society,  which  constitutes  membership,  is 
£2  2s.  a  year  for  the  annual  publications,  from  li'21  onwards,  due  in 
advance  on  the  1st  of  JANUARY,  and  should  be  paid  by  Cheque,  Postal 
Order,  or  Money  Order,  crost  'National  Provincial  and  Union  Bank  of 
England,'  to  the  Secretary,  Dr.  Mabel  Day,  15,  Elgin  Court,  Elgin 
Avenue,  London,  W.  9.  The  Society's  Texts  can  also  be  purchased 
separately  through  a  bookseller  at  the  prices  put  after  them  in  the 
Lists. 


Any  Member  could  save  time  and  trouble  by  sending  the  Secretary 
an  order  on  the  Member's  Banker  to  pay  his  subscription  each  January, 
until  countermanded.  A  printed  form  for  this  purpose  would  be  sent  on 
a  [(plication  to  the  Secretary. 

The  Early  English  Text  Society  was  started  by  the  late 
Dr.  Furnivall  in  1864  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  the  mass  of  Old 
English  Literature  within  the  reach  of  the  ordinary  student,  and  of 
wiping  away  the  reproach  under  which  England  had  long  rested,  of 
having  felt  little  interest  in  the*  monuments  of  her  early  language 
and  life. 

On  the  starting  of  the  Society,  so  many  Texts  of  importance  were  at 
once  taken  in  hand  by  its  Editors,  that  it  became  necessary  in  18G7  to 
open,  besides  the  Original  Series  with  which  the  Society  began,  an  Extra 
Series  which  should  be  mainly  devoted  to  fresh  editions  of  all  that  is 
most  valuable  in  printed  MSS.  and  Caxton's  and  other  black-letter 
books,  though  first  editions  of  MSS.  will  not  be  excluded  when  the 
convenience  of  issuing  them  demands  their  inclusion  in  the  Extra 
Series.  From  1921  there  will  be  but  one  series  of  publications,  merging 
the  Original  and  E,>i,r<<  Series. 

During  the  fifty  years  of  the  Society's  existence,  it  has  produced, 
with  whatever  shortcomings,  and  at  a  cost  of  over  £35,000,  an  aim  mi  it  of 
good  solid  work  for  which  all  students  of  our  Language,  and  some  of 
our  Literature,  must  be  grateful,  ami  which  has  rendered  possible  the 
beginnings  (at  least)  of  proper  Histories  and  Dictionaries  of  that 
Language  and  Literature,  and  has  illustrated  the  thoughts,  the  life,  the 
manners  and  customs  of  our  forefathers  and  foremothers. 

But  the  Society's  experience  has  shown  the  very  small  number  of 
those  inheritors  of  the  speech  oT  Cynewulf,  Chaucer,  and  Shakspere, 
who  care  two  guineas  a  year  for  the  records  of  that  speech.  The  Society 
has  never  had  money  enough  to  produce  the  Texts  that  could  easily  have 
been  got  ready  for  it;  and  Editors  are  now  anxious  to  send  to  press  the 
work  they  have  prepared.  The  necessity  has  therefore  arisen  for  trying 
to  increase  the  number  of  the  Society's  members,  and  to  induce  its  well- 
wishers  to  help  it  by  gifts  of  money,  either  in  one  sum  or  by  instalments. 
The  Committee  trust  that  every  Member  will  bring  before  his  or  her 
friends  and  acquaintances  the  Society's  claims  for  liberal  support.  Until 
all  Early  English  MSS.  are  printed,  no  proper  History  of  our  Language 
or  Social  Life  is  possible. 


ORIGINAL    SERIES.      (One  guinea  each  year  up  to  1920.) 

Early  English  Alliterative  Poems,  ab.  1360  a.d.,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  B.  Morris.     16*.  180-4 

2.  Arthur,  ab.  1440,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.A.     4s.  „ 

3.  Lauder  on  the  Dewtie  of  Kyngia,  &c,  1556,  ed.  F.  Hall,  D.C.L.     4s.  „ 

4.  Sir  Gawayne  and  the  Green  Knight,  ab.  1360,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     10s.  ,, 

5.  Hume's  Orthographie  and  Congruitie  of  the  Britan  Tongue,  ab.  1617,  ed.  H.  B.  Wheatley.  4s.  1865 

6.  Lancelot  of  the  Laik,  ab.  1500,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat.    8s. 

7.  Genesis  &  Exodus,  ab.  1250,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.  8s.  „ 
S.  Morte  Arthure,  ab.  1440,  ed.  E.  Brock.  7s.  ,, 
9.  Thynneon  Speght's  ed.  of  Chaucer,  a.d.  1599,  ed.  Dr.  Q.  Kingsley  and  Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.  10s.               „ 

10.  Merlin,  ab.  1410,  Fart  I.,  ed.  H.  B.  Wheatley.     2s.  6d.  „ 

11.  Lyndesay's  Monarche,  &c,  1552,  Part  I.,  ed.  J.  Small,  M.A.     3s.  „ 

12.  Wright's  Chaste  Wife,  ab.  1462,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.A.     Is.  „ 

13.  Seinte  Marherete,  1200-1330,  ed.  Rev.  O.  Cockayne.  1866 

14.  Kyng  Horn,  Floris  and  Blancheflour,  &c,  ed.  Rev.  J.  R.  Lnmby,  D.D.,  reed.  Dr.  G.  H.  McKnight.  5s.     ,, 

15.  Political,  Religious,  and  Love  Poems,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.     7s.  6d.  ,, 

16.  The  Book  of  Quinte  Essence,  ab.  1460-70,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.    Is.  „ 

17.  Parallel  Extracts  from  45  MSS.  of  Piers  the  Plowman,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat.     Is.  „ 

18.  Hali  Meidenhad,  ab.  1200,  ed.  Rev.  O.  Cockayne,  re-edited  by  Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.    (v.  under  1920.) 

19.  Lyndesay's  Monarche,  ftc,  Part  II.,  ed.  J.  Small,  M.A.     3s.  6c/.  ,, 

20.  Richard  Rolle  de  Hampole,  English  Prose  Treatises  of,  ed.  Rev.  G.  G.  Perry-     (».  under  1920.)  ,, 

21.  Merlin,  Part  II.,  ed.  H.  B.  Wheatley.     4s.  ,, 

22.  Partenay  or  Lusignen,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat.     6s.  ,, 

23.  Dan  Michel's  Ayenbite  of  Inwyt,  1340,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     10s.  6d. 

24.  Hynins  to  the  Virgin  and  Christ ;  the  Parliament  of  Devils,  &c,  ab.  1430,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.     3s.  1867 

25.  The  Stacions  of  Rome,  the  PilgTim3' Sea-voyage,  with  Clene  Maydenhod,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.     Is.  ,, 

26.  Religious  Pieces  in  Prose  and  Verse,  from  R.  Thornton's  MS.,  ed.  Rev.  G.  G.  Perry.  5s.  [1913]  ,, 
27    Levins's  Manipulus  Vocabulorum,  a  ryming  Dictionary,  1570,  ed.  H.  B.  Wheatley.     12s.  ,, 

28.  William's  Vision  of  Piers  the  Plowman,  1362  a.d.  ;  Text  A,  Part  I.,ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat.    6s.  ,, 

29.  Old  English  Homilies  (ab.  1220-30  a. d.).     Series  I,  Part  I.     Edited  by  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.    7s.  ,, 

30.  Pierce  the  Ploughmana  Crede,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat.     2s.  ,, 

31.  Myrc's  Duties  of  a  Parish  Priest,  in  Verse,  ab.  1420  a.d.  ,  ed.  E.  Peacock.     4s.  1SG8 

32.  Early  English  Meals  and  Manners  :  the  Boke  of  Norture  of  John  Russell,  the  Bokes  of  Eeruynge, 

Curtasye,  and  Demeanor,  the  Babees  Book,  TJrbanitatis,  See. ,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.     12*.  ,, 

33.  The  Knight  de  la  Tour  Landry,  ab.  1440  a.d.     A  Bock  for  Daughters,  ed.  T.  Wright,  M.A. 
31.  Old  English  Homilies  (before  1300  a.d. ).     Series  I,  Part  II.,  ed.  R.  Morris,  LL.D.    8s. 

35.  Lyndesay's  Works,  Part  III.  :  The  Historic  and  Testament  of  Squyer  Meldrum,  ed.  F.  Hall.    2s.  ,, 

36.  Merlin,  Part  III.     Ed.  II.  B.  Wheatley.    On  Arthurian  Localities,  by  J.  S.  Stuart  Glennie.     12s.  1869 

37.  Sir  David  Lyndesay's  Works,  Part  IV.,  Ane  Satyre  of  the  Three  Estaits.     Ed.  F.  Hall,  D.C.L.    4s. 
:-.   William's  Vision  of  Piers  the  Plowman,  Tart  II.    Text  B.     Ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     10s.  6d. 

'i  i.  Alliterative  Romance  of  the  Destruction  of  Troy.     Ed.  D.  Donaldson  it  G.  A.  Panton      PL  I.     10*.  6tl. 

40.  English  Gilds,  their  Statutes  and  Customs,  1389  a.d.     Edit.  Toulmin  Smith  and   Lucy  T.  Smith, 

with  an  Essay  on  Gilds  and  Trades-Unions,  by  Dr.  L.  Brentano.     21s.  1870 

41.  William  Lauder's  Minor  Poems.     Ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.    3s.  ,, 

42.  Bemardus  De  Cura  Rei  Famuliaris,  Early  Scottish  Prophecies,  Ac.  Ed.  J.  R.  Lnmby,  M.A.  2s.  ,, 
4:3.  Ratis  Raving,  and  other  Moral  and  Religious  Pieces.  Ed.  J.  R  Luinby,  M.A.  3s.  ,, 
4  1.  The  Alliterative  Romance  of  Joseph  of  Arimathie,  or  The  Holy  Grail:    from   the  Vernon  MS.; 

with  W.  de  Worde'a  and  Pynsori's  Lives  of  Joseph  :  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.    5s.  1^71 

!"■.  King  Alfred's  West-Saxon  Version  of   Gregory's  Pastoral  Care,   edited  from   2   MSS.,   with  an 
English  translation,  by  Henry  Sweet,  Esq.,  B.A.,  Balliol  College,  Oxford.    Part  I.    10s. 

46.  Legends  of  the  Holy  Rood,  Symbols  of  the  Passion  and  Cross  Poems,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.    10s. 

47.  Sir  David  Lyndesay's  Works,  Part  V.,  ed.  Dr.  J.  A.  II.  Murray.  3s.  ,, 
4--.  The  Times'  Whistle,  and  other  Poems,  by  R.  ('.,  161 C  ;  ed.  by  J.  M.  Cowper,  Esq.     6s. 

49.  An   Old  English  Miscellany,   containing  a  Bestiary,  Kentish  Sermons,  Proverbs  of   Alfred,  and 

Religions  Poems  of  the  13th  cent.,  ed.  from  the  MSS.  by  the  Rev.  R.  Morris,  LL.D.    10s.  1872 

50.  King  Alfred's  West-Saxon  Version  of  Gregory's  Pastoral  Care,  ed.  H.  Sweet,  M.A.     Part  II.     10s.  ,, 

51.  The  Life  of  St  Juliana,  •_'  versions,  a.d.  1230,  with  translations  ;  ed.  T.  O.  Cockayne  &  E.  Brock.     2s. 

52.  Palladius  on  Husbondrie,  englisht  (ab.  1420  A.D.),ed.  Rev.  Barton  Lodge,  M.A.     Part  I.     10s. 

53.  Old-English  Homilies,   Series  II.,  and  three  Hymns  to  the  Virgin  and    God,  13th-century,   with 

the  music  to  two  of  them,  in  old  and  modern  notation  ;  ed.  Rev.  R.  Morris,  LL.D.    8s.  1873 

54.  The  Vision  of  Piers  Plowman,  Text  C  :  Richard  the  Redeles   by  William,  the  author  of  the    Vision, 

and  The  Crowned  King;  Part  III.,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     18s. 

55.  Generydes.  a  Romance,  ab.  1440  a.d.  ed.  W.  Aldis  Wright,  M.A.     Part  I.    3s. 


4  The  Original  Series  of  the  "Early  English   Text  Society:' 

56.  The  Gest  Hystoriale  of  the  Destruction  of  Troy,  in  alliterative  verse  ;  ed.  by  D.  Donaldson,  Esq., 

and  the  late  Rev.  G.  A.  Panton.     Part  II.     10s.  6d.  1874 

57.  The  Early  English  Version  of  the  "  Cursor  Mundi  "  ;  in  four  Texts,  edited  hy  the  Rov.  R.  Mirris, 

11.  A.,  LL.  D.    Part  I,  with  2  photolithographic  facsimiles.    10s.  6(7.  „ 

58.  The  Bliekling  Homilies,  071  A.v>.,  ed.  Rev.  R.  Morris,  LL.D.     Part  I.     8s. 

VJ.  The  "  Cursor  Mundi  "  in  four  Texts,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris      Part  II.     15s.  1875 

GO    Meditacyuns  on  the  Soper  of  our  Lorde  (by  Robert  of  Brunne),  edited  by  J.  M.  Cowper.     2s.  6d.  ,, 

61.  The  Romance  and  Propheoies  of  Thomas  of  Erceldoune,  from  5  MSS". ;  ed.  Dr.  J.  A.  H.  Murray.  10s.  fid.     ,, 

62.  The  "Cursor  Mundi,"  in  four  Texts,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     Part  III.     15s.  1876 
6:1.  The  Bliekling  Homilies,  071  a. p.,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     Part  II.     7s.  „ 

C  I.  Francis  Thynne's  Embleames  and  Epigrams,  a.d.  1600,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.    7s.  „ 

65.  Be  Domes  Drcge  (KeAe's  De  Die  Judicii),  &c,  ed.  J.  R.  Lumby,  B.D.     2s. 

6ii.  The  "  Cursor  Mundi,"  in  four  Texts,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     Part  IV.,  with  2  autotypes.    10s.  1877 

67.  Notes  on  Piers  Plowman,  by  the  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     Parti.     21s. 

68.  The  "Cursor  Mundi,"  in  4  Texts,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     Part  V.     25s.  187S 
60.  Adam  Davie's  5  Dreams  about  Edward  II.,  &c,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.A.     5«.  „ 

70.  Generydes,  a  Romance,  ed.  W.  Aldis  Wright,  M.A.     Part  II.     4s.  ,, 

71.  The  Lay  Folks  Mass-Book,  four  texts,  ed.  Rev.  Canon  Simmons.     25s.  1679 

72.  Palladiuson  Husbondrie,  englisht  (ab.  1420  A. P.).     Tart  II.     Ed.  S.  J.  Heritage,   li.  A.     15s.  „ 

73.  The  Bliekling  Homilies,  971  A.D.,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     Part  III.     10s.  1680 

74.  English  Works  of  Wyclif,  hitherto  imprinted,  ed.  F.  D.  Matthew,  Esq.     20s. 

75.  Catholicon  Anglicum,  an  early  English  Dictionary,  from  Lord  Monson's  MS.  A.r>.  14S3,  ed.,  with 

Introduction  &  Notes,  by  S.  J.  Heritage,  B.A.  ;  and  with  a  Preface  by  H.  B.  Wheatley.    20s.  1881 

76.  Aelfric's  Metrical  Livjs  of  Saints,  in  MS.  Cott.  Jul.  E  7.,  ed.  Rev.  Prof.  Skeat,  M.A.     Parti.     10s. 

77.  Beowulf,  the  unique  MS.  autotyped  and  transliterated,  edited  by  Prof.  Zupitza,  Ph.D.     25s.  1882 

78.  The  Fifty  Earliest  English  Wills,  in  the  Court  of  Probate,  13S7-1439,  ed.  by  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.A.    7s.     ,, 
70.  King  Alfred's  Orosius,  from  Lord  Tollcmache's  9th  century  MS.,  Part  I,  ed.  H.  Sweet,  M.A.    13s.  188S 
70  6.   Extra  Vol  a,  ne.  Facsimile  of  the  Epinal  Glossary,  ed.  H.  Sweet,  M.A.     15s.  ,, 
SO.  The  Early-English  Life  of  St.  Katherine  and  its  Latin  Original,  ed.  Dr.  Einenkel.    12s.  1884 

81.  Piers  Plowman  :  Notes,  Glossary,  &c.  Part  IV,  completing  the  work,  ed.  Rev.  Prof.  Skeat,  M.A.  18«.      ,, 

82.  Aelfric's  Metrical  Lives  of  Saints,  MS.  Cott.  Jul.  E  7.,  ed.  Rev.  Prof.  Skeat,  M.  A.,  LL.D.  Part  II.   12s.  1885 

83.  The  Oldest  English  Texts,  Charters,  &c,  ed.  H.  Sweet,  M.A.     20s.  „ 

84.  Additional  Analogs  to  '  The  Wright's  Chaste  Wife,*  No.  12,  by  W.  A.  Clonston.     Is.  18S6 

85.  The  Three  Kings  of  Cologne.    2  English  Texts,  and  1  Latin,  ed.  Dr.  C.  Horstmann.    17s.  ,, 

86.  Prose  Lives  of  Women  Saints,  ab.  1610  a. p.,  ed.  from  the  unique  MS.  by  Dr.  C.  Horstmann.'    12s.  ,, 

87.  The  Early  South-English  Legendaiy  (earliest  version),  Laud  MS.  10S,  ed.  Dr.  C.  Horstmann.     20s.  1887 
S3.  Hy.  Bradshaw's  Life  of  St.  Werburghe  (Pynson,  1521),  ed.  Dr.  C.  Horstmann.     10s.  ,, 

89.  Vicesand  Virtues,  from  the  unique  MS.,  ab.  1200  A.D.,ed.  Dr.  F.  Holtliausen.     Part  I.     8s.  18S8 

90.  Anglo-Saxon  and  Latin  Rule  of  St.  Benet,  interlinear  Glosses,  ed.  Dr.  H.  Logeman.     12s.  „ 

91.  Two  Fifteenth-Century  Cookery-Books,  ab.  1430-1450,  edited  by  Mr.  T.  Austin.     10s.  ,, 

92.  Eadwine's  Canterbury  Psalter,  from  the  Trin.  Cambr.MS.,  ab.  1150  A.n.,cd.F.  Harsley,  B.A.  Pt.  I.  lit.  1889 

93.  Defensor's  Liber  Scintillarum,  edited  from  the  MSS.  by  Ernest  Rhodes,  B.A.     12s. 

94.  Aelfric's  Metrical  Lives  of  Saints,  MS.  Cott.  Jul.  E  7,  Part  III.,  ed.  Prof.  Skeat,  Litt.D.,  LL.D.     15s.  1S00 

95.  The  Old-English  version  of  Bede's  Ecclesiastical  History,  reed,  by  Dr.  Thomas  Miller.   Part  I,  §  1.  ISs.   ,, 

96.  The  Old-English  version  of  Bede's  Ecclesiastical  History,  re-ed.  by  Dr.  Thomas  Miller.  Pt.  I,  §  2.  15s  1891 

97.  The  Earliest  English  Prose  Psalter,  edited  from  its  2  MSS.  by  Dr.  K.  D.  Buelbring.    Tart  I.    15s. 

9S.  Minor  Poems  of  the  Vernon  JUS.,  Part  I.,  ed.  Dr.  C.  Horstmann.     20s.  1892 

90.  Cursor  Mundi.    Part  VI.    Preface,  Notes,  and  Glossary,  ed.  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.    10s.  ,, 

100.  Capgrave's  Life  of  St.  Katharine,  ed.  Dr.  C.  Horstmann,  with  Forewords  by  Dr.  Furnivall.     20s.  1893 

101.  Cursor  Mundi.     Part  VII.     Essay  on  the  MSS.,  their  Dialects,  ftc,  by  Dr.  II.  Hupe.     10s.  ,, 

102.  Lanfranc's  Cirurgie,  ab.  1100  a.d.,  ed.  Dr   R.  von  Fleischhacker.     Parti.     20s.  1894 

103.  The  Legend  of  the  Cross,  from  n  12th  century  MS.,  &c,  ed.  Prof.  A.  S.  Napier  M.  A.,  Ph.D.    7s.  6<f. 

101.  The  Exeter  Book  Anglo-Saxon  Poems),  re-edited  from  the  unique  MS.  by  I.  Gollanez,  M.A.  Parti.  20s.  1S95 
10  i.  The  Prymeror  Lay-Folks'  Prayer-Book,  Camb.  Univ.  MS.,  ab.  1420,  ed.  Henry  Littlehales.  Part  I.  10s.  ,, 

106.   R   Misyn's  Fire  of  Love  and  Mending  of  Life    Hampole),  1434,  1485,  ed.  Rev.  R.  Harvey,  M.A.     15s.  1S96 
1  17.   The  English  Conquest  of  Ireland,  .in.  1166  1185,  '.'  Texts,  1425,  1  M0,  Pt.  I.  ed.  Dr.  Furnivall.     15s. 

108.  Child-Marriages  and -Divorces,  Trothplights,  &c.    Chester  Depositions,  1561-6,  ed.  Dr.  Furnivall.    15s.  1897 

109.  The  Prymer  or  Lay-Folks  Prayer  Book,  ab.  1420,  ed.  Henry  Littlehales.     Part  II.     10s, 

110.  The  Old-English  Version  of  Bede's  Ecclesiastical  History,  ed.  Dr.  T.  Miller.     Fart  II,  §  1.     15s.  1S0S 

111.  The  Old-English  Version  of  Bede's  Ecclesiastical  nistory,  ed.  Dr.  T.  Miller.     Part  II,  §  2.     15s.  ,, 

112.  Merlin,  Part  IV:  Outlines  of  the  Legend  of  Merlin,  by  Prof.  W.  E.  Mead,  Ph.D.     15s.  1S99 

113.  Queen  Elizabeth's  Englishings  of  Boethius.  Plutarch  Ac.  &c,  ed.  Miss  C.  Pemberton.     15s.  ,, 

114.  Aelfric's  Metrical  Lives  of  Saints,  Part  IV  and  last,  ed.  Prof.  Skeat,  I. itt.lv,  LL.D.     10s.  1900 

115.  Jacob's  Well,  edited  from  the  unique  Salisbury  Cathedral  M8.  by  Dr.  A.  Brandeis.     Parti.    10s.  „ 

116.  An  Old-English  Martyrology,  re-edited  by  Dr.  G.  Herzfeld.    10s  ,, 

117.  Minor  Poems  of  the  Vernon  MS.,  edited  by  Dr.  P.  J.  FumivaU.     Part  II.     15s.  1901 

118.  The  Lay  Folks'  Catechism,  ed.  by  Canon  Simmons  and  Rev.  H.  E,  Nolloth,  M.A.     5s.  „ 

119.  Robert  of  Brunne' s  Handlyng  Synne  (1808),  and  its  French  original,  re-rd.  by  Dr.  Furnivall.   Pt.  I.   10s. 

120.  TheRuleof  St.  Benet  in  Northern  Prose  and  Verse  &  Caxton's  Summary,  ed.  by  E.  A.  Kock.     15s  19(2 


TJte  Original  Series  of  the  "  Early  English  Text  Society."  5 

121.  The  laud  MS.  Troy-Book,  ed.  from  the  unique  Laud  MS.  595,  by  Dr.  J.  E.  Wulfing.    Part  I.    15s.  1902 

122.  The  laud  MS.  Troy-Book,  ed.  from  the  unique  Laud  MS.  595,  by  Dr.  J.  E.  Wulfing.    Part  II.    20s.  1903 

123.  Robert  of  Brunne's  Handlyng  Synne  (1303),  and  its  French  original,  re-ed.  by  Dr.  Furnivall.  Pt.  II.  10s.    ,, 

124.  Twenty-six  Political  and  other  Poems  from  Digby  MS.  102  &c,  ed.  by  Dr.  J.  Kail.     Part  I.     10s.  1904 

125.  Medieval  Records  of  a  London  City  Church,  ed.  Henry  Littlehales.     Part  I.     10s.  ,, 
120.  An  Alphabet  of  Tales,  in  Northern  English,  from  the  Latin,  ed.  Mrs.  M.  M.  Banks.     Put  I.     10s.  „ 

127.  An  Alphabet  of  Tales,  in  Northern  English,  from  the  Latin,  ed.  Mrs.  M.  M.  Banks.     Part  II.     10s.  1905 

128.  Medieval  Records  of  a  London  City  Churoh,  ed.  Henry  Littlehales.     Part  II.     10s.  ,, 

129.  The  English  Register  of  Oodstow  Nunnery,  ed.  from  the  MSS.  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  AndrewClaik.  Pt.  I.  10s.    „ 

130.  The  English  Register  of  Godstow  Nunnery,  ed.  from  the  MSS.  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  A.  Clark.    Pt.  II.    15s.  1906 

131.  The  Brut,  or  The  Chronicle  of  England,  edited  from  the  best  MSS.  by  Dr.  F.  Brie.     Parti.     10s.  ,, 

132.  John  Metham's  Works,  edited  from  the  unique  MS.  by  Dr.  Hardin  Craig.     15s.  „ 

133.  The  English  Register  of  Oseney  Abbey,  by  Oxford,  ed.  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  A.  Clark.     Part  I.     15s.  1907 

134.  The  Coventry  Leet  Book,  edited  from  the  unique  MS.  by  Miss  M.  Dormer  Harris.     Part  I.     15s.  „ 

135.  The  Coventry  Leet  Book,  edited  from  the  unique  MS.  by  Miss  M.  Dormer  Harris.     Part  II.     15s.  1908 
1356.  Extra  Issue.  Prof.  Manly's  Piers  Plowman  &  its  Sequence,  urging  the  fivefold  authorship  of  the  Vision. 

5s.     On  sale  to  Members  only. 

130.  The  Brut,  or  The  Chronicle  of  England,  edited  from  the  best  MSS.  by  Dr.  F.  Brie.     Tart  II.     15s.  ,, 

137.  Twelfth- Century  Homilies  in  MS.  Bodley  343,  ed.  by  A.  O.  Bel  four,  M.  A.    Part  I,  the  Text.     15s.  1909 

138.  The  Coventry  Leet  Book,  edited  from  the  unique  MS.  by  Miss  M.  Dormer  Harris.     Part  III.     15s.  ,, 

139.  John  Arderne's  Treatises  on  Fistula  in  Ano,  &c,  cd.  by  D'Arcy  Power,  51. D.     15s.  U'10 
139  6,  c,  d,  e,  Extra  Issue.   The  Piers   Plowman  Controversy:    6.  Dr.  Jusserand's  1st  Reply  to  Prof. 

Manly ;    c.  Prof,  Manly's  Answer  to  Dr.  Jusserand  ;    (/.  Dr,  Jusserand's  2nd  Reply  to  Prof.  Manly ; 
e.  Mr.  R.  W.  Chambers's  Article  ;    /,  Dr.  Henry   Bradley's   Rejoinder  to   Mr,    R.  W.  Chambers 

(issued  separately).    10s.  ,, 

140.  Capgrave's  Lives  of  St.  Augustine  and  St.  Gilbert  of  Sempringham,  a.d.  1451,  ed.  by  John  Munro.    10s.    „ 

141.  Earth  upon  Earth,  all  the  known  texts,  ed.,  with  an  Introduction,  by  Miss  Hilda  Murray,  M.A.    10s.  191 1 
1.42.  The  English  Register  of  Godstow  Nunnery,  edited  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  Andrew  Clark.     Part  III.     10s. 

143.  The  Wars  of  Alexander  the  Great,  Thornton  MS.,  ed.  J.  S   Westlake,  M.A.     10s. 

144.  The  English  Register  of  Oseney  Abbey,  by  Oxford,  edited  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  Andrew  Clark.     Part  II. 

10s.  1912 

145.  The  Northern  Passion,  ed.  by  Miss  F.  A.  Foster,  Ph.D.    rart  I,  the  four  parallel  texts.    15*.  ,, 
140.  The  Coventry  Leet  Book,  ed.  Miss  M.  Dormer  Harris.    Introduction,  Indexes,  etc.     Part  IV.     10s.  1913 

147.  The  Northern   Passion,  ed.  Miss  F.  A.  Foster,  Ph.D.,  Introduction,  French   Text,  Variants  and 

Fragments,  Glossary.     Part  II.     15s.  ,, 
[Au  enlarged  re-print  of  No.  20,  Religious  Pieces  in  Prose  and  Verse,  from  the  Thornton  Ms., 
edited  by  Rev.  G.  G.  Perry.     5s.] 

148.  A  Fifteenth-Century  Courtesy  Book  and  Two  Franciscan  Rules   edited  by  R.  W.  Chambers,  M.A., 

Litt.D.,  and  W.  W.  Seton,  M.A.     7s.  6d.  1914 

149.  Sixty-three  Lincoln  Diocese  Documents,  cd.  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  Andrew  Clark.     15s.  ,, 

150.  The  Old-English  Rule  of  Bp.  Chrodegang,  and  the  Capitula  of  Bp.  Theodulf,  ed.  Prof.  Napier,  Ph.  D. 

7s.  M.  ,, 

151.  The  Lanterne  of  Light,  ed.  by  Miss  Lilian  M.  Swinburn,  M.A.     15*.  1915 

152.  Early  English  Homilies,  from  Vesp.  D.  XIV.,  ed.  by  Miss  Rubie  D.-N.  Warner.    Part  I,  Text.    15«.  „ 

153.  Mandeville's  Travels,  ed.  by  Professor  Paul  Hamelius.     Part  I,  Text.     15s.  1916 
1J4.  Mandeville's  Travels  (Notes  and  Introduction).    15s.     [Nearly  Ready.  ,, 

155.  The  Wheatley  MS.,  ed.  by  Miss  Mabel  Day,  M.A.     30s.  1917 

156.  Reginald  Pecock's  Donet,  from  Bodl.  MS.  910  ;  ed.  by  Miss  E.  Vaughan  Hitchcock.     35*.  191S 

157.  Harmony  of  the  Life  of  Christ,  from  MS.  Pepys  249S,  ed.  by  Miss  Margery  Goates.     15s.     [Ntarly 

Ready.  1919 

158.  Meditations  on  the  Life  and  Passion  of  Christ,  from  MS.   Addit.    11307,   cd.  by  Miss   Charlotte 

D'Evelyn.     20s.  „ 

159.  Vices  and  Virtues,  Part  II.,  ed.  Prof.  F.  Holtliansen.     12*.  1920 

[A  re-print  of  No.  20,  English  Prose  Treatises  of  Richard  Rolle  de  Hampole,  ed.  Rev.  G.  G.  Perry. 

5s.] 
[A  re-edition  of  No.  IS,  Hali  Meidenhad,  ed.  O.  Cockayni-,  with  a  variant  MS.,  Bodl.  34,  hitherto 

imprinted,  cd.  Dr.  Furnivall.     12s.]  ,, 


EXTTtA   SERIES.     (One  guinea  each  year  up  to  1920.) 
The  Publications  for  1867-1916  (one  guinea  each  year)  are  :— 

[.  William  of  Palcrne;  or,  William  and  the  Werwolf.     Re-edited  by  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     13s.  1867 

II.  Early  English  Pronunciation  with  eBpecial  Reference  to  Shakspere  and  Chaucer,  by  A.  J.  Ellis, 
F.R.S.     Part  1.     10*. 

III.  Caxton's  Book  or  Cuitesye,  in  Three  Versions.     Ed.  F.  J.  FurnivalL    5s.  1868 

IV.  Havelok  the  Dane.     Re-edited  by  the  Rev.  W.  W.  Bkeat,  M.A.     ins. 

V.  Chaucer's  Boethius.    Edited  from  the  two  best  MSS.  by  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Morris.     12s. 

VI.  Chevclere  Assigne.    Re-edited  from  the  unique  MS.  by  Lord  Aldenham,  M.A.    3s.  „ 

VII.  Early  English  Pronunciation,  by  A.  J.  Ellis,  F.R.S.     Part  II.     10s.  1869 
VIII    aueene  Elizabethes  Achademy,  &c.     Ed.  F.  .1.  Furnivall.     Essays  on  early  Italian  and   German 

Books  of  Courtesy,  by  W.  M.  Rossetti  and  Dr.  E.  Oswald.     13s. 
IX.  Awdeley'sFraternitye  of  Vacabondes,  Harman's  Caveat,  &c.     Ed.  E.  Viles  A  F.J.  Furnivall.     Vs.  0-7.      ,, 
X     Andrew  Boorde's  Introduction  of  Knowledge,  1547,  Dyetary  of  Helth,  1542,  Barnes  in  Defence  of  the 

Berde,  1542-3.     Ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall.     18s.  1870 

XI.  Barbour's  Bruce,  Part  I.    Ed.  from  MSS.  and  editions,  by  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     12s. 

XII  Ens-land  in  Henrv  VIII. 's  Time:  a  Dialogue  between  Cardinal  Pole*  Lupset,  by  Thorn.  StarUey, 
Chaplain  to  Henry  VIII.    Ed.  J.  M.  Cowper.     Part  II.     l'.'s.    (Part  I.  is  No.  XXXII,  1878,8*.)  1871 

XIII  A  Supplicacyon  of  the  Beggers,  by  Simon  Fish,  152S  0  A.D.,  ed.  P.  J.  Furnivall  ;  with  A  Suppli- 
cation to  our  Moste  Soueraigne  Lorde ;  A  Supplication  of  the  Poore  Commons;  ami  The  Decayc  of 
England  by  the  Great  Multitude  of  Sheep,  ed.  by  .1.  M.  Cowper,  Esq.     6*. 

XIV.  Early  English  Pronunciation,  by  A.  .1.  Ellis,  Ks.(.,  K.K.K.     Part  III.     10s.  ,, 

XV    Robert  Crowley's   Thirty-One  Epigrams,  Voyce  of  the  Last  Trumpet,  Way  to  Wealth,  Sec,    a.d. 

i550-l,  edited  by  .1.  M.  Cowjier,  Esq.     12s.  1S72 

XVI.  Chaucer's  Treatise  on  the  Astrolabe.     Ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     6s. 

XVII.  The  Ooraplaynt  of  Scotlande,  1549  a.  d.,  with  4  Tracts    1542-48),  ed.  Dr   Murray.     Parti.     10«. 

XVIII.  The  Complaynt  of  Sootlande,  1549  a.d.,  ed.  Dr.  Murray.     Partll.    Ss.  ls;a 

XIX.  Oure  Ladyes  Myrourc,  a.d.  1530,  ed.  Rev.  .1.  H.  Blunt,  M.A.     24s.  ,, 

XX.  Lovelich's  History  of  the  Holy  Grail  (ab.  1450  a. r>.),  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.  A.,  Ph.D.     Parti.     8*        1874 

XXI.  Barbour's  Bruce,  Part  II.,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.     4s.  ,, 

XXII.  Henry  Brinklow's  Complaynt  of  Roderyck  Mors  (ab.  1542)  :  and  The  Lamentaeion  of  a  Christian 
against  the  Citie  of  London,  made  by  Roderigo  Mors,  a.d.  1545.     Ed.  J.  M.  Cowper.    9s. 

XXIII.  Early  English  Pronunciation,  by  A.  J.  Kllis,  F.R.S.     Part  IV.     10s. 

XXIV.  Lovelich's  History  of  the  Holy  Grail,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.A.,  Ph.D.     Part  II.     10s.  1875 

XXV.  Guy  of  Warwick,  15th-century  Version,  ed.  Prof.  Zupitza.    Pari  1.    20*.  ,, 

XXVI.  Guy  of  Warwick,  15th-century  Version,  ed.  Prof.  Zupitza.    Part  II.    14s.  1876 

XXVII.  Bp.  Fishers  English  Works  (died  1585),  ed.  by  Prof.  ,1.  E.  B.  Mayor.     Part  I,  the  Text.     16*. 

XXVIII.  Lovelich's  Holy  Grail,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  M.A.,  Ph.D.     Part  III.    10s.  1877 

XXIX.  Barbour's  Bruce.     Part IH.,  ed.  Rev.  W.  W.  Skeat,  M.A.    21*. 

XXX.  Lovelioh's  Holy  Grail,  ed.  F.  .T.  Furnivall,  M.A. ,  Ph.D.      Part  IV.     15s.  1878 

XXXI.  The  Alliterative  Romance  of  Alexander  and  Dindimus,  (d.  Rev    W.  W.  Skeat.     fis.  ,, 

XXXII.  Starkey's"  England  in  Henry  VIII' s  time."  Pt.  I.  Starkey's  Life  and  Letters,  ed.  S.  J.  Borrtage.  8*.    ,, 

XXXIII.  Gesta  Romanorum  (englisht  ab.  1440),  ed.  S.  J.  Heritage,  B.A.     15*.  1870 

XXXIV.  The  Charlemagne  Romances:— 1.  Sir  Ferumb.as,  from  Ashm.    MS.  33,  ed.  S.  .1.  Heritage.     15», 

XXXV.  Charlemagne  Romances:— 2.  The  Sege  off  Melayne.  Sir  Otucll.  &c,  ed.  S.  J.  Herrtage.     12*.  liv> 

XXXVI.  Charleinaene  Romances:— 3.  Lyf  of  Charles  the  Grete,  Pt.  [.,  ed.  S.  J.  Herrtage.      16*. 

XXXVII.  Charlemagne  Romances  :— 4.  Lyf  of  Charles  the  Crete.  Pt.  II.,  id.  S     '.  Herrtage.     15s.  1881 

XXXVIII.  Charlemagne  Romances  :— 5.  The  Sowdone  of  Babylone,  rd.  Dr.  Hausknecht.     15*. 

XXXIX.  Charlemagne  Romances  :— 6.  Rauf  Colyear,  Roland.  Otuel,  .be.,  ed.  S.  .1.  Herrtage,  B.A.     15*. 

XL.  Charlemagne  Romances  : — 7.  Huon  of  Burdeux,  by  Lord  [Seniors,  ed.  S.  L.  Lee,  B.A.      Put  1.     15*.  ,, 

XLI.  Charlemagne  Romances  :— 9.  Huon  of  Burdcux,  by  Lord  Bemers,  cd.  S.   I..  Lee,  P.. A.      Pt.  II.      15*.  1883 
XLII.  Guy  of  Warwick:  2  texts  (Auchinleck  MS.  and  Caius  MS.),  v\.  Prof.  Zupitza.     Pari  I.     If*. 
XLIII.  Charlemagne  Romances:— 9.  Huon  of  Burdeux,  by  Lord  Berners,  ed.  S.  L.  Lee,  B.A.    Pt.  111.     li 

XI. IV.  Charlemagne  Romances  :  —10.  The  Four  Sons  of  Aymon,  id.  Miss  Octavia  Richardson.     Pt.  I.    15s.  ,, 

XL  V.  Charlemagne  Romances  :— 11.  The  Four  Son3  of  Aymon,  ed.  Miss  O.  Richardson.     Pt.  II.     20*.  1885 

XLVI.  SirBevisof  Hamton,  from  the  Auchinleck  and  other  MSS.,  ed.  Prof.  K.  Bribing,  Ph.D.  Part  I.   10*.  ,, 

XLVII.  The  Wars  of  Alexander,  el.  Rev.  Prof.  Skeat,  l.itt.D.,  III1.  1886 

XLVIU.  SirBevisof  Hamton,  ed.  Prof.  E.  KSlbing,  Ph.D.    Part  II.     10*.  ,, 

XI.IX.  Guy  of  Warwick,  2  texts  Auchinleck  and  Caius  MSS.),  Pt.  II.,  ed.  Prof.  J.  Zupitaa,  Ph.D.    15*.  1887 

L.  Charlemagne  Romances  :— 12.  Huon  of  Burdeux,  by  Lord  Berners,  ed.  S.  L.  Lee,  B.A.      Part  IV.     5*.  ,, 

I.I.  Torrent  of  Portyngale,  from  the  unique  MS.  in  the  Chetham  Library,  ed.  E.  Adam,  Ph.D.     10*.  ,, 

LIL  Bullein's  Dialogue  against  the  Feuer  Pestilence,  1578  (ed.  1,  1584).      Ed.  M.  A  A.  11.  Bullen.     10s.  18S8 

LIII.  Vicary's  Anatomie  of  the  Body  of  Man,  1548,  id.  I'i77,  ed.  1''.  ,1.  A  1  rn\   Furnivall.     Parti.     15*.  ,. 

I. IV.  Caxton's  Englishing  of  Alain  Chartier's  Curial,  I   !     Dr    P.  ■  L  Furnivall  *  Prof.  P.  Meyer.     5s.  ,, 


The  Extra  Series  of  the  "  Early  English  Text  Society."  7 

LV.    Barbour's  Bruce,  ed.  Rev.  Prof.  Skeat,  Litt.D.,  LL.D.     Part  IV.     5s.  1SS9 

LVI.  Early  English  Pronunciation,  by  A.  J.  Ellis,  Esq.j  F.R.S.     Pt.  V.,  the  present  English  Dialects.     25*.    ,, 

LVII.  Caxton's  Eneydos,  a.d.  1490,  coll.  with  its  French,  ed.  M.  T.  Culley,  M.A.  &  Dr.  F.J.  Furnivall.  13s.  1S90 

LVIII.  Caxton's  Blanchardyn  &  Eglantine,  c.  14S9,  extracts  from  ed.  1595,  <fc  French,  ed.  Dr.  L.  Kellner.  17s. 

LIX.  Guy  of  Warwick,  2  texts  (Auchinleck  and  Cains  MSS.),   Tart  111.,  ed.  Prof.  J.  Zupitza,  Ph.D.     15s.  1S91 

LX.  Lydgate's  Temple  of  Glass,  re-edited  from  the  MSS.  by  Dr.  J.  Schick.     15*. 

LXI.  Hoccleve's  Minor  Poems.  I  ,  from  the  Phillipps  and  Durham  MSS.,  ed.  F.  J.  Furnivall,  Ph.D.     15s.     1892 

LXII.  The  Chester  Plays,  re-edited  from  the  MSS.  by  the  late  Dr.  Hermann  Deimling.     Parti.     15*. 

LXI1I.  Thoma3  a  Kempis's  De  Imitatione  Christi,  englisht  ab.  1440,  &  1502,  ed.  Prof.  J.  K.  Ingram,    l.'.s.     1893 

LX1V.  Caxton's  Godfrey  of  Boloyne,  or  Last  Siege  of  Jerusalem,  1481,  ed.  Dr.  Mary  N.  Colvin.     15s. 

LXV.  Sir  Bevis  of  Ham  ton,  ed.  Prof.  E.  Kolbing,  Ph.D.     Part  III.    15s.  18?'4 

LXV1    Lydgate's  and  Burgh's  Secrees  of  Philisoffres  ('  Governance  of  Kings  and  Princes  '),  ab.  1445 — 50. 

ed.  B.  Steele,  B.A.     15*. 
LXVII.  The  Three  Kings'  Sons,  a  Romance,  ab.  1500,  Part  I.,  the  Text,  ed.  Dr.  Furnivall.     10s.  1895 

LXVIII.  Melusine,  the  prose  Romance,  ah.  1500,  Part  I,  the  Text,  ed.  A.  K.  Donald.     20s.  „ 

LXIX.  Lydgate's  Assembly  of  the  Gods,  ed.  Prof.  Oscar  L.  Triggs,  M.A.,  Ph.D.    15s.  1891 

LXX.  The  Digby  Plays,  edited  by  Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.     15s. 

LXXI.  The  Towneley  Plays,  ed.  Geo.  England  and  A.  W.  Pollard,  M.A.     15s.  1897 

LXXII.  Hoccleve's  Eegcment  of  Princes,  1411-12,  and  14  Poems,  edited  by  Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.  15s. 
LXXIII.  Hoccleve's  Minor  Poems,  II.,  from  the  Ashburnham  MS.,  ed.  I.  Gollancz,  M.A.  [At  Press. 
l.XXIV.  Secreta   Secretorum,   3  prose   Englishings,  one   by  Jas    Yonge,  1428,  ed.    R.    Steele,     B.A. 

Part  I.    ■_"■.  1898 

LXXV.  Speculum  Guidonis  de  Warwyk.  edite  1  by  Mis  G.  L.  Morrill,  M.A.,  Ph.D.    10s.  ,, 

LXXVI.  George  Ashby's  Poems,  &c,  ed.  Miss  Mary  Bateson.     15s.  1S'J9 

LXXVII.  Lydgate's  DeGuilleville's  Pilgrimage  of  the  Life  of  Man,  1426,  ed.  Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.   Part  I.   10s    ,, 
LXXY1II.  The  Life  and  Death  of  Mary  Magdalene,  by  T.  Robinson,  c.  1020,  ed.  Dr.  II.  O.  Sommer.     5s. 
LXXIX.  Caxton's  Dialogues,  English  and  French,  c.  1483,  ed.  Henry  Bradley,  MA.     10s.  1900 

LXXX.  Lydgate's  Two  Kightingale  Poems,  ed.  Dr.  Otto  Claiming.     5s.  ,, 

LXXXI.  Gower's  Confessio  Amantis,  edited  1>.  G.  C.  Macaulay,  M.A.     Vol.1.     15s.  „ 

LXXXII.  Gower's  Confessio  Amantis,  edited  by  G.  C.  Macaulay,  M.A.     Vol.  II.  1901 

LXXXIII.  Lydgate's  DeGuilleville's  Pilgrimage  of  the  Life  of  Man,  1420,  ed.  Dr.  F.J.  I'm  uivall.   Pt.  II.  10 
LXXXIV.  Lydgate's  Reason  and  Sensuality,  edited  by  Dr.  E.  Sieper.     Part  I.     5s.  ,, 

LXXXV.  Alexander  Scott's  Poems,  15CS,  from  the  unique  Edinburgh  MS.,  ed.  A.  K.  Donald,  B.A.     10*. 
LXXXVI.  William  of  Shoreham's  Poems,  re  ed.  from  the  unique  .MS.  by  Dr.  M.  Konrath.     Part  I.     10*.       ,, 
LXXXV1I.  Two  Coventry  Corpus-Christi  Plays,  re-edited  by  Hardin  Craig,  M.A.     10s. 

LXXXVI1I.  Le  Morte  Arthur,  re-edited  from  the  Harleian  MS.  2252  by  Prof.  Bruce,  Ph.D.    15s.  1903 

1.XXX1X.  Lydgate's  Reason  and  Sensuality,  edited  by  Dr.  E.  Sieper.     Part  II.     15*.  ,, 

XC.  English  Fragments  from  Latin  Medieval  Sei  vice-Books,  ed.  by  Ily.  Littlehales.     5s. 

XCI.  The  Macro  Plays,  from  Mr.  Cuniey's  unique  MS,  ed.  Dr.  Furnivall  and  A.  W.  Pollard,  M.A.     10*      1904 
XCII.  Lydgate's  DeGuileville's  Pilgrimage  of  the  Life  of  Man,  Part  III,  cd.  Miss  Locock.     10s. 
XCIII.  Lovelich's  Romance  of  Merlin,  from  the  unique  MS.,  ed.  Dr.  E   A.  Kock.     Part  I.     10s 
XCIV.  Respublica,  a  Play  on  Social  England,  a.d.  1553,  ed.  L.  A.  Magnus,  LL.B.     12s. 
XCV.  Lovelich's  History  of  the  Holy  Grail,  Pt.  V.  :  The  Legend  of  the  Holy  Grail,  by  Dorothy  Kempe.  6*.      ,, 
XCVI.  Mirk's  Peatial,  edited  from  the  MSS.  by  Dr.  Erbe.     Part  I.     12*.  „ 

XCVIl.  Lydgate's  Troy  Book,  edited  from  the  best  MSS.  by  Dr.  Ily.  Bergen.  Tart  I,  Books  [and  I  I.   1 
XCVHI.  Skelton's  Magnyfycence,  edited  by  Dr.  R.  I..  Ramsay,  with  an  Introduction.    Is.  •  I.  „ 

XCIX.  The  Romance  of  Emare,  re-edited  from  the  MS.  by  Miss  Edith  Rickert,  Ph.D.    7  . 
C.  The  Harrowing  of  Hell,  and  The  Gospel  of  Nicodemus,  reed,  by  Prof.  Huline,  M.A.,  Ph.D.     15*. 
CI.  Songs,  Carols,  &c,  from  Richard  Hill's  Balliol  MS.,  edited  by  It.  Roman  Dyboski.     1."..,-.  „ 

CII.  Promptorium  Parvulorum,  the  1st  English-Latin  Dictionary,  ed.  Rev.  A.  L.  Mayhew,  M.A.     21s.       1003 
CHI.  Lydgate's  Troy  Book,  edited  from  the  bet  MSS.  by  Dr.  Ily.  Bergen.     Part  II,  Book  III.     10*. 
CIV.  The  Non-Cycle  Mystery  Plays,  re-edited  by  O.  Waterhouse,  M.A.     15*. 

CV.  The  Tale  of  Beryn,  with  the  Pardoner  and  Tapster,  ed.  Dr.  I".  .).  Furnivall  and  W.  G.  Stone.     15*. 
C VI.  Lydgate's  Troy  Book,  edited  from  the  best  MSS.  by  Dr.  Hy.  Bergen.     Pari  III.    15s.  1910 

CVIL  Lydgate's  Minor  Poems,  edited  by  Dr.  II.  N.  MacCracken.     Put  I,  Religious  Poems.     1  ,, 

CVIII.  Lydgate's  Siege  of  Thebes,  re-edited  from  the  MSS.  by  Prof.  Dr.  A. Erdmann.  Pt.  J,  The  Text.  15«.  1911 
CIX  Partonope,  re-edited  from  its  3  MSS.  by  Dr.  A.  T.  Bodtker.    The  Texts.     15s. 
CX.  Caxton's  Mirrour  of  the  World,  with  all  the  woodcuts,  ed.  by  O.  II.  Pi  ioi  ,*M.  A.,  Litt.D.    15*. 
CXI.  Caxton's  History  of  Jason,  the  Text,  Part  I,  ed.  by  John  Munro.     15s. 

CXII.  Lovelich's  Romance  of  Merlin,  ed.  from  the  un  tque  US.  by  Prof.  E.  A.  Kock,  PhD.     15*.  1013 

CX1II.  Poems  by  Sir  John  Salusbury,  Robert  Chester,  and  others,  from  Christ  Church  MS.  184    &c     •  d 

by  Prof.  Carleton  Brown,  Ph.D.    15s. 
CM  V.  The  Gild  of  St.  Mary,  Lichfield,  ed.  by  the  late  Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.    15s.  1914 

CXV.  Th;  Chester  Plays.     Part  II,  re-edited  by  Dr.  Matthews.    15s. 

|'X\  I.  The  Paukne  Epistles,  ed.  Miss  M.  J.  Powell.     15s.  1016 

CXVII.  Bp.  Fisher's  English  Works,  Pt.  II,  ed.  by  the  Rev.  Ronald  IJ ayne.     15«. 

CXVIII.  The  Craft  of  Nombrynge,  ed.  by  R.  Bteele,  B.A.     15*.  1916 

CXIX.  The  Owl  and  Nightingale,  2  Texts  parallel,  ed.  by  the  late  G.  F.  II.  3yk<  s  and  .1.  H,  G.Grattan. 

15*.     [At  Pr*   . 
CXX.  Ludus  Co  entriae,  ed.  by  Miss  K.  S.  Block,  M.A.     30».     [Nearly  Ready.  1917 


ORIGINAL   SERIES. 

Forthcoming  issues  will  be  chosen  from  the  following :— 

Harmony  of  Life  of  Christ,  from  Pepj'sian  Library,  ed.  by  Miss  Margery  Goates.  [Ready, 
The  Alliterative  Siege  of  Jerusalem,  edited  by  the  late  Prof.  E.  Kolbing,  Ph.D.  [At  Press. 
A  Stanzaic  Exposition  of  the  Feasts  of  the  Church  and  the  Life  of  Christ  based  on  the  Ltgenda  Aurea,  ed.  from 

the  MS9.  Hail.  3900,  llarl.  2200,  and  Addit.  3S066,  by  Miss  F.  A.  Foster,  Ph.D.  [At  Press. 
The  Earliest  English  Apocalypse  with  a  Commentary,  edited  by  Dr.  Anna  C.  Paues.  [At  Press. 
Trevisa's  Dialogus  inter  Militem  et  Clericum,  Sermon  by  FitzRalph,  and  Begynyng*  of  the  World,  edited  fiom 

the  MSS.  by  Aaron  J.  Perry,  M.A. 
A  Critical  Edition  of  the  Old  English  Heptiteuch  (MS.  Iiodl.  Misc.  i09),  ed.  by  S.  J.  Crawford,  M.A.,  B.Litt. 
The  Sege  or  Battsll  of  Troy,  ed.  by  Miss  Baruicle. 
The  Pepysian  Southern  Passion,  ed.  by  Mrs.  Carloton  Brown. 
Three  Old  English  Prose  Tracts,  from  MS.  Cott.  Vitell.  A.  XV. ;  ed.  by  Dr.  S.  I.  Rypins. 


EXTRA  SERIES. 

The  Publications  due  up  to  1920  iu  ill  probably  be  chosen  from  :  — 

The  Owl  and  Nightingale,  2  Texts  parallel,  ed.  by  the  late  G.  F.  II.  Sykes  and  J.  H.  G.  Grattan.     [At  Press. 

The  "Coventry''  Plays,  ed.  by  Miss  Block,  Royal  Holloway  College. 

Lydgate's  Minor  Poems,  ed.  Dr.  II.  N.  MacCracken.     Part  II,  Secular  Poems.     [At  Press. 

Lydgate's  Troy  Book,  ed.  by  Dr.  Hy.  Bergen.     Part  IV,  Introduction,  Notes,  &c.     [At  Press. 

Lydgate's  Siege  of  Thebes,  re-edited  from  the  MSS.  by  Prof.  Dr.  A.  Erdmann.     Part  II,  Notes,  Ac. 

Seoreta  Seoretorum  :  three  prose  Englisliings,  ab.  1440,  ed.  R.  Steele,  b.  A.     Part  II.     [At  Press. 

The  Book  of  the  Foundation  of  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital,  London,  MS.  ab.  142J,  ed.  Sir  Norman  Moore.     |£.  t. 

Piers  Plowman,  the  A   Text,  re-edited  from  the  MSS.  by  Prof.  R.  W.  Chambers,  M.A.,  D.Lit.,  and  J.  H.  G. 

Grattan,  M.A.    [At  Press. 
King  Alisaunder,  two  parallel  texts,  ed.  from  Lincoln's  Inn  MS.  150  and  Laud.  Misc.  (322  by  L.  F.  Powell,  Esq. 
Caxton's  Paris  and  Vienne,  ed.  by  O.  II.  Prior,  Litt.D. 
Interludium  de  Clerico  et  Puella  and  Dux  Moraud,  ed.  Prof.  J.  M.  Manly. 


Other  texts  ore  in  preparation. 
August  1922. 


PUBLISHER 

LONDON:    HUMPHREY   MILFORD,   OXFORD   UNIV.   TRESS,   Amen  Cobnbr,  E.C.  4. 


PR 

Early  English  Text 

1119 

Society 

E5 

c Publications 2 

no. 118 

Extra  series 

PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


CIRCULATE  AS  MONOGRAPH